Turkey Utility Helicopter Program (TUHP)

TITLE PAGE

WARNING: PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

Warning: This document, or an embodiment of it in any media, discloses information which is
proprietary, is the property of Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation and/or its subsidiaries and suppliers,
is an unpublished work protected under applicable copyright laws, and is delivered on the
express condition that the document and the information contained therein are to be used,
disclosed, distributed, performed, displayed, and/or reproduced, in whole or in part (including
reproduction as a derivative work) solely as set forth in the Major Subcontract Agreement
between Sikorsky International Operations, Inc., a wholly-owned subsidiary of Sikorsky Aircraft
Corporation, and TUSAŞ-TÜRK HAVACILIK VE UZAY SANAYİİ A.Ş. of 21 February 2014, as
amended (“MSCA”). Except as provided in the MSCA, this document and the information
contained therein are not to be used, disclosed, distributed, performed, displayed, transmitted,
delivered and/or reproduced, in whole or in part (including reproduction as a derivative work), or
used for manufacture for anyone other than Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation and/or its subsidiaries
and suppliers without its written consent, and that no right is granted to disclose or so use any
information contained herein. All rights reserved. Any act in violation of applicable law may
result in civil and criminal penalties.

Any transmission of the document or information contained therein to Turkish Ministry of

National Defence Undersecretariat for Defence Industries (“SSM”) can only be sent to SSM as
set forth in Article 19.5 of the MSCA and is limited to written or oral disclosures.

WARNING – This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR; and the EAR.
Authorization is required prior to providing this technical data to any company, entity,
person, or destination.

ITAR/USML Category: VIII(i)

EAR Export Classification: ECCN 9E610.a, 9E991 and EAR 99

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Authorization is required prior to providing this technical data to any company, entity, person, or destination.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB
1 December 2010

TECHNICAL MANUAL

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES

VIBRATION MANUAL

SIKORSKY MODEL
S-70i

WARNING: THIS DOCUMENT, OR AN EMBODIMENT OF IT IN ANY MEDIA, DISCLOSES INFORMATION WHICH IS

PROPRIETARY, IS THE PROPERTY OF SIKORSKY AIRCRAFT CORPORATION AND/OR ITS SUBSIDIARIES, IS AN UNPUBLISHED
WORK PROTECTED UNDER APPLICABLE COPYRIGHT LAWS, AND IS DELIVERED ON THE EXPRESS CONDITION THAT IT IS NOT
TO BE USED, DISCLOSED, REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART (INCLUDING REPRODUCTION AS A DERIVATIVE WORK), OR
USED FOR MANUFACTURE FOR ANYONE OTHER THAN SIKORSKY AIRCRAFT CORPORATION AND/OR ITS SUBSIDIARIES
WITHOUT ITS WRITTEN CONSENT, AND THAT NO RIGHT IS GRANTED TO DISCLOSE OR SO USE ANY INFORMATION
CONTAINED HEREIN. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ANY ACT IN VIOLATION OF APPLICABLE LAW MAY RESULT IN CIVIL AND
CRIMINAL PENALTIES.

COPYRIGHT R 2010 SIKORSKY AIRCRAFT CORPORATION

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB
1 December 2010 Page A

NUMERICAL INDEX OF EFFECTIVE WORK PACKAGES/PAGES

List of Current Changes

Original 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 December 2010

Only those work packages assigned to the manual are listed in this index. Insert ____ dated ____. Dispose of superseded
and deleted work packages/pages. Superseded and deleted classified work packages/pages shall be destroyed in
accordance with applicable regulations. If changed pages are issued to a work package, insert the changed pages in the
applicable work package. The portion of text affected in a changed or revised work package is indicated by change bars
or the change symbol ’R’ in the outer margin of each column of text. A change to an illustration is indicated by a change
bar next to the figure title.

WP WP
Number Title Number Title
Title 005 00 Oil Cooler Vibration Check
Page A Numerical Index of Effective Work 006 00 Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking
Packages/Pages 007 00 Main Rotor Ground Balancing
001 00 Alphabetical Index 008 00 Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning
002 00 Introduction 009 00 Software Set Up Instructions
003 00 Tail Rotor Balance 010 00 Software/Data Management Instructions
004 00 Engine Output Shaft Balance

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS MANUAL IS 258 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

WP/Page Change WP/Page Change WP/Page Change

No. No. No. No. No. No.
Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 46 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1 - 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 005 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 64 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
001 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 009 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1 - 2 ................ 0 22 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
002 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 006 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 010 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1 - 8 ................ 0 1 - 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
003 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 30 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 12 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1 - 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 007 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
004 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1 - 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1 - 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 008 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 001 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

VIBRATION

MODEL S-70i

WP/SWP
Title Number

Engine Output Shaft Balance ................................................................................................................... 004 00

Aircraft Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 004 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 004 00
Test Procedure, Engine Output Shaft Balance ........................................................................................ 004 00
Test Conditions.................................................................................................................................... 004 00
Vibration Task Sequencing................................................................................................................... 004 00
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning ............................................................................................................... 008 00
Aircraft Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 008 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 008 00
Test Conditions.................................................................................................................................... 008 00
Test Procedure, Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning .................................................................................... 008 00
Vibration Task Sequencing................................................................................................................... 008 00
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 002 00
Abbreviations and Acronyms ............................................................................................................... 002 00
GE Aviation Systems............................................................................................................................ 002 00
Materials Required .............................................................................................................................. 002 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 002 00
Reference Material .............................................................................................................................. 002 00
Stations, Waterlines, and Buttlines ........................................................................................................ 002 00
Support Equipment Required ................................................................................................................ 002 00
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ........................................................................................................... 002 00
Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking ................................................................................................................. 006 00
Aircraft Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 006 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 006 00
Test Conditions.................................................................................................................................... 006 00
Test Procedure, Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking ...................................................................................... 006 00
Vibration Task Sequencing................................................................................................................... 006 00
Main Rotor Ground Balancing ................................................................................................................. 007 00
Aircraft Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 007 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 007 00
Test Conditions.................................................................................................................................... 007 00
Test Procedure, Main Rotor Ground Balancing ...................................................................................... 007 00
Vibration Task Sequencing................................................................................................................... 007 00
Oil Cooler Vibration Check ..................................................................................................................... 005 00
Aircraft Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 005 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 005 00

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 001 00
Page 2

WP/SWP
Title Number

Test Conditions.................................................................................................................................... 005 00

Test Procedure, Oil Cooler Vibration Check .......................................................................................... 005 00
Vibration Task Sequencing................................................................................................................... 005 00
Software/Data Management Instructions .................................................................................................. 010 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 010 00
Test Procedures ................................................................................................................................... 010 00
Software Set Up Instructions .................................................................................................................... 009 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 009 00
Test Procedures ................................................................................................................................... 009 00
Tail Rotor Balance................................................................................................................................... 003 00
Aircraft Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 003 00
Purpose .............................................................................................................................................. 003 00
Test Conditions.................................................................................................................................... 003 00
Test Procedure, Tail Rotor Balance ........................................................................................................ 003 00
Vibration Task Sequencing................................................................................................................... 003 00

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

INTRODUCTION

ORGANIZATION MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

VIBRATION

1. PURPOSE. d. Some vibration response characteristics of the

Black Hawk type S-70i helicopter change when the heli-
a. This manual covers vibration procedures on model copter is flown with an external stores system installed
S-70i helicopters (S-70i as shown on the CADU Display (CEFS) (Figure 4). Provisions for tuning with an external
Screen), and Black Hawk type S-70i derivatives in gen- stores system installed, is included in this manual for the
eral, manufactured by Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation, following tasks:
6900 Main St. P.O. Box 9729, Stratford, Connecticut, (1) MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING
06497-9129. (2) MAIN ROTOR 1/REV FLIGHT TUNING
(3) MAIN ROTOR 4/REV CHECK
b. This manual does not apply to the following air-
craft: e. The following vibration tuning tasks are not
affected by the addition of an external stores system
• Seahawk type aircraft or Seahawk type (CEFS):
derivatives. (1) TAIL ROTOR BALANCE
(2) ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE
c. In general, Black Hawk type S-70i helicopters have (3) OIL COOLER VIBRATION CHECK
the following characteristics (these characteristics can be (4) MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING
verified with a visual inspection of the aircraft):
2. REFERENCE MATERIAL.
• Black Hawk type S-70i helicopters have a
single wheel tail landing gear system that A list of the reference material cited in this manual is
is connected to the helicopters at approxi- provided in Table 1.
mately station 610.
3. SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED.
• Black Hawk type S-70i helicopters do not
a. A list of support equipment used in this manual is
have an automatically folding main rotor
provided in Table 2.
head.
b. VERIFICATION OF PROPER SOFTWARE.
• Black Hawk type S-70i helicopters main
rotor blades are connected to the main NOTE
rotor spindle with two expandable blade
pins. Four different aircraft configurations are
covered in this manual. Likewise there are
• Black Hawk type S-70i helicopters have four separate aircraft setup files. It is nec-
four (4) independent main rotor dampers, essary to select the applicable setup file for
one for each main rotor blade. A central the current aircraft configuration. The air-
damper accumulator is not used on Black craft types S-70i and 70iCEF corresponds
Hawk type S-70i helicopters. to aircraft configured without CEFS (slick)
and with CEFS installed respectively. The
NOTE versions 1.0 SIK and 1.0EPP SIK cor-
responds to aircraft configured without EPP
If you can not determine if this manual and with EPP respectively. Use the aircraft
applies to your helicopter, contact a Sikor- setup file that corresponds to the aircraft
sky Aircraft representative for assistance. configuration being flown.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
Page 2

CTRST key when the screen becomes

It is very important that you verify that the clear. The screen contrast key uses a rolling
software version and Aircraft software ver- adjustment approach, if the CTRST key is
sion on the CADU, 29481301, correspond released too late, continue to press and
with the version numbers stated in this sec- hold the CTRST key until the desired con-
tion. If either version number is different trast is seen again. If nothing is seen on the
from those shown in this section then the CADU screen after holding the CTRST key
software may not correspond with the pro- for 30 seconds, the CADU batteries are low
cedures stated in this manual. Incorrect on charge. Plug the CADU into the battery
software may not provide the required charger, 29315000, or plug CADU into
results. If incorrect software (Figure 1) is on powered up DAU and repeat the proce-
the CADU, contact Sikorsky Aircraft or GE dure.
Aviation Systems representative.
c. Check for proper software version as follows:
If incorrect Aircraft software (Figure 2) is
on the CADU, upload aircraft setup file to (1) Press ON to turn the CADU on.
the CADU. Refer to Software/Data Man-
agement Instructions, this manual. If proper (2) If the main menu is not seen on the CADU
aircraft software can not be obtained, con- screen (Figure 1), press QUIT at each menu until the
tact Sikorsky Aircraft or GE Aviation Sys- main menu is seen.
tems representative.
(3) The aircraft software version applicable to this
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You procedure is 6.20AC43D and subsequent. Subsequent
must use the arrow keys (s, d, g, and f) aircraft software versions are denoted by an increasing
to highlight (area with dark background leading number of the version designation, e.g. 7.02AF.
and light letters) the desired option then
press DO to select the option. If the wrong (4) If incorrect software version is seen, contact
option is mistakenly selected, press QUIT Sikorsky Aircraft or GE Aviation Systems representative.
to go back to the previous manual.
d. Check for proper aircraft software version as fol-
If the CADU is being operated on the inter- lows:
nal batteries (If it is connected to the DAU
and the DAU power is off, or it is discon- (1) Press ON to turn the CADU on.
nected from the DAU and not plugged into
the 120 VAC battery charger) and the (2) If the main menu is not seen on the CADU
CADU indicates low power (internal batter- screen (Figure 1), press QUIT at each menu until the
ies required charging). Perform one of the main menu is seen (press QUIT until all items on the main
following: Plug the CADU into the DAU menu are denoted with 9?9).
using CADU-to-DAU cable and turn DAU
power on, or plug the CADU battery (3) Using the arrow keys (d and f). Place the
charger (29315000) into 120 VAC recep- cursor on Aircraft Types and press DO. Aircraft software
tacle and plug the probe end of the battery versions applicable to this procedure are 1.0 SIK and
charger into the CADU. The CADU battery 1.0EPP SIK.
charger receptacle is located under the
credit card access panel on top of the (4) Aircraft software version is shown to the right
CADU. of the aircraft type designation (Figure 2). Aircraft soft-
ware versions applicable to this procedure are 1.0 SIK
If nothing appears on the CADU screen and 1.0EPP SIK.
when the CADU is turned on, the screen
contrast may be set improperly or the (5) If incorrect aircraft software version is seen,
CADU batteries are low on charge. Adjust upload the proper aircraft setup file. Refer to Software/
the screen contrast by pressing and hold- Data Management Instructions WP 010 00. If correct air-
ing the CTRST key on the CADU and craft setup file cannot be obtained, contact Sikorsky Air-
monitoring the CADU screen. Release the craft or GE Aviation Systems representative.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
Page 3

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20AC43D RADS−AT
SOFTWARE
12−NOV−10 14:02:36 VERSION
NUMBER
Aircraft Type ?
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ?
Flight I.D. ?

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

IM1461
SA

Figure 1. Main Menu with Software Version Shown

Aircraft Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit

70iCEF 6.0 SIK

FFT 5.9
S−70i 1.0 SIK
S−70B 6.0 SIK AIRCRAFT
SOFTWARE
S−80M 2.5 UTC VERSION
NUMBER

IM1004
SA

Figure 2. Aircraft Types Menu with Aircraft Software Version Shown

4. ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS. 7. WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES.

A consolidated list of abbreviations and acronyms used

in this manual is provided in Table 3. Warnings, cautions, and notes are used in this manual to
highlight procedures or practices that, if not correctly fol-
5. MATERIALS REQUIRED. lowed, could result in injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. Usage is as follows:
A consolidated list of the materials required in this manual
is provided in Table 4.

6. STATIONS, WATERLINES, AND BUTTLINES. WARNING

The illustrations in these manuals locate components on
the helicopter by stations, waterlines, and buttlines. Fig- An operating procedure or practice that, if not correctly
ure 3, shows these for the entire helicopter. followed, could result in injury or death.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
Page 4

8. GE AVIATION SYSTEMS
CAUTION
For information regarding GE Aviation Systems test
An operating procedure or practice that, if not correctly equipment or to obtain a copy of the RADS-AT Operation
followed, could result in damage to or destruction of and Maintenance Manual, contact, GE Aviation Systems,
equipment. 14200 Roosevelt Blvd, Clearwater, FL 33762.

NOTE

An operating procedure or condition that requires

emphasis.

TABLE 1. REFERENCE MATERIAL

Title Document No.
Customer Service Bulletin CSN No. 70-64
RADS-AT Operation And Maintenance 29480100

TABLE 2. SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature
Model 991 Accelerometer (54mV/g) (Wilcoxon
Research)
28130800 Gender Changer (GE Aviation Systems)
28130801 Adapter (GE Aviation Systems)
28130802 RS-232 Cable (GE Aviation Systems)
28131220 Credit Card Memory (GE Aviation Systems)
29103900 Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29104700 28 VDC Power Cable (GE Aviation Systems)
29105403 Magnetic RPM Sensor Cable
29105600 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 50 ft length
(GE Aviation Systems)
29105604 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 25 ft length
(GE Aviation Systems)
29105605 Accelerometer Cable (54mV/g) 25 ft length
29198700 Optical RPM Sensor Bracket (GE Aviation
Systems)
29283200 Cable Distribution Unit Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29288400 or 3030AN Magnetic RPM Sensor (GE Aviation Systems)
29310700 UTD-Tracker (GE Aviation Systems)
29313000 L Shaped Accelerometer Mount Bracket (GE
Aviation Systems)
29314700 Optical RPM Sensor (GE Aviation Systems)
29315000 CADU Battery Charger (GE Aviation
Systems)
29325601 DAU-to-CADU Cable (GE Aviation Systems)
29325701 or 29725504 UTD Cable - 25 ft (GE Aviation Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE Avia-
tion Systems)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
Page 5

TABLE 2. SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED (Cont)

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature
2948140 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29715800 Accelerometer Mounting Block (GE Aviation
Systems)
29730000 Bleed-Air Plug (GE Aviation Systems)
29743200 UTD Bracket, S-70i A/C (GE Aviation Sys-
tems)
29754500 Shaft Optical RPM Sensor Bracket (GE Avia-
tion Systems)
3M-7610 Reflective Tape (1-inch width by 4-inch
length) (3M)
5975-00-984-6582 or equivalent Tiedown Straps
70351-08408-102 Accelerometer Block (Sikorsky Aircraft)
70700-20308-041 Trim Tab Adjustment Tool (Sikorsky Aircraft)
- Torque Wrench (0 - 30 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (30 - 200 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (100 - 600 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (150 - 750 in. lbs.)

TABLE 3. ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Abbreviations/Acronyms Definition
CADU Control and Display Unit
DAU Data Acquisition Unit
DOD Department of Defense
PC Personal Computer
PCR Pitch Control Rod
QCU Quick Change Unit
TRDS Tail Rotor Drive Shaft
WP Work Package

TABLE 4. MATERIALS REQUIRED

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature
AN3H14A Bolt
AN4-12A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-13A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-14A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-15A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-16A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-17A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-20A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-21A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-22A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-23A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-27A Tail Balance Bolt

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
Page 6

TABLE 4. MATERIALS REQUIRED (Cont)

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature
AN4-31A Tail Balance Bolt
AN5-6A Bolt
MIL-S-22473, Grade B Sealing Compound
MIL-S-22473, Grade N Sealing Compound (Primer)
MS20995NC20 Safety Wire
MS20995NC32 Safety Wire
MS21044N4 Nut
MS9320-1 Safety Wire
NAS1149C0463R Washer
NAS1149D0332K Washer
NAS1149F0432P Washer
NAS1149F0463P Washer
O-T-236 Tetrachloroethylene
SS4409-029 Tail Balance Washer
TT-I-735 Isopropyl Alcohol
5975-00-984-6582 or Equivalent Tiedown Straps
70106-08105 -102 Balance Washer
70361-03016-101 Bracket
7510-00-266-6712 or Equivalent Masking Tape
8030-00-723-2746 Sealing Compound

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
Page 7

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10 BL BL
0 0.0 0.0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800

STA
732.0
STA
341.2

350

WL
WL 324.7
315.0
300

DANGER

COCKPIT AWAY KEEP

REFERENCE DATUM

250 FLOOR
WL
215.0

200 STATIC
WL
206.7
GROUND
LINE
150 STA STA
CABIN 187.0 247.0
FLOOR
0 STA STA STA STA STA STA
STA
162.0 288.0 343.0 398.0 485.0 644.62 762.75

100 50 0 50 100

BL BL
30.0 30.0

BL BL
86.3 86.3
BL
BL 0.0 BL
55.0 55.0

IM0482_1
100 50 0 50 100 SA

Figure 3. Stations, Waterlines, and Buttlines

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 002 00
Page 8

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10 BL
0 0.0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800

STA
341.2

350

WL
315.0
300
WL
324.7

COCKPIT
REFERENCE DATUM

250 FLOOR
WL
215.0

200 STATIC
WL
206.7
GROUND
LINE
STA
150 187.0
CABIN
FLOOR STA STA STA STA STA STA STA
0 162.0 247.0 288.0 343.0 398.0 485.0 644.62 STA
762.75

100 50 0 50 100

BL BL
30.0 30.0

BL BL
86.3 86.3
BL
BL 0.0 BL
55.0 55.0
EFFECTIVITY
WITH CEFS
IM0482_2
100 50 0 50 100 SA

Figure 4. Stations, Waterlines, and Buttlines, External Stores Configuration

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

RADS-AT Operation and Maintenance .................................................................... 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page No.

Aircraft Configuration .............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Conditions ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Procedure, Tail Rotor Balance ..................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Recalling Tail Rotor Data .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tail Rotor Balance, Corrective Actions ................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tail Rotor Balance, Test Equipment Installation .......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Tail Rotor Balance, Test Equipment Removal ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Tail Rotor Balance, Vibration Measurement ............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Tail Rotor Balance, Weight Adjustment ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Vibration Task Sequencing .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

Model 991 Accelerometer (54 mV/g) (Wilcoxon

Research)
29103900 Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29104700 28 VDC Power Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29105600 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 50 ft
length (GE Aviation Systems)
29198700 Optical RPM Sensor Bracket (GE Aviation
Systems)
29283200 Cable Distribution Unit Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29313000 L-Shaped Accelerometer Mounting Bracket
(GE Aviation Systems)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 2

Support Equipment Required (Cont)

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

29314700 Optical RPM Sensor (GE Aviation Systems)

29315000 CADU Battery Charger (GE Aviation
Systems)
29325601 DAU-to-CADU Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE
Aviation Systems)
29481400 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
3M-7610 Reflective Tape (1-inch width by 4-inch
length) (3M)
- Torque Wrench (0 - 30 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (30 - 200 in. lbs.)

Materials Required

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature

AN4-12A Tail Balance Bolt

AN4-13A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-14A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-15A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-16A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-17A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-20A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-21A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-22A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-23A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-27A Tail Balance Bolt
AN4-31A Tail Balance Bolt
MS20995NC20 Safety Wire
MS21044N4 Nut
NAS1149C0463R Washer (2 per bolt)
SS4409-029 Tail Balance Washer
5975-00-984-6582 or Equivalent Tiedown Straps
7510-00-266-6712, or Equivalent Masking Tape

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 3

1. VIBRATION TASK SEQUENCING. (Figure 1) 5. TEST PROCEDURE, TAIL ROTOR BALANCE.

a. The tail rotor balancing task can be done at the 6. TAIL ROTOR BALANCE, TEST EQUIPMENT
same time the engine output shaft, oil cooler , main rotor INSTALLATION.
ground tracking, or main rotor ground balancing, (refer
to this manual for all the above tasks) are being com-
a. Install accelerometer (Wilcoxon Model 991) on L
pleted. It is not necessary that criteria on any one of the
shaped accelerometer mounting bracket, 29313000.
above listed tasks be satisfied before the Tail Rotor Bal-
Torque accelerometer to 20 in-lbs.
ance task is performed.

b. The tail rotor balance task is required if any of the b. Remove the screw from the left side of the tail rotor
following conditions are true: pylon at the bottom of the tail rotor gearbox fairing at
STA 732 as identified in Figure 2.
(1) Any of the aircraft Phase Inspections have
been completed. NOTE

(2) Any of the bolts that assemble the inner and Make sure that the cable connection end of
outer tail rotor retention plates were loosened or removed the accelerometer faces down and aft (Fig-
for any reason. ure 2). Weight corrections may cause
vibration levels to increase if accelerometer
(3) Any of the four tail rotor pitch links were is not oriented properly.
adjusted for any reason.
c. Install accelerometer bracket on tail gearbox fair-
c. If the tail rotor balance task is required, it must be ing using the same screw that was removed (Figure 2).
completed prior to flying the aircraft. Bracket is installed so that the accelerometer axis is per-
pendicular (90 degrees) to the leading edge of the pylon.
2. PURPOSE. Cable connection end of the accelerometer faces down
and aft.
a. This Work Package (WP) contains the procedure
for 1/rev balancing of the tail rotor on the ground for the
S-70i type aircraft. Tail Rotor Balance consists of measur- CAUTION
ing tail rotor pylon 1/rev vibration (1190 RPM) at Flat
Pitch, 100% Nr, and making required weight adjustments
on the tail rotor retention plate until tail rotor 1/rev vibra- Do not over-tighten optical RPM sensor nut.
tion is within acceptance limits. Over-tightening the nut could damage nut
and/or optical RPM sensor (both are plas-
3. TEST CONDITIONS. tic).

NOTE d. Install Optical RPM Sensor, 29314700, on Opti-

cal RPM Sensor Bracket, 29198700, as shown in Figure
This task may become difficult in high and 3. Tighten plastic nut on optical RPM sensor by hand,
gusting winds. As the winds get higher it is then tighten 1/4 turn more to secure optical RPM sensor
very important that you make sure helicop- to bracket. Secure nut to the hole in the body of the opti-
ter nose is heading into the wind. cal RPM sensor using safety wire MS20995NC20.

a. Tail rotor balance can be accomplished day or e. Install optical RPM sensor bracket on right side
night in any weather conditions. pylon tail rotor gearbox fairing as shown in Figure 4.
Arrow on optical RPM sensor bracket points aft. The two
4. AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION. inboard mounting holes on the optical RPM sensor
bracket are utilized for installation. Optical RPM sensor
a. The aircraft must be ready for ground runs up to line of sight is directed outward, away from the tail pylon
100% Nr with the tail rotor blades installed. and into tail rotor blades.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 4

ALL TASKS WITHIN DOTTED BOX CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED SIMULTANEOUSLY

WP 003 00 WP 005 00 WP 006 00

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE OIL COOLER VIBRATION MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING
CHECK
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. 1. MAIN ROTOR BLADE REPLACED.
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF TAIL
ROTOR RETENTION PLATE BOLTS. 2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVING OF 2. PCR OR PC ROD END REPLACED.
ANY OIL COOLER SHAFT ATTACHMENT
3. THE ADJUSTMENT OF ANY TAIL
BOLTS (INPUT OR OUTPUT). 3. PCR’S ADJUSTED DURING MR RIG.
ROTOR PITCH LINKS.
3. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY 4. MAIN ROTOR HEAD REMOVED.
BOLTS THAT SECURE OIL COOLER
TO AIRFRAME. 5. MAIN ROTOR QCU REMOVED.

6. MR SPINDLE REMOVED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. 100% NR 100%NR, NOSE INTO WIND

WP 004 00 WP 007 00
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING
BALANCE TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: 1. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. FLAT PITCH TRACKING, THIS MANUAL.
2. GROUND VIBRATION DISCREPANCY
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTS.
BOLTS THAT ATTACH THE ENGINE
SHAFT TO THE INPUT MODULE 3. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
FLANGE. 1 / REV TUNING, THIS MANUAL.
4. BLADE RETENTION PIN REPLACED.
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND.

WP 008 00
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
2. FOLLOWING MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING.
3. INFLIGHT VIBRATION DISCREPANCY EXISTS.
4. MAIN ROTOR DAMPER OR DAMPER BEARING REPLACED.
5. MAIN ROTOR PCR BEARING REPLACED.
6. MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAP REPLACED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS WITH EXTERNAL TANKS
FP GROUND, 100% NR FP GROUND, 100% NR
OGE HOVER, 100% NR OGE HOVER, 100% NR
80 KTS, 100% NR 80 KTS, 100% NR
120 KTS, 100% NR 120 KTS, 100% NR
140KTS, 100% NR VH, 100% NR
VH, 100% NR

IM1025
SA

Figure 1. Vibration Task Sequencing

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 5

TAIL PYLON FWD

DRIVE SHAFT
CL

CAMLOC

A 90o
SCREW

"L" BRACKET CABLE

CONNECTION
TAIL ROTOR
GEARBOX FAIRING
(LEFT SIDE) ACCELEROMETER

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE ACCELEROMETER INSTALLATION

(LEFT SIDE OF TAIL PYLON AT STATION 732)
FG0448
SA

Figure 2. Tail Rotor Balance Accelerometer Installation

PLASTIC NUT
(TORQUE HAND−
TIGHT + 1/4 TURN)
(SAFETY WIRE
MS20995CN20)

OPTICAL RPM
SENSOR BRACKET

AFT

OPTICAL RPM
SENSOR

FB2474
SA

Figure 3. Tail Rotor Balance Optical RPM Sensor-to-Bracket Installation

taken out to prevent the wires from being
CAUTION entangled in the tail rotor during run up.

To avoid damaging accelerometer or

To avoid damaging accelerometer cable, accelerometer cable be sure that the 3-pin
optical RPM sensor, or tail rotor assembly, socket end of the cable is attached to the
be sure wires are secure and that slack is accelerometer.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 6

TAIL GEAR
BOX FAIRING

BRACKET

A
SCREW

OPTICAL
RPM SENSOR
JAMNUT

NOTE
ATTACH BRACKET WITH TWO
INBOARD BRACKET HOLES. FG0958
SA

Figure 4. Tail Rotor Balance Optical RPM Sensor Bracket Installation

f. Route optical RPM sensor cable around the back of Using masking tape, label the four-pin end of the accel-
the tail pylon and down the left side of the pylon. Using erometer cable as ACC 6.
masking tape, label optical RPM sensor cable as TACHO
2.
h. Secure accelerometer and optical RPM sensor
cables with tiedown straps to all three pull-out steps along
the left side of the tail pylon. These steps can be left
CAUTION
extended for the duration of the ground runs. Continue
routing the cables under the pylon and forward along the
To avoid damaging accelerometer or right side of the tail cone, through the tiedown ring on the
accelerometer cable be sure that the 3-pin right side of the aircraft where the tail cone and transition
socket end of the cable is attached to the sections are joined, and into the cabin of the aircraft. Use
accelerometer. tiedown strap to secure both cables to the tiedown ring.

g. Connect female 3-pin end of accelerometer cable

to accelerometer. Route cable down left side of tail pylon.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 7

NOTE (3) Turn the tail rotor so the reflective tape is

aligned with the optical RPM sensor.
Only handle the reflective tape with clean
hands. Do not touch the reflective surface (4) The red light on the back of the optical RPM
of the tape with hands unnecessarily. sensor should illuminate when the reflective tape is in the
optical RPM sensor line of sight. Use a mirror to view the
Blade with reflective tape installed is the red light on the back of the optical RPM sensor. Re-align
target blade (Figure 5). the tape until the red light is seen.

i. Apply a 4-inch long by 1-inch wide strip of reflec- (5) If the red light does not illuminate after carry-
tive tape to the inboard side of the RED tail paddle cuff so ing out the above steps take a new piece of reflective
that the tape is aligned with the line of sight of the optical tape, and hold it 6 inches in front of the optical RPM
RPM sensor (Figure 5). sensor (in the sensor line of sight) with the DAU powered
up. If the red light fails to illuminate replace the optical
j. Place the DAU, 29481400, CADU, 29481301, RPM sensor. If the red light illuminates, further tape align-
and Cable Distribution Unit (CDU), 29103900, in for- ment is required.
ward cabin area and secure to aircraft using tiedown
rings in the floor. Make the following cabling connections (6) Once tape alignment is complete, turn DAU off
(Figures 6 and 7): by setting DAU power switch to OFF.

(1) Connect one end of DAU-to-CADU cable, l. Make a copy of the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure
29325601, to the CADU receptacle on the DAU (Figure 8).
6).
NOTE
(2) Connect the other end of DAU-to-CADU cable,
29325601, to the receptacle on the CADU. To avoid If the tail paddles had been removed prior
damaging the CADU, place the CADU in a protected yet to this balance evolution, it is recom-
accessible location. mended that all previously installed tail
rotor weight be removed and the Previously
(3) Connect the 28 VDC Power cable, 29104700, Installed block on the data sheet be entered
to the aircraft 28 VDC power receptacle (STA 293, right to reflect that no weight is installed on the
side, cabin ceiling) and to the 28 VDC receptacle on the tail rotor.
DAU (Figure 6).
The diagnostics will maintain an inventory
(4) Connect the optical RPM sensor cable, of weight installed on the tail rotor and use
29314700, to the TACHO 2 receptacle on the DAU (Fig- that information to remove all possible
ure 6). weight before adding any new weight. For
the inventory to work properly, you must
(5) Connect the male end of the Cable Distribution make sure that the actual weight installed
Unit cable, 29283200, to the MULTI-CH receptacle on on the tail rotor is correctly entered into the
the DAU (Figure 6). Connect the female end of the CDU diagnostics. If the data sheet that is
cable to the MULTI-CH receptacle on the CDU (Figure 7). included in this work package (Figure 8) is
properly maintained, all of the information
(6) Connect the accelerometer cable, 29105600, required by the diagnostics will be readily
to the ACC 6 receptacle of the Cable Distribution Unit available to you.
(Figure 7).
m. Inspect the tail rotor hub balance weight attach-
k. Once all the tail balance equipment has been ment locations (Figure 5) on the tail rotor retention plate
installed, verify alignment of the reflective tape as follows: and determine how much balance weight is installed on
the tail rotor. Enter the weight installed on each quadrant
(1) Apply 28 VDC power to the DAU. in the first Previously Installed block on the Tail Rotor Data
Sheet (Figure 8). Use the Hardware-To-Weight Conver-
(2) Set the DAU power switch to ON (a green light sion Table located on the data sheet (Figure 8) to deter-
should illuminate above DAU power switch). mine the weight of the installed hardware.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 8

INBOARD SIDE TARGET

OF TARGET BLADE (RED)
BLADE

REFLECTIVE TAPE
(4 INCHES BY 1 INCH)
QUADRANT QUADRANT
#4 #1
TAIL ROTOR
ROTATION

QUADRANT QUADRANT
#3 #2

TAIL ROTOR
ROTATION
FWD

VIEWED FROM RIGHT SIDE

TWO BALANCE
WEIGHT LOCATIONS
PER QUADRANT

TAIL ROTOR HUB (INBOARD VIEW) FG0451

SA

Figure 5. Tail Rotor Balance Reflective Tape Installation

n. Position aircraft with nose facing into the wind and can only be used to determine if the
prior to the ground run. vibration is acceptable or not. If the vibra-
tion is unacceptable, the TR CK test state
7. TAIL ROTOR BALANCE VIBRATION data CAN NOT be used to determine a tail
MEASUREMENT. rotor hub weight correction.

NOTE If problems are encountered with the test

equipment that are not addressed in this
Keystrokes on the CADU are identified by document, refer to the Operation and
the use of bold print. Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
instruction.
This procedure will measure TR 1/rev
vibration on the aircraft and compare the If you are instructed to reboot the CADU or
vibration amplitude against the acceptance the CADU appears to be stuck in a particu-
limit. Two test states are programmed into lar operation, reboot the CADU. Refer to
the test set for this purpose. The TR BAL is Software/Data Management Instructions
the recommended measurement because (WP 010 00).
both vibration amplitude and phase data
are measured and a weight correction can a. Make sure the test equipment is properly installed.
be determined from the data. The TR CK is Refer to Tail Rotor Balance, Test Equipment Installation
provided as an alternate measurement in (PARA 6).
case the optical RPM sensor does not oper-
ate properly during the run. The TR CK test b. Make sure the CADU is on the aircraft and
state measures only vibration amplitude plugged into the DAU via the CADU-to-DAU cable.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 9

DAU−TO−CADU
CABLE

DAU POWER
LIGHT

DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

NIGHT
DAY TEST

ACC 1 ACC 3 FUSE

TACHO 1 TRACKER
CADU 15 AMP
MODE STROBE

ON

TACHO 2
ACC 2 ACC 4 OFF
TRACKER 1 28VDC POWER
MULTI−CH

OPTICAL RPM MULTI−CH CABLE 28V DC

SENSOR CABLE FROM THE CDU POWER CABLE
FB4072
SA

Figure 6. DAU Receptacle Layout

TAIL ROTOR MULTI−CH CABLE

ACCELEROMETER FROM THE DAU

CABLE DISTRIBUTION UNIT

ACC 5 ACC 6 ACC 7 ACC 8 ACC 9 TACHO 2

MULTI−CH

ACC 10 ACC 11 ACC 12 ACC 13 ACC 14 ABT 2

FQ1948
SA

Figure 7. Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) Receptacle Layout

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 10

AIRCRAFT
DATE TAIL ROTOR DATA SHEET
(Criteria: Tail Rotor 1 / Rev Vibration [Balance] shall be 0.20 ips or less at Flat Pitch, 100% Nr)
TAIL ROTOR WEIGHT (grams)
RUN Amp Phase
NO. (ips) (Degrees)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

Previously Installed

Change Required

New Total Installed

Previously Installed

Change Required

New Total Installed

Previously Installed

Change Required

New Total Installed

BOLT−SELECT
TARGET
TARGET AN4−12A
BLADE
BLADE AN4−13A
AN4−14A REFLECTIVE
QUADRANT 4
AN4−15A TARGET
BALANCE
AN4−16A
WEIGHT
Q4 Q1 AN4−17A
LOCATION
TAIL ROTOR AN4−20A
ROTATION AN4−21A
AN4−22A QUADRANT 1
AN4−23A OUTBOARD BALANCE
Q3 Q2 AN4−27A RETENTION WEIGHT
AN4−31A PLATE LOCATION

INBOARD
RETENTION
WASHER PLATE
NAS1149C0463R
VIEWED FROM RIGHT SIDE
BALANCE QUADRANT 2
WASHERS BALANCE
QUADRANT 3
NUT SS4409−029 WEIGHT
BALANCE
MS21044N4 LOCATION
WEIGHT
(TORQUE
LOCATION
100 IN. LBS)

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE HARDWARE TO WEIGHT CONVERSION TABLE

NOTES SS4409−029 NAS1149C0463R TOTAL WEIGHT

BOLT
BALANCE SPACER (grams)
(INCLUDES NUT WASHERS PER WASHERS
1. MAXIMUM WEIGHT OF BOLT, NUT, MS21044N4) BOLT PER BOLT
SPACER WASHERS, AND BALANCE
WASHERS ALLOWED IN ANY ONE AN4−12A NONE 2 16
QUADRANT IS 227 GRAMS (1/2 POUND).
MAXIMUM ALLOWED WEIGHT PER AN4−13A 1 2 20
BOLT HOLE IS 113.5 GRAMS. AN4−14A 3 2 27
2. TO INSTALL 227 GRAMS IN A AN4−15A 5 2 34
QUADRANT AN4−31A BOLT MUST BE
USED. IF AN4−31A BOLT IS NOT AN4−16A 7 2 41
AVAILABLE, THEN 208 GRAMS IS THE
MAXIMUM WEIGHT THAT CAN BE AN4−17A 9 2 48
INSTALLED IN ANY ONE QUADRANT
(USING AN AN4−27A BOLT). AN4−20A 11 2 55
3. AT LEAST 1 1/2 THREADS OF AN4−21A 13 2 61
SELECTED BOLT MUST SHOW BEYOND AN4−22A 15 2 69
NUT WHEN WEIGHT IS INSTALLED. IF
LESS THREADS SHOW, USE NEXT AN4−23A 17 2 75
LONGEST BOLT AND WEIGH ALL ITEMS
AGAIN. AN4−27A 25 2 104 FB2276A
SA

Figure 8. Tail Rotor Data Sheet

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 11

c. Get the copy of the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
8) that has the correct amount of previously installed tail indicates low power (internal batteries
rotor weight entered on it. require charging), perform one of the fol-
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
NOTE into the DAU using the CADU-to-DAU
cable and turn DAU power on. A second
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You method is to plug the CADU battery
must use the arrow keys (s, d, g, and f) charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
to highlight (area with dark background receptacle and plug the probe end of the
and light letters) the desired option, press battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
DO to select the option. If the wrong option receptacle is located under the credit card
is highlighted by mistake, press QUIT to access panel on top of the CADU.
go back to the main menu.
(1) Turn the CADU on by pressing the ON key.
If nothing appears on the CADU screen
when the CADU is turned on, suspect that
the screen contrast is set improperly or the NOTE
CADU batteries are low on charge. Adjust
the screen contrast by pressing and hold- If the test set was left in the measurement
ing the CTRST key on the CADU and mode (Figure 15), press QUIT to exit the
monitoring the CADU screen. Release the measurement mode, until the Action menu
CTRST key when the screen becomes is seen (Figure 23). If data was measured
clear. The screen contrast key uses a rolling or it is not known if data was measured,
adjustment approach, therefore if the highlight Save and Exit and press DO. If
CTRST key is released too late, continue to no data was measured, highlight Abandon
press and hold the CTRST key until the Flight, Press g until Yes is seen next to Con-
desired contrast is seen again. If nothing is tinue and press DO. The main menu now
seen on the CADU screen after holding the should be seen.
CTRST key for 30 seconds, suspect that the
CADU batteries are low on charge. Plug This procedure may not provide correct
the CADU into the battery charger, results if the incorrect software version is
29315000, or plug CADU into powered used. The software version is found on the
up DAU and repeat the procedure. main menu. Verify that the software ver-
sion being used corresponds to the version
The following section can be completed on covered by this manual. Refer to (WP 002
the CADU at anytime prior to the ground 00) of this manual for software version. If
run without the CADU being connected to the proper software is not on the CADU,
or powered by the DAU. It is recommended contact a Sikorsky Aircraft or GE Aviation
that the CADU be powered with the AC Systems representative.
adaptor whenever using the CADU alone
to prevent running down the CADU batter- (2) Press QUIT repeatedly until the main menu is
ies. CADU batteries automatically recharge showing (Figure 9). Check for the proper software version
when plugged into the DAU and the DAU on main menu.
is powered with 28 VDC.
(3) Check the main menu on the CADU (Figure 9)
d. Prepare the CADU to measure data by performing
to make sure the date and time are correct. If the date
the following:
and time are wrong , refer to Software Setup Instructions
NOTE (WP 009 00).

If the CADU is being operated on internal (4) From the main menu (Figure 9), press the d or
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 12

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL Aircraft Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
70iCEF
12−NOV−10 14:02:36
FFT
Aircraft Type ?
S−70B
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ? S−70i
Flight I.D. ? S−80M
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

IM1462 IM1005
SA SA

Figure 9. RADS - AT Main Menu Figure 10. Aircraft Types Menu

NOTE (5) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 10),
press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and
applicable version 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable
This procedure may not provide correct
and press DO.
results if the incorrect AIRCRAFT software
version is used. Refer to (WP 002 00) of
this manual to verify proper aircraft soft- (6) From the main menu (Figure 14), press the d
ware version. The AIRCRAFT version num- or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.
ber is part of the aircraft type title. If the
proper AIRCRAFT software is not on the (7) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 11),
CADU, upload the aircraft setup file to the press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
CADU. Refer to Software Setup Instruction ber and press DO, continue with step (10). If the desired
(WP 009 00). If the proper aircraft soft- tail number is not listed, continue with step (8).
ware can not be located, contact Sikorsky
Aircraft or GE Aviation Systems represen- (8) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 11),
tative. press the d or f keys to highlight NEW and press DO.

The aircraft setup file with the 9S-70i9 air- NOTE

craft type should be used for aircraft con-
figurations without external tanks installed. Numbers can be entered using the numeric
keypad on the CADU. Alphanumeric char-
The aircraft setup file with the 970iCEF9 air- acters can be entered by using the F1 and
craft type should be used for aircraft con- F2 keys. The F1 and F2 keys allow you to
figurations with external tanks installed. scroll through the available characters.
The versions 1.0 and 1.0EPP corresponds When the desired character is seen press
to aircraft configured without EPP and with the g arrow key to move to the next block
EPP respectively. Use version that cor- and select the next number or character
responds to the aircraft configuration being desired.
flown.
(9) From the Entry Form display (Figure 12), enter
The 9BAL TAIL9 flight plans for the 9S-70i9 the complete tail number of the aircraft. Up to seven digits
&970iCEF9 aircraft types and versions 1.0 can be entered for the tail number. Press DO when tail
& 1.0EPP are identical. For consistency, use number entry is complete.
the aircraft type and version that applies to
the configuration being used for the tail (10) From the main menu (Figure 14), press the
rotor balancing procedure. d or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 13

Flight Plans DO−Select QUIT−Exit

Select Tail Number PAGE 1 OF 1 BAL TAIL

DCENG BAL
51 FLT CHK
52 GRND BAL
GRND TRK
NEW
OIL COOL

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Tail No [QUIT] Exit

FG0457 IM1007
SA SA

Figure 11. Tail Number Selection Figure 13. Flight Plans Menu

Entry Form

Please enter a new tail number

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL
for the aircraft type S−70i :
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:03:45
Tail No? 53
Aircraft Type S−70i
Tail Number 53
Flight Plan BAL TAIL
[F1] & [F2] Scrolls thru character set
Flight I.D. ?
[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Arrows : Move Cursor
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item
IM1006
SA
MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

Figure 12. Tail Number Entry

(11) From The Flight Plans menu (Figure 13), press
the d or f keys to highlight BAL TAIL and press DO. F1 F2 F3 F4

(12) Make sure that Aircraft Type, Tail Number ,

and Flight Plan are properly specified (Figure 14). Repeat
step (4) through step (11) until all required menu items IM1008
SA
are properly specified.
Figure 14. Completed Main Menu
NOTE

The Flight I.D. does not exist prior to mea- The test set automatically checks memory to
suring vibration data. Flight I.D. identifies make sure that there is enough room to
previously measured vibration data that is store all of the data that can be measured
stored in memory. A new flight ID is auto- by the selected flight plan. If the CADU
matically created each time F1 (MEASURE) indicates that insufficient memory exists,
is pressed and data is stored. download data from the CADU to a PC,

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 14

g. On the CADU, press LAMP to turn the CADU

screen back-light on.

NOTE

S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12−NOV−10 Tail Rotor Balance vibration may be mea-
sured with either one engine in FLY or with
TR BAL both engines in FLY.
TR CK
h. With a qualified pilot at the controls run helicopter
at flat pitch, 100% Nr rotor speed, with the pedals cen-
tered (Operator’s Manual).

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

NOTE

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

The TR BAL test state is required to make
tail rotor balance adjustments and is there-
fore the preferred measurement. This test
state will measure the tail rotor 1/rev vibra-
F1 F2 F3 F4 tion amplitude and phase data so that tail
rotor hub weight adjustments can be made.
The TR BAL test state requires that the
accelerometer and optical RPM sensor be
IM1009
SA installed and operating properly.

Figure 15. Measurement Selection Window The TR CK test state will only determine if
delete data from the CADU, and compress vibration is acceptable or unacceptable
the CADU memory. Refer to Software/Data and is provided as an alternate measure-
Management Instructions (WP 010 00). ment if the optical RPM sensor does not
work during the run. This test state will
measure tail rotor 1/rev vibration ampli-
(13) From the main menu (Figure 14), press F1 tude only. If the vibration amplitude is
(MEASURE) to enter measurement mode (Figure 15). below the limit, the task is complete. How-
ever if the vibration amplitude is over the
e. From the Measurement Selection Window (Figure limit, a hub weight adjustment can not be
15), press F4 until LMT ON is seen above the F4 key. calculated from the measured data
obtained in the TR CK test state. The vibra-
tion phase information is required to calcu-
NOTE late a weight correction and only the TR
BAL test state provides both vibration
28 VDC power must be available at the amplitude and phase data.
DAU, and the CADU must be connected to
the DAU before continuing with this proce- You may exit the measurement selection
dure. window (Figure 15) at any time by press-
ing QUIT. If you wish to save the data that
was obtained, from the Action menu (Fig-
You may view a brief setup description by
ure 23), highlight Save and Exit and press
pressing F3 (SETUP). Procedure references,
DO. If no data was obtained or the data is
cable connections, and general procedure
not to be stored, from the Action menu,
are provided in the SETUP.
highlight Abandon Flight, press DO, press
g key until Yes is seen next to Continue? ,
f. On the DAU (Figure 6), set the DAU power switch and press DO . If the measurement mode
to the ON position. Check that green power light just is exited, go to step r. to continue this pro-
above the power switch is illuminated. cedure.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 15

i. From the Measurement Selection Window (Figure

15), highlight the TR BAL test state.
S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12−NOV−10

NOTE
TR BAL
TR CK
The CADU and DAU power must be on for
a minimum of 20 seconds before proceed-
ing any further. If a measurement is tried
before the 20 second wait period, an error * TAIL BAL DATA − FP, 100% NR
will be noted. Clear the error by pressing
QUIT, wait 20 seconds and retry the mea- [DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit
surement. DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

If an error message is displayed on the IM1010

CADU screen, write down the error and SA

the recommended troubleshooting steps,

Figure 16. Measurement Initiation
press QUIT to clear the error, perform the
first recommended troubleshooting step, nected, replace the tracker cable. If the
and repeat the measurement. Repeat this problem remained, or the tracker cable
process until all recommended was not connected, suspect the DAU-to-
troubleshooting steps have been taken. If CADU cable, the DAU, and the CADU in
problems persist, go to the Operation and that order.
Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
troubleshooting. j. Once the correct test state is highlighted, press
DO. This prepares the DAU for the measurement. When
If an error is seen on the CADU screen that the DAU is ready, an asterisk mark will be seen at the
does not provide troubleshooting steps, start of the measurement prompt (Figure 16).
press QUIT to clear the error, and retry the
measurement. If the same error persists, NOTE
reboot the CADU, (refer to Software/Data
Management Instructions WP 010 00), This task may become difficult in high and
toggle the DAU power switch off and on gusting winds. As the winds get higher it is
again (this reboots the DAU), wait 20 sec- very important that you make sure the heli-
onds, and retry the measurement. If prob- copter is heading into the wind.
lems persist, replace the CADU-to-DAU
cable, the DAU, and the CADU, in that Make sure that LMT ON is seen above the
order. Retry the measurement after each F4 key (Figure16). Press F4 until LMT ON
component is replaced. is seen.

If a Communications Failure (Error 8199) k. Make sure the aircraft is at a steady flat pitch,
or a CADU-DAU Comms Failure (Error 100% Nr, pedals centered, nose into the wind condition.
32756) is noted and all of the on-screen Press the DO to start the measurement. As the measure-
troubleshooting has failed, disconnect the ment is being taken a measurement screen will be dis-
tracker cable and retry the measurement played (Figure 17).
(Shorted tracker cables have resulted in
communication errors). If the measurement l. When the measurement is complete and the test
worked after the tracker cable was discon- set is processing the data the screen shown in Figure 18

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 16

MEASURING LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Tachometer Freq (RPM) : 1189.03
Measurements are within specified limits
Flight Plan : BAL TAIL

Test State : TR BAL

Acquisition No. : 01 of 01

Press QUIT to return to MEASUREMENT menu

Press UP to view all limits
Measuring

FB2283 IM1011
SA SA

Figure 17. Measurement Screen Figure 19. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within
Limits)

Processing Data . . . LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

* * * Pilot Transition * * * Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
Next Test State: TR CK
TR BAL TAIL BALANCE 0.20 0.58 ips

Standby . . . While data is loading

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All
FB2284
SA
IM1012
SA

Figure 18. Data Processing Screen

Figure 20. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Exceeds
will be seen. Do not press any key at this time, wait until Limits)
the CADU screen prompts for a user input.
NOTE
NOTE
If an error was encountered during mea-
If an error message is displayed on the
surement, 9?9 will be seen under
CADU screen, write down the error and
MEASURED on the LIMITS display (Figure
the recommended troubleshooting steps,
20).
press QUIT to clear the error, perform the
first recommended troubleshooting step,
and repeat the measurement. Repeat this The ALL LIMITS display allows you to view
process until all recommended the measured vibration amplitude, if the
troubleshooting steps have been taken. If vibration is within the limit. The vibration
problems persist, go to the Operation and amplitude is not displayed on the LIMITS
Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for screen if the measurement is within the
troubleshooting. limit.

m. If limit checking was turned on prior to the mea- (1) If limit checking was turned on prior to the
surement, continue on, otherwise go to next step. measurement, one of two LIMITS displays will be seen. If

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 17

ALL LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1 S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12−NOV−10
LIMIT MEASURED
TR BAL TAIL BALANCE 0.20 0.08 ips
TR BAL done
TR CK

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle Exc’d

IM1013 [DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

SA

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

Figure 21. 9ALL LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within
Limits)
all measurements are within acceptance limits, the LIMITS
F1 F2 F3 F4
display shown in Figure 19 will be seen. If the measure-
ment exceeds the acceptance limit, the LIMITS display
shown in Figure 20 will be seen.
IM1014
(2) Enter the measured ips level on the Tail Rotor
SA

Data Sheet (Figure 38). If the measurement is within the Figure 22. Measurement Selection Window After
limit (the LIMITS display shown in Figure 19 is seen), press Successful Data Measurement
the d arrow key to see the ALL LIMITS screen (Figure 21).
(1) Repeat the TR BAL measurement starting at
(3) Exit the LIMITS or ALL LIMITS display by press- step h. Repeat the measurement no more than four times
ing QUIT until the measurement selection window (Figure before continuing to the next step.
22) is seen. Continue with next step.
(2) If the TR BAL is not successful after four
attempts, measure TR CK by highlighting TR CK and
NOTE
repeating this procedure starting at step k.

If the test set measured data successfully, o. If data needs to be re-measured at a specific test
9done9 will be seen next to the test state. If state, highlight the required test state and repeat the pro-
an error was encountered during measure- cedure starting at step j., otherwise continue.
ment, 9failed9 will be seen next to the test
state. NO data exists for any test state with p. From the Measurement Selection Window (Figure
9failed9 next to it. If 9failed9 is seen, repeat 22), press QUIT to exit the measurement mode.
the measurement before performing
recommended troubleshooting as q. From the Action menu (Figure 23), highlight Save
displayed on CADU screen. If errors per- and Exit and press DO.
sist, begin performing troubleshooting
actions one at a time with a measurement NOTE
attempt between each action.
If data was measured at both the TR-BAL
n. If data was successfully measured and 9done9 is and TR CK test states, the Finish menu will
seen next to the test state (Figure 22), continue with next be seen. If you wish to exit the measure-
step. If an error was experienced and data was not mea- ment mode, highlight Finish , press DO
sured, continue on. and continue this procedure with step s.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 18

Equipment Installation (PARA 6.) and measure data under

the TR BAL test state (refer to Tail Rotor Balance Data
Action Measurement (PARA 7).
Continue These Test States
Save and Exit have not yet been 8. RECALLING TAIL ROTOR DATA.
Abandon Flight measured:−
(No Data Collected)
NOTE
TR−CK
If the CADU is being operated on internal
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu indicates low power (internal batteries
require charging), perform one of the fol-
FB2289 lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
SA
into the DAU using the CADU-to-DAU
Figure 23. Action Menu cable and turn DAU power on. A second
method is to plug the CADU battery
r. Shut down the aircraft (Operator’s Manual). charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
receptacle and plug the probe end of the
NOTE battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
receptacle is located under the credit card
If it is known that the vibration exceeds access panel on the top edge of the CADU.
acceptance limits, from the End of Flight
menu (Figure 24), highlight Diagnostics a. Get the copy of the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure
and press DO. Go to Tail Rotor Balance 8) that has the previously installed tail rotor balance
Corrective Actions (PARA 9) and start at weight written on it.
step f.
NOTE
s. From the End of Flight menu (Figure 24), highlight
main menu and press DO. Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type,
Tail number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. is
t. If data was successfully measured and the Amp specified prior to recalling data. If the
block on the Tail Rotor Data Sheet was not filled out, refer wrong parameter is specified before recall-
to Recalling Tail Rotor Data (PARA 8) and fill out the Tail ing data, incorrect data will be recalled
Rotor Balance Data Sheet. If the data sheet was filled out, and incorrect decisions may be drawn.
continue on.
b. From the main menu (Figure 25), make sure that
u. If the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration level is the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D.
0.20 ips or less the tail rotor balance task is complete. are correctly specified. If all of the parameters are correct
Remove all tail rotor balance test equipment. Refer to Tail go to step c, otherwise continue:
Rotor Balance, Test Equipment Removal (PARA 11).
NOTE
v. If the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration level is
greater than 0.20 ips and the TR BAL test state was mea- You should change only those parameters
sured, determine required tail rotor hub weight adjust- that are improperly specified.
ments, refer to Tail Rotor Balance Corrective Actions
(PARA 9). To view all data stored in memory, high-
light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to
w. If the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration level is change all main menu items to 9?9, then
greater than 0.20 ips and the TR BAL test state was not highlight Flight I.D. and press DO, a com-
measured, make sure the optical pickup is installed and plete list of all data in memory will be dis-
operating properly, (refer to Tail Rotor Balance Test played.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 19

End of Flight

Diagnostics
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0470
SA

Figure 24. End of Flight Menu

(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 11),

press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
ber and press DO .

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEM − SHL (5) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20 or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO .
12−NOV−10 14:29:41
(6) From the Flight Plans (Figure 13), press the d
Aircraft Type S−70i
Tail Number 53
or f keys to highlight BAL TAIL and press DO .
Flight Plan BAL TAIL
Flight I.D. 12−NOV−10 at 14:11 (7) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO .
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item
NOTE
MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER
Data is stored in memory with the most
recent data at the top of the list. Therefore
if the most recent data is being recalled,
F1 F2 F3 F4 simply select the first flight I.D.

(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 26),

press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
press DO.
IM1015
SA

c. With the correct Flight I.D. specified on the main

Figure 25. Main Menu with Selected Flight I.D.
menu (Figure 25), press F2 (DISPLAY) to view data.
(1) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO. d. From the Display Mode menu (Figure 27), high-
light Summary Displays and press DO.
(2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 10),
press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, e. If vibration was measured at the TR BAL test state,
whichever is applicable and press DO . perform the following, otherwise continue with step f.

(3) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d (1) From the Select Summary Display menu (Fig-
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO . ure 28), highlight Tail Rotor Balance Data and press DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 20

operating properly, (refer to Tail Rotor Balance Test

Equipment Installation (PARA 6) and measure data under
Select Flight ID PAGE 1 OF 1 the TR BAL test state (refer to Tail Rotor Balance, Vibration
Measurement (PARA 7).
S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12 NOV 10 14:11

S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12 NOV 10 13:05 9. TAIL ROTOR BALANCE, CORRECTIVE

S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12 NOV 10 11:00 ACTIONS.

NOTE

Complete this corrective action procedure

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line
[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
if the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration
[DO] Select Flight [QUIT] Exit exceeds 0.20 ips, or if you have chosen to
reduce the tail rotor 1/rev vibration to even
IM1016
SA lower levels.

Figure 26. Select Flight I.D. Menu This corrective action procedure uses the
(2) From the summary display data page (Figure vibration data measured in the TR BAL test
29), enter the Tail ips in the Amp (ips) block and the Tail state and determines corrective actions to
deg in the Phase (Degrees) block on the Tail Rotor Data reduce the vibration to within acceptance
Sheet (Figure 38). criteria. The primary tool used to correct
tail rotor balance is the tail rotor hub
(3) Press QUIT until the main menu (Figure 25) is weight adjustment. If the TR BAL test state
seen and continue with step g. (a vibration amplitude and phase measure-
ment) was not completed and the TR CK
f. If vibration was measured at the TR CK test state, test state (a vibration amplitude measure-
perform the following: ment only) was measured, this corrective
action procedure can not be completed
(1) From the Select Summary Display menu (Fig- since the addition of hub weights requires
ure 28), highlight Tail Rotor Vibe Data and press DO. phase data. In the case that the TR BAL
measurement was not completed, you must
(2) From the summary display data page (Figure correct the instrumentation problems that
30) enter the Tail ips in the Amp (ips) block on the Tail prevented measurement of the TR BAL test
Rotor Data Sheet (Figure 38). state and repeat Tail Rotor Balance, Vibra-
tion Measurement (PARA 7).
(3) Press QUIT until the main menu (Figure 25) is
seen, continue with step g. Other maintenance will be recommended
on the tail rotor system if it is determined
g. If the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration level is that the weight required to balance the tail
0.20 ips or less the tail rotor balance task is complete. rotor exceeds the maximum allowable
Remove all tail rotor balance test equipment. Refer to Tail weight that can be installed, or the balance
Rotor Balance Test Equipment Removal (PARA 11). adjustments do not have the desired effect
on vibration.
h. If the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration level is
greater than 0.20 ips and the TR BAL test state was mea- a. If the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration level is
sured, determine required tail rotor hub weight adjust- greater than 0.20 ips, or if balancing the tail rotor to a
ments, refer to Tail Rotor Balance, Corrective Actions level below the 0.20 ips limit, continue with this proce-
(PARA 9). dure. If the vibration level is 0.20 ips or less, and further
balancing is not required, this task is considered com-
i. If the tail rotor 1/rev (balance) vibration level is plete. Remove vibration test equipment from the aircraft.
greater than 0.20 ips and the TR BAL test state was NOT Refer to Tail Rotor Balance, Test Equipment Removal
measured, make sure the optical pickup is installed and (PARA 11).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 21

Display Mode

One Test State

Complete Flight
Trend Flights
View Limits
Summary Displays

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FG0473
SA

Figure 27. Display Mode Menu

S−70i 53 BAL TAIL

Select Summary Display PAGE 1 OF 1 FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
SYNCHRONOUS VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA TR 1 / Rev Balance Data (ips / deg)
STATE TAIL deg
TAIL ROTOR VIBE DATA
TR BAL 0.64 108
PRINT ALL DISPLAYS TR CK ? ?

Enter these values on the data sheet.

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Display [QUIT] Exit [LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

FB2292 IM1017
SA SA

Figure 28. Select Summary Display Menu Figure 29. Tail Rotor Balance Summary Display Data
Page
NOTE

Make sure that the weight currently

installed on the tail rotor is known and If the CADU is being operated on internal
entered in the Previously Installed block on batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure 38). Use or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
the Hardware-To-Weight Conversion Table indicates low power (internal batteries
on the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure 8) to require charging), perform one of the fol-
determine the weight actually installed on lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
the tail rotor. To determine installed weight, into the DAU using the CADU-to-DAU
locate the specific hardware combination cable and turn DAU power on. A second
actually installed on a tail rotor retention method is to plug the CADU battery
plate on the Hardware-To-Weight Conver- charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
sion Table and read the associated weight receptacle and plug the probe end of the
from the table. The Hardware-To-Weight battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
Conversion Table relates specific hardware receptacle is located under the credit card
combinations to balance weight in grams. access panel on top of the CADU.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 22

(2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 10),

S−70i 53 BAL TAIL press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF,
FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10 whichever is applicable, and press DO.
PEAK VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
STATE CHAN AMP(ips) FREQ(rpm) (3) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
TR 1 / Rev Vibe Data or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.
TR CK TAIL 0.5806 1185.00
(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 11),
Enter this value on the data sheet.
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
ber and press DO.

(5) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.

IM1018
SA (6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 13), press
the d or f keys to highlight BAL TAIL and press DO .
Figure 30. Tail Rotor Vibe Summary Display Data Page
(7) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
b. Get the copy of the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure
or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.
8) that the ips data and the previous tail rotor balance
weight data was written on.
NOTE

c. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power Data is stored in memory with the most
on. recent data at the top of the list. Therefore
if the most recent data is being recalled,
NOTE simply select the first flight I.D.

Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type, (8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 26),
Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. is press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
specified prior to running diagnostics. If the press DO.
wrong parameter is specified, incorrect
adjustments will be called out. e. With the correct Flight I.D. selected (Figure 25),
press the F3 key to enter the diagnostic mode in the test
set.
d. From the main menu (Figure 25), make sure that
the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. NOTE
are correctly specified. If all of the main menu parameters
are correct, go to step e, otherwise continue: If the LIMITS display indicates that
Measurements are within specified limits or
NOTE the MEASURED ips level is less than the
LIMIT value, the vibration is acceptable and
You should change only the parameters no corrective action is necessary. Complete
that are improperly specified. this procedure to exit the diagnostic mode,
however no adjustments are required.

To view all data stored in memory, high- In the LIMITS display, a 9?9 indicates that
light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to data was not measured at that test state.
change all main menu items to 9?9, then
highlight Flight I.D. and press DO. A com- The LIMITS display will show you what
plete list of all data in memory will be dis- measurements exceeded limits and what
played. measurements were not taken. Any mea-
surement that was made and is within limits
(1) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d will not be shown. To see all of the mea-
or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO. surements compared to the programmed

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 23

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Page 1 of 1
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12 NOV 10 14:11
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED CURRENT CONFIGURATION
TR BAL TAIL BALANCE 0.20 0.58 ips
TR CK TAIL BALANCE 0.20 ? ips TAIL−BAL WEIGHT (GRAMS)
BLADES
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
0.00 0.00 0.00 34.00
[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All
[DO] to Confirm [QUIT] to Abort
IM1019 MODIFY NEXT PAGE PREV PAGE RESET
SA

Figure 31. 9LIMITS9 Screen in Diagnostics, Tail Rotor

Balance Exceeds Limits
F1 F2 F3 F4
limits press the d key and the ALL LIMITS
display will be shown.

f. The LIMITS display should be seen on the CADU

(Figure 31). From the LIMITS screen press DO to con- IM1020
tinue. SA

Figure 32. 9CURRENT CONFIGURATION9 Screen In

Diagnostics
CAUTION
block on the Tail Rotor Data Sheet and make sure that the
values match the Current Configuration screen. If the val-
The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen ues match, go to step h. and continue the procedure. If
(Figure 32) identifies the weight that was the values do not match, continue to change CURRENT
previously installed on the tail rotor. Do not CONFIGURATION screen:
mistake these values for the adjustments
that need to be made. The adjustments (1) To change a value in the current configuration
need to be made will be displayed on the screen, press the s or g arrow keys until the desired quad-
CORRECTIONS FOR screen, Figure 34. rant is highlighted.

NOTE
(2) Once the correct quadrant is highlighted, use
the keypad to enter the correct weight for the selected
The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen
quadrant and press DO to enter the value.
acts as an inventory tool where you must
enter how much weight was installed on
the tail rotor when the data was measured. (3) Repeat step (1) through step (2) until all the
This allows the test set to make sure that the values from the previously installed tail rotor weight
maximum allowable weight is not blocks on the data sheet are properly specified on the
exceeded on any quadrant. Current Configuration screen. Once all values are cor-
rect, continue with step h.
g. Review the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen
(Figure 32), to make sure that the values entered match h. Once the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen is
what was installed on the tail rotor when the vibration properly specified (Figure 32), press DO to start diagnos-
was measured. Refer to the last Previous Installed weight tics.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 24

NOTE always try to remove weight from the tail

rotor prior to adding weight. It is possible
The Tail Rotor Troubleshooting Flowchart is that the diagnostics may require adjustment
used only after the primary adjustment (tail on all four quadrants (adding weight to two
rotor hub weights) fail to reduce vibration quadrants and removing weight from two
to within the acceptable limit. Corrections quadrants) however, when all of the adjust-
made as a result of this flowchart are not ments are made weight should never be
immediately intended to reduce vibration installed on any more than two adjacent
to within the limit, but are intended to cor- quadrants. If weight ends up on more than
rect any defect in the tail rotor that is pre- two adjacent quadrants, the CURRENT
venting the tail rotor from being balanced CONFIGURATION screen was not
properly. Therefore , after a corrective properly specified.
action is made from this flowchart you must
repeat Tail Rotor Balance Vibration Mea- j. The CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 34) tells
surement procedure and make required tail you what tail rotor hub weight adjustments are required
rotor weight corrections until the task is to reduce tail rotor 1/rev vibration. Enter these values in
completed, or until instructed by this proce- the appropriate Change Required block on the Tail Rotor
dure to re-enter the flowchart. Data Sheet (Figure 38).

Any maintenance involving the k. From the CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 34),
replacement/swapping of components or press QUIT to exit.
the removal of tail rotor hub weights may
cause the vibration to increase when com- l. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 35), highlight
pared to the previous run. This may trigger View Predictions and press DO.
a diagnostic warning screen. If the diag-
nostic warning screen indicates that Vibra- m. The RESPONSES FOR screen, Figure 36, will
tion Levels Increasing (Figure 33) and prior show you what the measured vibration level was and
maintenance was performed that explains what the vibration is predicted to be after the recom-
the increase, go to step s. and continue. mended adjustments are made. This feature informs you
if the vibration is correctable. If the predicted vibration is
i. If either of the Diagnostic Warning screens (Figure 0.20 ips or less, press DO and continue with step n. If the
33) are seen, go to the Tail Rotor Balance Troubleshoot- predicted vibration is greater than 0.20 ips, it is not
ing Flowchart, Figure 40. If no diagnostic warning expected that the vibration can be corrected with the
screens are seen, continue with step j. allotted amount of weight, press DO and continue:
NOTE
(1) From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 35), press
QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode
Tail Rotor Balance weight corrections are
called out in units of grams. A plus sign (+)
preceding the weight correction means add (2) From the DIAGS display (Figure 37), press
weight to that quadrant. A minus sign (-) QUIT to exit diagnostics without updating the current
preceding the weight correction means configuration list.
subtract weight from that quadrant.
(3) From the main menu (Figure 25), press OFF to
Weight is always added to and subtracted turn the CADU off.
from the weight that was installed on the
tail rotor at the time the vibration was mea- (4) Turn DAU power off by placing DAU power
sured. switch to OFF.

If the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen (5) Get the Tail Rotor Balance Troubleshooting
is properly specified, the diagnostics will Flowchart and start troubleshooting at PT 1 (Figure 40).

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 25

Diagnostic Warning Diagnostic Warning

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11 12 NOV 10 S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11 12 NOV 10
PAGE 1 OF 1 PAGE 1 OF 1
Small Improvement Vibration Levels Increasing
Change in vibration levels less than
20% Potential Action:
Tail balance adjustments are not producing Tail balance adjustments are not producing
desired results − Go to Tail Rotor desired results − Go to Tail Rotor
Troubleshooting Flowchart, Figure 40 Troubleshooting Flowchart, Figure 40
in WP 003 00 of the TM 1−70−VIB in WP 003 00 of the TM 1−70−VIB
manual. manual.

[LEFT] Page Up [RIGHT] Page Down [LEFT] Page Up [RIGHT] Page Down
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu [DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu

IM1021
SA

Figure 33. Diagnostic Warning Screens

are not going to be made. In this case the current con-

figuration list is not changed.
CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 1 OF 1
S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12−NOV−10 14:11
p. From the main menu (Figure 25), press OFF to
TAIL−BAL WEIGHT (GRAMS) turn the CADU off.
+ means Add weight
− means Remove weight
Blades q. Turn DAU power off by setting DAU power switch
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 to OFF.
0.00 +29.00 +68.00 −34.00
r. Make the tail rotor hub weight adjustments speci-
fied on the Tail Rotor Data Sheet, refer to Tail Rotor Hub
[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu Weight Adjustments (PARA 10).

IM1022 s. To get a tail rotor hub weight adjustment from a

SA
Diagnostic Warning screen (Figure 33), perform the fol-
Figure 34. Corrections Display Screen lowing:

NOTE (1) From the Diagnostic Warning screen (Figure

33), press QUIT.
If you highlight main menu from the diag-
nostic menu and press DO, the test set will (2) From the Diagnostic Menu (Figure 35), high-
exit the diagnostic mode, automatically light View Corrections and press DO .
modify the current configuration list, and
return to the main menu. If this occurs, go (3) The CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 34)
to step p. will be seen. Continue this procedure starting at step j.

n. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 35), press t. To exit diagnostics from a Diagnostic Warning
QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode. screen (Figure 33), perform the following:

o. From the DIAGS display (Figure 37), press DO if (1) From the Diagnostic Warning screen (Figure
you plan to make the last set of adjustments recommended 33), press QUIT.
by the diagnostics, this will update the most recent con-
figuration list by adding the recommended adjustments to (2) From the Diagnostic Menu (Figure 35), press
the old list. Press QUIT, if the recommended adjustments QUIT.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 26

Diagnostics Menu

View Predictions
Edit Adjustables
View Corrections
View Limits
Edit Defaults
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0481
SA

Figure 35. Diagnostics Menu

ously installed, the weight adjustment that

RESPONSES FOR: PAGE 1 OF 1 needs to be made, or the total weight
S−70i 53 BAL TAIL 12 NOV 10 14:11
expected to be installed after the weight
Vibration Results: Measured Predicted adjustment is completed, remove all
Test Channel IPS DEG IPS DEG
installed weight from the tail rotor and
TR−BAL TAIL 0.64 108 0.01 347 begin the task over again.

a. Review the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure 8) that

has the Previously Installed weight, the vibration data,
and the Change Required information written on it.

[UP] Prev Line [Right] Next Line NOTE

[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
[DO] / [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu
IM1023
To determine the amount of weight installed
SA
on the tail rotor, compare the hardware
installed against the hardware listed in the
Figure 36. View Predictions Display Within Diagnostics
Hardware-To-Weight Conversion Table on
(3) From the DIAGS menu (Figure 37), press the Tail Rotor Data Sheet. Once a hard-
QUIT. ware match is found, read the weight from
the table for that particular hardware com-
(4) Press OFF to turn the CADU off. bination.

(5) Turn DAU power off by setting DAU power b. Before removing any weight, determine the
switch to OFF. amount of weight installed on the balance adjustment
location and compare that weight to the value entered in
(6) Continue with required troubleshooting. the Previously Installed weight block on the Tail Rotor Data
Sheet (Figure 38). If the values match, continue with this
10. TAIL ROTOR BALANCE, WEIGHT ADJUST- procedure. If the values do not match, enter the correct
MENT. amount of weight in the Previously Installed weight block
and return to the Tail Rotor Balance Corrective Action
NOTE procedure (PARA 9). Make sure that the CURRENT CON-
FIGURATION screen (Figure 32) is properly specified.
Only make weight adjustments per the
diagnostics. If at any time there is confu- c. On the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure 38), add or
sion regarding which weight was previ- subtract the values entered in the Change Required block

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 27

DIAGS

Do you wish to store the new

adjustment values?

PRESS DO for YES

PRESS QUIT for NO

FG0483
SA

Figure 37. DIAGS Display Exiting Diagnostics

to or from the values entered in the Previously Installed e. Identify the hardware combination required to
block and enter the result in the New Total Installed block. achieve one of the weights specified in the New Total
The value entered in the New Total Installed block is the Installed block of the data sheet (Figure 38). Recall that
total weight that should be installed on the tail rotor after the New Total Installed weight is actually the Previously
the adjustments are completed. Installed weight plus or minus the Change Required
weight. Therefore, if a weight package equal to the New
NOTE Total Installed is put in a quadrant, all previously installed
weight must be removed. If a weight package equal to the
Change Required is put in a quadrant, the previously
For the most consistent tail rotor balancing installed weight must stay.
results, install weight in the bolt hole that is
next to the tail rotor blade trailing edge in
f. If weight removal is required, remove bolt, wash-
the recommended quadrant.
ers, balance washers, and nut from the identified quad-
rant.
If the total weight is greater than 113.5
grams for a quadrant such that both bolt
holes will have to be used, install the bolt CAUTION
with the most weight in the bolt hole next to
the tail rotor blade trailing edge in the rec-
ommended quadrant. Do not install any more than 113.5 grams
on any one bolt.
If the appropriate balance hardware is not
available to install all of the recommended Do not install any more than 227 grams on
balance weight utilizing a single bolt hole, any one quadrant.
it is acceptable to utilize both bolt holes
with a combination of balance hardware. g. If weight is to be added, perform the following
(Figure 39):
If a hardware combination can not be
found on the Hardware-To-Weight Conver- (1) Place 1/2 of the required balance washers
sion Table that exactly matches the adjust- (SS4409-029) on the balance bolt followed by one small
ments noted on the Data Sheet , select the washer (NAS1149C0463R).
closest hardware combination from the
table. (2) Place the bolt, balance washers, and small
washer in one of the balance weight locations on the
d. Use the Tail Rotor Data Sheet (Figure 8) to identify retention plate with the bolt head pointed out and the
the quadrant that is going to be adjusted. small washer against the outboard retention plate.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 28

AIRCRAFT
DATE

TAIL ROTOR DATA SHEET

(Criteria: Tail Rotor 1 / Rev Vibrations [Balance] shall be 0.20 ips or less at Flat Pitch, 100% Nr)
RUN Amp Phase TAIL ROTOR WEIGHT (grams)

(ips) (Degrees) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

34 Previously Installed
1 .64 108 0 +29 +68 −34 Change Required
27 69 0 New Total Installed

27 69 Previously Installed

Change Required

New Total Installed

Previously Installed

Change Required

New Total Installed

FB2300
SA

Figure 38. Example Tail Rotor Data Sheet

(3) Place the second small washer k. Repeat data measurement, refer to Tail Rotor Bal-
(NAS1149C0463R) on the bolt against the inboard ance, Vibration Measurement procedure (PARA 7).
retention plate, add the remaining balance washers to the
balance bolt, and install the nut. 11. TAIL ROTOR BALANCE, TEST EQUIPMENT
REMOVAL.
(4) Torque the nut to 100 inch-pounds.
a. Turn DAU off by setting DAU power switch to OFF.
(5) Check that the weights are securely attached to
the retention plate and that at least 11⁄2 threads of the bolt b. Turn CADU off by pressing OFF key on CADU.
are showing beyond the nut. If the weight attachment bolt
is loose (the bolt is too long) or if less than 11⁄2 threads c. Disconnect the cable from the tail rotor balance
are showing beyond the nut (the bolt is too short), check accelerometer. Remove the accelerometer bracket from
the installed weight package against the Hardware-To- the aircraft. Replace screw in tail gearbox fairing.
Weight Conversion Table on the Tail Rotor Data Sheet Remove all tiedown straps securing accelerometer cable
and get the correct weight package installed on the air- to aircraft. Disconnect accelerometer cable from the CDU
craft. and remove the cable from the aircraft and return to the
appropriate case.
h. Repeat this procedure starting at step d until all of
the required weight changes have been completed. d. Remove optical RPM sensor, bracket, and cable
from aircraft. Remove all tiedown straps securing optical
RPM sensor cable to aircraft. Replace screws in tail gear-
i. Make sure that all of the weight changes were box fairing. Disconnect optical RPM sensor cable from the
properly made on the tail rotor. DAU and remove the cable from the aircraft and return to
the appropriate case.
j. On the tail rotor data sheet, enter the weight actu-
ally installed in the next available Previously Installed e. Disconnect the 28 VDC power cable from the DAU
block. and from the aircraft 28 VDC receptacle, remove the

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 29

BOLT−SELECT
AN4−12A
AN4−13A TARGET
AN4−14A BLADE REFLECTIVE
AN4−15A TARGET
AN4−16A
AN4−17A
AN4−20A
AN4−21A
AN4−22A
AN4−23A QUADRANT 4
AN4−27A BALANCE QUADRANT 1
OUTBOARD
AN4−31A WEIGHT BALANCE
RETENTION
LOCATIONS WEIGHT
PLATE
WASHERS LOCATIONS
NAS1149C0463R
INBOARD
RETENTION
PLATE

NUT
MS21044N4
(TORQUE 100 IN. LBS) BALANCE
WASHERS
SS4409−029
NOTES
1. MAXIMUM WEIGHT OF BOLT, NUT,
WASHERS, AND BALANCE WASHERS
ALLOWED IN ANY ONE QUADRANT IS
227 GRAMS (1/2 POUND). QUADRANT 2
2. AT LEAST 1 1/2 THREADS OF BALANCE
QUADRANT 3 WEIGHT
SELECTED BOLT MUST SHOW BEYOND BALANCE
NUT. IF LESS THREADS SHOW, USE LOCATIONS
WEIGHT
NEXT LONGEST BOLT AND WEIGH ALL LOCATIONS
ITEMS AGAIN. FB2301A
SA

Figure 39. Tail Rotor Hub Weight Installation

cable from the aircraft, and return to the appropriate and DAU from the aircraft and return to the appropriate
case. case.

f. Disconnect the CDU cable from both the CDU and

the DAU. Remove both the CDU-to-DAU cable and CDU h. If all vibration tasks are complete on that tail num-
from the aircraft, and return to the appropriate case. ber aircraft, download data from the CADU to PC, delete
data from CADU memory, compress CADU memory, and
g. Disconnect the CADU-to-DAU cable from the return CADU to case. Refer to Software/Data Manage-
CADU and DAU. Remove both the CADU-to-DAU cable ment Instructions (WP 010 00).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 30

NOTES
WAS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN 1. ENSURE THAT ALL TAIL ROTOR HUB WEIGHT CORRECTIONS
"VIBRATION LEVELS INCREASING" ARE MADE PROPERLY. IF THIS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING
SEEN ON CADU? SCREEN IS SEEN REPEATEDLY WITHOUT EXPLANATION, THEN
(SEE NOTE 1) REPLACE ACCELEROMETER AND ACCELEROMETER CABLE AND
REPEAT THE PROCEDURE. IF THE DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN
YES NO STILL PERSISTS, GO TO "PT 1" IN THIS FLOWCHART.

2. MAINTENANCE INVOLVING THE REPLACEMENT / SWAPPING

OF COMPONENTS OR REMOVAL OF ALL TAIL ROTOR BALANCE
WEIGHTS MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASE OF TAIL ROTOR 1 / REV
VIBRATION WHEN COMPARED TO THE VIBRATION
MEASURED ON THE PREVIOUS BALANCE RUN.

3. THIS ACTION MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASE IN TAIL ROTOR 1 /

REV VIBRATION WHEN COMPARED TO THE VIBRATION
MEASURED ON THE PREVIOUS RUN.

WAS MAINTENANCE PERFORMED ON THE TAIL ROTOR WAS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN
PRIOR TO THIS LAST RUN THAT WOULD EXPLAIN AN "SMALL IMPROVEMENT"
INCREASE IN TAIL ROTOR 1 / REV VIBRATION? SEEN ON CADU?
(SEE NOTE 2)
YES NO
YES NO

CHECK ALL VIBRATION EQUIPMENT FOR PROPER HAVE THE DIAGNOSTICS BEEN RE−RUN
INSTALLATION, TAIL ROTOR BALANCE, TEST A SECOND TIME WITH SPECIAL ATTENTION
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, THIS WP. PAYED TO THE HUB WEIGHTS CURRENTLY
PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO: INSTALLED ON THE TAIL ROTOR AND ENSURING
− ACCELEROMETER INSTALLATION AND ORIENTATION. THAT THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION SCREEN
− OPTICAL PICKUP INSTALLATION. ON THE RADS−AT WAS PROPERLY DEFINED.
− REFLECTIVE TAPE INSTALLATION.

WAS ALL EQUIPMENT PROPERLY INSTALLED? YES NO

YES NO

REFER TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE CORRECTIVE 1. REFER TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE CORRECTIVE
ACTION, THIS WP, AND CONTINUE PROCEDURE ACTION, THIS WP, STEP T. TO EXIT DIAGNOSTICS.
STARTING AT STEP S. TO GET REQUIRED TAIL ROTOR 2. VERIFY THE WEIGHT CURRENTLY INSTALLED
HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENTS. ON THE TAIL ROTOR IS PROPERLY NOTED IN
THE "PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED" BLOCK OF THE
TAIL ROTOR DATA SHEET.
3. REPEAT TAIL ROTOR BALANCE CORRECTIVE
ACTIONS, THIS WP. ENSURE THE CURRENT
CONFIGURATION SCREEN IN DIAGNOSTICS
1. REFER TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE CORRECTIVE REFLECTS THE WEIGHT THAT IS ACTUALLY
ACTION, THIS WP, STEP S TO EXIT DIAGNOSTICS. INSTALLED ON THE TAIL ROTOR.

2. CORRECT INSTRUMENTATION PROBLEMS IN

ACCORDANCE WITH TAIL ROTOR BALANCE
TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, THIS WP. 1. REFER TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE CORRECTIVE
ACTION, THIS WP, STEP T. TO EXIT DIAGNOSTICS.
3. REMOVE ALL HUB WEIGHT INSTALLED ON THE MAX ALLOWABLE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED
TAIL ROTOR. OR IS BEING INSTALLED ON THE TAIL ROTOR
WITH VERY LITTLE REDUCTION IN VIBRATION
4. ANNOTATE THE TAIL ROTOR DATA SHEET (FIGURE BEING PREDICTED. THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT
8) TO SHOW THAT NO BALANCE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED PROBLEM WITH A TAIL ROTOR COMPONENT
ON THE TAIL ROTOR. THAT MUST BE CORRECTED.

5. RE−MEASURE TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA,

REFER TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA MEASUREMENT. A
(SEE NOTE 3).
FB2302
SA

Figure 40. Tail Rotor Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 3)

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 31

PT1

HAVE TAIL ROTOR PITCH LINKS BEEN INSPECTED

FOR EXCESSIVE WEAR?

YES NO

HAS THE TAIL ROTOR PITCH LINK RIG CHECK INSPECT TAIL ROTOR PITCH LINKS FOR EXCESSIVE WEAR
BEEN COMPLETED? (REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).

YES NO REPLACE WORN BEARINGS AS REQUIRED.

WERE ANY PITCH LINKS OR BEARINGS REPLACED?

NO YES

PERFORM TAIL ROTOR PITCH LINK RIGGING CHECKS REPEAT TAIL ROTOR BALANCE PROCEDURE, REFER
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL). TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA MEASUREMENT,
ADJUST TAIL ROTOR PITCH LINKS AS REQUIRED. THIS WP (SEE NOTE 3).
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).

WAS ANY SINGLE PITCH LINK ADJUSTED MORE THAN

TWO TURNS RELATIVE TO THE OTHER LINKS?

NO YES

HAVE TAIL ROTOR PADDLES BEEN SWAPPED DURING REPEAT TAIL ROTOR BALANCE PROCEDURE, REFER
THIS TAIL BALANCE EVOLUTION? TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP (SEE NOTE 3).
YES NO

IS WEIGHT BEING ADDED TO THE SAME QUADRANTS SWAP BOTH TAIL ROTOR PADDLES SO THAT THE
AS BEFORE THE PADDLES WERE SWAPPED? PADDLES ARE CHANGED 180 DEGREES WITH RESPECT
TO THE RETENTION PLATES.
NO YES (REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
(RED BLADE SHOULD GO WHERE YELLOW BLADE
WAS WHILE BLACK BLADE SHOULD GO WHERE
BLUE BLADE WAS)

B C KEEP REFLECTIVE TAPE ON THE SAME

BLADE − DO NOT TOUCH TAPE.

REPEAT TAIL ROTOR BALANCE PROCEDURE, REFER

TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP (SEE NOTE 3).

FB4071_2
SA

Figure 40. Tail Rotor Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 3)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 003 00
Page 32

B C

HAVE TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX TO AIRFRAME A TAIL ROTOR PADDLE IS OUT OF BALANCE.
ATTACHMENT BOLT TORQUES BEEN CHECKED? IDENTIFY THE PROBLEM PADDLE(S) AND REPLACE.
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
YES NO
IF A LARGE QUANTITY OF BALANCE WEIGHT
IS ADDED TO TWO ADJACENT QUADRANTS,
THEN REPLACE THE PADDLE
THAT IS BETWEEN TWO QUADRANTS WITH
WEIGHTS INSTALLED.

IF A LARGE QUANTITY OF BALANCE WEIGHT

IS ADDED TO ONE QUADRANT IT IS SUSPECTED
THAT BOTH PADDLES ARE OUT OF BALANCE. IT
IS RECOMMENDED THAT BOTH PADDLES BE
REPLACED.

REPEAT TAIL ROTOR BALANCE PROCEDURE, REFER

TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP (SEE NOTE 3).

HAS TAIL ROTOR RETENTION PLATE CHECK TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX TO AIRFRAME
TORQUE AND SPLIT CONE INSTALLATION ATTACHMENT BOLT TORQUES.
CHECKS BEEN COMPLETED? (REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).

YES NO ANY DEFECTS NOTED?

NO YES

REMOVE INNER RETENTION PLATE. REPEAT TAIL ROTOR BALANCE PROCEDURE, REFER
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL). TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP (SEE NOTE 3).
WERE ANY DEFICENCIES NOTES IN THE
FOLLOWING AREAS.

− INNER RETENTION PLATE TORQUES LOW.

− INNER OR OUTER RETENTION PLATE

SPLIT CONE ENDS TOUCHING.

− GREASE ON THE TAPERED SIDE OF

ANY OF THE SPLIT CONES.

NO YES

REPLACE THE COMPONENTS LISTED BELOW IN THE CORRECT DEFICENCIES AND

ASSIGNED ORDER. REPEAT THE TAIL ROTOR BALANCE REPEAT TAIL ROTOR BALANCE PROCEDURE, REFER
PROCEDURE FOLLOWING EACH ACTION. TO TAIL ROTOR BALANCE DATA MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP (SEE NOTE 3).
1. REPLACE BOTH TAIL ROTOR PADDLES.
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).

2. REPLACE TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX ASSEMBLY.

(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).

DO NOT REJECT ANY COMPONENTS UNTIL THE

DEFECTIVE COMPONENT IS IDENTIFIED. FB4071_3
SA

Figure 40. Tail Rotor Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 3)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

RADS-AT Operation and Maintenance .................................................................... 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page No.

Aircraft Configuration .............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Conditions ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Procedure, Engine Output Shaft Balance .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Corrective Actions ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Recalling Data ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Setscrew Trim Balance Adjustment ............. . . . . . . . . . 38
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Test Equipment Installation .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Test Equipment Removal ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Vibration Measurement ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Vibration Task Sequencing .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

Model 991 Accelerometer (54 mV/g) (Wilcoxon

Research)
29103900 Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29104700 28 VDC Power Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29105604 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 25 ft
length (GE Aviation Systems)
29283200 Cable Distribution Unit Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29313000 L-Shaped Accelerometer Mounting Bracket
29314700 Optical RPM Sensor (GE Aviation Systems)*
29315000 CADU Battery Charger (GE Aviation
Systems)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 2

Support Equipment Required (Cont)

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

29325601 DAU-to-CADU Cable (GE Aviation

Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE
Aviation Systems)
29481400 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29730000 Bleed-Air Plug (GE Aviation Systems)*
29754500 Output Shaft Optical RPM Sensor Bracket
(GE Aviation Systems)*
3M-7610 Reflective Tape (1-inch width by 2-inch
length) (3M)*
70351-08408-102 Accelerometer Blocks
- Torque Wrench (0 - 30 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (30 - 200 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (100 - 600 in. lbs.)
*Items not required to complete Engine All required vibration test equipment is
Output Shaft Index Balance. found in the basic kit, and the adapter kit,
29743100.
Warnings and Cautions for hazardous materials listed in this manual are designed to apprise
personnel of hazards associated with such items when they come in contact with them by
actual use. Consult your local Safety and Health staff concerning specific personnel protective
requirements and appropriate handling and emergency procedures for additional
information related to hazardous materials.

Materials Required

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature

AN5-6A Bolt
NAS1149F0463P Washer
NAS1149F0432P Washer
MS20995NC32 Safety Wire
MS21206C4, Washer
MS9320-1 Safety Wire
TT-1-735 Isoproply Alcohol
5975-00-984-6582 or Equivalent Tiedown Straps
8030-00-723-2746 Sealing Compound
- Masking Tape

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 3

1. VIBRATION TASK SEQUENCING (Figure 1). 4. AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION.

a. The Engine Output Shaft task can be done at the a. The aircraft must be ready for ground runs up to
same time the Tail Rotor (WP 003 00), Oil Cooler (WP 100% Nr with both main rotor and tail rotor blades
005 00), Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006 00), or installed.
Main Rotor Ground Balancing (WP 007 00) tasks are
being completed. It is not necessary that criteria for any b. This task must be completed prior to the first flight
one of the above listed tasks be satisfied before the Engine if any of the following have occurred:
Output Shaft task is performed.
(1) Any of the aircraft Phase Inspections have
b. The Engine Output Shaft Balance task is required been completed.
if any of the following conditions are true:
(2) Any of the bolts that attach the engine shaft to
(1) Any of the aircraft Phase Inspections have the input module flange were loosened or removed for
been completed. any reason.

(2) Any of the bolts that attach the engine shaft to 5. TEST PROCEDURE, ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
the input module flange were loosened or removed for BALANCE.
any reason.
6. ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COU-
PLING BALANCE, TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLA-
NOTE
TION.
The Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Cou-
NOTE
pling Balance method must be used on
helicopters utilizing hardware kit, 70000-
The Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Cou-
30100-044 Diaphragm Coupling.
pling Balance method must be used on
Paragraphs 1 through 5, and paragraphs
helicopters utilizing hardware kit (70000-
18 through 23 must be performed to com-
30100-044) Diaphragm Coupling.
plete the Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm
Paragraphs 1-5 and paragraph 18-23
Coupling Balance.
must be performed to complete the Engine
Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Bal-
c. If the Engine Output Shaft task is required it must ance.
be completed prior to flying the aircraft.
When the Diaphragm Coupling balance is
2. PURPOSE. applicable (hardware kit 70000-30100-
044), balance set screws are added or
a. Engine Output Shaft Balance contains the proce- subtracted within the six balance locations
dure for checking and balancing the 1/rev vibration of (each containing two balance points).
the engine output shaft assembly on the ground for the
S-70i type aircraft. All vibration test equipment required for
this task is found in the basic kit, and the
b. The Engine Output Shaft Balance procedure mea- adapter kit, 29743100.
sures engine output shaft 1/rev vibration (20,900 RPM)
at Flat Pitch, 100% Nr, and compares the level against If the Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Cou-
limits. If the limit is exceeded balancing must be per- pling Balance task is required as a result of
formed. Output shaft balancing is accomplished the a periodic check where no maintenance
addition/subtraction of balance set screws to/from the was performed on the engine output shaft,
output shaft system. and the engine inlet has not been removed
for another reason, you will be directed by
3. TEST CONDITIONS. the procedure to only install the test equip-
ment that is required to determine if a shaft
a. Engine Output Shaft Balance can be accomplished is within the limit. The reasoning for this is
day or night in any weather conditions. that once the shaft is balanced and no

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 4

ALL TASKS WITHIN DOTTED BOX CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED SIMULTANEOUSLY

WP 003 00 WP 005 00 WP 006 00

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE OIL COOLER VIBRATION MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING
CHECK
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. 1. MAIN ROTOR BLADE REPLACED.
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF TAIL
ROTOR RETENTION PLATE BOLTS. 2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVING OF 2. PCR OR PC ROD END REPLACED.
ANY OIL COOLER SHAFT ATTACHMENT
3. THE ADJUSTMENT OF ANY TAIL
BOLTS (INPUT OR OUTPUT). 3. PCR’S ADJUSTED DURING MR RIG.
ROTOR PITCH LINKS.
3. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY 4. MAIN ROTOR HEAD REMOVED.
BOLTS THAT SECURE OIL COOLER
TO AIRFRAME. 5. MAIN ROTOR QCU REMOVED.

6. MR SPINDLE REMOVED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. 100% NR 100%NR, NOSE INTO WIND

WP 004 00 WP 007 00
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING
BALANCE TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: 1. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. FLAT PITCH TRACKING, THIS MANUAL.
2. GROUND VIBRATION DISCREPANCY
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTS.
BOLTS THAT ATTACH THE ENGINE
SHAFT TO THE INPUT MODULE 3. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
FLANGE. 1 / REV TUNING, THIS MANUAL.
4. BLADE RETENTION PIN REPLACED.
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND.

WP 008 00
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
2. FOLLOWING MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING.
3. INFLIGHT VIBRATION DISCREPANCY EXISTS.
4. MAIN ROTOR DAMPER OR DAMPER BEARING REPLACED.
5. MAIN ROTOR PCR BEARING REPLACED.
6. MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAP REPLACED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS WITH EXTERNAL TANKS
FP GROUND, 100% NR FP GROUND, 100% NR
OGE HOVER, 100% NR OGE HOVER, 100% NR
80 KTS, 100% NR 80 KTS, 100% NR
120 KTS, 100% NR 120 KTS, 100% NR
140KTS, 100% NR VH, 100% NR
VH, 100% NR

IM1025
SA

Figure 1. Vibration Task Sequencing

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 5

A
LIFT PLATE
ACCELEROMETER
CABLE

GIMBAL
MOUNT

ACCELEROMETER

ACCELEROMETER
BLOCK

NOTE
ACCELEROMETER MOUNTING ON NO. 1 #2 INPUT MODULE
INPUT MODULE SIMILAR FG0488A
INBOARD LOOKING OUTBOARD SA

Figure 2. #2 Engine Output Shaft Balance Accelerometer Installation (#1 Engine installation similar)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 6

CADU CABLE

DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

NIGHT
DAY TEST

ACC 1 ACC 3 FUSE

TACHO 1 TRACKER
CADU 15 AMP
MODE STROBE

ON

TACHO 2
ACC 2 ACC 4 OFF
TRACKER 1 28VDC POWER
MULTI−CH

MULTI−CH CABLE 28 VDC

FROM THE CDU POWER CABLE
FG0489
SA

Figure 3. DAU Cable Connections For Engine Output Shaft Balance

#1 ENGINE MULTI−CH CABLE

ACCELEROMETER FROM THE DAU

CABLE DISTRIBUTION UNIT

ACC 5 ACC 6 ACC 7 ACC 8 ACC 9 TACHO 2

MULTI−CH

ACC 10 ACC 11 ACC 12 ACC 13 ACC 14 ABT 2

#2 ENGINE
ACCELEROMETER

FB2375
SA

Figure 4. Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) Connections For Engine Output Shaft Balance

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 7

maintenance has been performed on that tion and phase measurements, and will
shaft, it is more likely that the shaft will still cause incorrect balance setscrew adjust-
be within the limit and will save you from ment to be called out.
the additional maintenance of removing
the engine inlet and installing the optical c. Install one accelerometer (WR991B) on the accel-
RPM sensor used for balancing. If the shaft erometer block, or bracket, on the input module of each
is not within the limit you will be directed to engine that requires balancing. Make sure the accelerom-
remove the engine inlet, install the addi- eter is oriented vertically, with the connector facing up
tional equipment required for balancing, (Figure 2). TORQUE ACCELEROMETER TO 20
and perform the balance procedure. INCH-POUNDS.

Test equipment can be installed on one or

two engine output shafts at one time as CAUTION
required. Only install test equipment on
each shaft that requires the Engine Output
Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance to be To avoid damage accelerometer or accel-
performed. erometer cable, make sure that 3-pin
socket end of the cable is attached to the
a. Identify the shaft(s) that requires the Engine Output accelerometer.
Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance.
d. Connect the 3-pin female end of the accelerometer
NOTE cable, 29105604, to the accelerometer. Label the 4-pin
male end of cable as #1 ENG or #2 ENG as required.
Accelerometer blocks, 70351-08408-102,
may be permanently installed on each
input module. If these blocks are not CAUTION
installed, either acquire new ones through
the logistic system, or use an L-shaped
accelerometer mounting bracket, Make sure that cables are secured and do
29313000. The blocks, 70351-08408- not interfere with emergency escape routes.
102, are not included in the basic kit, or
To avoid damaging equipment, make sure
the adapter kit.
cables are clear of flight controls, moving
parts and hot fluid lines.
b. An accelerometer block, 70351-08408-102,
should be installed on the input module as shown in Fig-
e. Route the accelerometer cable down along the
ure 2. If the block is installed continue with step c, other-
main gearbox and into the cabin area through the drip
wise continue:
pan. Secure the cables using tie-down straps.
(1) Remove the second nut below the lifting ring f. Place DAU, CADU, and Cable Distribution Unit, in
on the inboard side of the input module (Figure 2). forward cabin area and secure to aircraft using tie-down
rings on the floor. Make the following equipment cable
(2) Install accelerometer bracket, 29313000, on connections (Figures 3 and 4):
the stud with the threaded accelerometer mounting hole
oriented vertically. (1) Connect DAU-to CADU cable to the CADU
receptacle on the DAU (Figure 3).
(3) REINSTALL NUT AND TORQUE TO 260
- 289 INCH-POUNDS. (2) Connect DAU-to-CADU cable to the receptacle
on the CADU. To avoid damage the CADU, place the
NOTE CADU in a protected yet accessible location.

Make sure that the cable connection end of (3) Connect the 28 VDC power cable to the air-
the accelerometer is oriented straight up craft 28 VDC cable power receptacle (STA 293, right
(Figure 2). Incorrect accelerometer orienta- side, cabin ceiling) and then to the 28 VDC receptacle on
tion will not provide representative vibra- the DAU (Figure 3).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 8

(4) Connect the male end of the Cable Distribution

Unit cable to the MULTI-CH receptacle on the DAU (Fig- BLEED−AIR
D
ure 3). Connect the female end of the CDU cable to the FW TUBE
MULTI-CH receptacle on the CDU (Figure 4).
PNEUMATIC
COUPLING
NOTE

SLEEVE
To obtain accurate measurements, make
sure that the #1 Eng and the #2 Eng accel-
erometer cables are connected properly
NUT (TORQUE
45 IN. LBS)
(5) Connect the #1 Eng accelerometer cable to the
ACC 7 receptacle of the Cable Distribution Unit (Figure
4). BLEED−AIR PLUG
FG0492
SA

(6) Connect the 9#2 Eng9 accelerometer cable to

Figure 5. Engine Bleed-Air Plug Installation
the ACC 8 receptacle of the Cable Distribution Unit (Fig-
ure 4). (1) If required, remove plastic nut from optical
sensor and return it to the transport case. The plastic nut is
g. If the Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling not required for this procedure.
Balance task is required as result of a periodic check
where no maintenance was performed on the engine out- (2) Attach optical to output shaft optical sensor
put shaft, and the engine inlet has not been removed for bracket (Figure 6) using 2 screws (MS35206-221 or
another reason, go to step t. equivalent), 4 washers (AN960C4 or equivalent), and 2
nuts (MS21044C04 or equivalent). Torque nuts until they
h. If the engine output shaft vibration is known to are snug; do not over-tighten. The optical sensor housing
exceed the limit, or if maintenance was performed on the is plastic and will be broken if nuts are over- tightened.
engine output shaft, perform step i. through step s. to
install the additional equipment required to perform a NOTE
diaphragm coupling balance on the output shaft.
If optical sensor cable is not attached to the
opposite side of the bracket the optical sen-
i. Remove the engine inlet from the engine(s) that
sor is attached to, the cable could block the
require the diaphragm coupling balance. Refer to appli-
sensor line of sight and cause a measure-
cable maintenance manual for removal procedures.
ment error. Do not attach it to the same
side of the bracket that sensor is attached
j. Plug bleed-air tube with bleed-air plug, to.
29730000, as shown in Figure 5. TORQUE BLEED-
AIR TUBE CLAMP TO 45 INCH-POUNDS. (3) Attach optical sensor cable to opposite side of
bracket the optical sensor is attached to (Figure 6) with
k. Attach optical RPM sensor to output shaft RPM sen- clamp (MS21919WDG4 or equivalent), screw
sor bracket (Figure 6) as follows: (MS35207-264 or equivalent), 2 washers (AN960B10 or
equivalent), and 2 nuts (MS21083N3 or equivalent).

CAUTION
CAUTION

To avoid damaging the optical sensor, do

not over-tighten the nuts/screws that attach To avoid engine FOD, make sure that the
the optical sensor to the output shaft optical two bolts, AN5-5A, that are removed, are
sensor bracket. The optical sensor housing not left on the engine deck after removal.
is plastic and will be broken if nuts are Make sure the bolts are placed in a safe
over- tightened. Only torque nuts until they location for installation after this task is
are snug against the optical sensor. completed.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 9

OPTICAL
RPM SENSOR

SCREW,
WASHERS,
NUT

SCREW,
WASHERS,
CLAMP, NUT

OPTICAL RPM
SENSOR BRACKET

FB3231A
SA

Figure 6. Engine Output Shaft Optical RPM Sensor And Bracket Assembly
NOTE (3) Attach optical sensor bracket to input module
gimbal with 2 bolts (AN5-6A) and 2 washers
(MS9320-1) one washer per bolt. TORQUE BOLTS TO
There are three bolts that can be removed
185 INCH-POUNDS.
to install the optical RPM sensor bracket so
that the optical RPM sensor will have a line
of sight onto the output shaft through the m. Using masking tape label the connector end of the
support tube access hole. Remove the optical RPM sensor as #1 Eng or 9#2 Eng9 as required.
upper two bolts so that when the optical
RPM sensor is installed, the sensor line of
sight is oriented DOWN at a slight angle. CAUTION

l. Install optical RPM sensor and bracket on the air- To avoid damaging equipment, make sure
craft as follows (Figure 7): cables are clear of flight controls, moving
parts, and hot fluid lines.
(1) Identify and remove the upper two AN5-5A
bolts, from the aft, outboard side of the input module n. Route the optical RPM sensor cable down along
gimbal, in front of the output shaft support tube inspection the main gearbox and into the cabin area through the
hole (Figure 7). Place the removed bolts in a safe location drip pan. Secure the cables using tiedown straps.
for reinstallation upon completion of this task.
o. The DAU, CADU, and Cable Distribution Unit
(2) Place the optical shaft optical sensor bracket should already be placed in the forward cabin area.
on the input module gimbal. Position optical sensor Connect the optical RPM sensor(s) to the DAU as follows
bracket such that the line of sight of the sensor is down (Figure 8):
and aft into the forward support tube inspection hole.
Align sensor bracket mount holes with bolt holes in gim- (1) Connect the #1 Eng optical RPM sensor cable
bal. to TACHO 1 on the DAU (Figure 8).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 10

GIMBAL

REFLECTIVE
TAPE

BOLT, WASHER
2
(TORQUE 185 IN. LBS)
B
A A
INPUT
MODULE B
1
A

B
A B
6

OPTICAL RPM
SENSOR BRACKET

FB0632A
SA

Figure 7. Engine Output Shaft Optical RPM Sensor Bracket Installation

(2) Connect the #2 Eng optical RPM sensor cable
to TACHO 2 on the DAU (Figure 8).
When the Diaphragm Coupling balance is
NOTE applicable (hardware kit 70000-30100-
044), balance setscrews are added or sub-
tracted within the six balance locations
If the setscrew balance points were previ- (each containing two balance points).
ously labeled, check to make sure that they
were labeled properly. If the setscrew bal- If reflective tape from a previous balance
ance points are properly labeled, then go evolution is still installed on the shaft then
to step q. If the setscrew balance points are select the balance setscrew location (the
labeled incorrectly, remove the old labels setscrew balance point pair) on which the
and go to step p. tape is centered and label the balance
location as #1.
Make sure that each setscrew balance point
has only one label. (1) Locate the six balance setscrew locations on
the forward flange of the engine output shaft to be bal-
p. Label the output shaft setscrew balance points as anced. Arbitrarily select one balance setscrew location
follows (Figure 9): (one pair of setscrew balance points), and label it as #1
using a black grease pencil.
NOTE (2) Within the balance setscrew location, label the
left setscrew balance point (when viewing the shaft from
To avoid making incorrect balance the aft looking forward) as A and label the right setscrew
setscrew adjustments, make sure that set- balance point as B. Refer to Figure 9.
screw balance points are properly labeled.
Incorrectly labeled setscrew balance points (3) Rotate output shaft 60 degrees in the slip
will provide incorrect adjustments. direction (counterclockwise when viewing the shaft from

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 11

#1 ENGINE
OPTICAL SENSOR CADU CABLE

GREEN POWER
ON LIGHT

DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

NIGHT
DAY TEST

ACC 1 ACC 3 FUSE

TACHO 1 TRACKER
CADU 15 AMP
MODE STROBE

ON

TACHO 2
ACC 2 ACC 4 OFF
TRACKER 1 28VDC POWER
MULTI−CH

#2 ENGINE MULTI−CH CABLE 28 VDC

OPTICAL SENSOR FROM THE CDU POWER CABLE
FG0495
SA

Figure 8. DAU Cable Connections For Engine Output Shaft Stud/Bolt Balance
the aft looking forward) to the next balance setscrew loca-
tion and label as #2. Repeat step (2) and continue on.
When reflective tape is removed, make
(4) Repeat step (2) and step (3) until all six bal- sure all of the old reflective tape is
ance setscrew locations have been labeled properly. removed. If any old reflective tape is left, it
could cause spurious signals that could
(5) Rotate the shaft slowly through a full revolution result in a TACHO error from the test set.
again, making sure that all six balance setscrew locations
are properly labeled. Once all are properly labeled con- q. Inspect the output shaft for reflective tape that was
tinue with step q. installed on a previous balance evolution. If reflective tape
from a previous balance evolution is found and it can be
NOTE used for the present balance, proceed with step s. If
reflective tape from a previous balance evolution is found
The condition of the reflective tape is and it cannot be used for the present balance, then
extremely important for proper system remove the tape and continue on.
operation. Only use previously installed
reflective tape (reflective tape that was NOTE
installed during a previously balance evo-
lution not a previous run), if the tape is Make sure hands are clean before
lined up with the number 919 balance set- handling reflective tape. Try to minimize
screw location and the red light on the back handling the reflective side of tape. If pos-
of the optical RPM sensor illuminates as the sible use hemostats or tweezers to handle
reflective tape is rotated past the optical tape.
RPM sensor line of sight.
After tape has been applied to output shaft,
If TACHO errors are experienced during apply pressure to secure tape using the
measurement, then replace the reflective clean side of the paper backing removed
tape and optical RPM sensor respectively. from the tape.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 12

INPUT
MODULE

REFLECTIVE
A 1 TAPE
GIMBAL
A B
FORWARD
SUPPORT 6 2
TUBE B A
A B

2
B
A A

B
1
B A
A
A

B
A B
A B 5 3
6 SHAFT TO
DIAPHRAGM B A
COUPLING
BOLTS SETSCREW
BALANCE
4
LOCATION
DIRECTION OF SLIP
ENGINE
OUTPUT
SHAFT DIRECTION OF DRIVE

FW VIEW LOOKING FORWARD

D
FQ2199
SA

Figure 9. Labeling Engine Output Shaft Setscrew Locations

with the number 919 balance setscrew loca-
tion then balance setscrew adjustments
If reflective tape becomes dirty, clean lightly may not produce correct results. If the tape
using Isopropyl Alcohol. is not centered on the optical RPM sensor
line of sight then a TACHO error may be
r. Install reflective tape as follows (Figure 11): seen, no phase data (degrees) will be
acquired, and no balance setscrew adjust-
(1) Apply 28 VDC power to the DAU. ment will be available.

(2) Set the DAU power switch to ON (a green light Do not remove the backing material from
should illuminate above DAU power switch). Make sure the reflective tape and adhere the reflective
that all cable connections are made correctly. tape to the output shaft until the proper tape
location has been determined.
(3) Turn the output shaft in the freewheeling direc-
tion (counterclockwise when viewing the shaft from aft (5) Hold a 1 inch by 2 inch piece of reflective tape
looking forward) until the number 919 balance setscrew on the shaft so that the 2 inch side is along the length of
location is seen through the output shaft support tube the shaft (Figure 11). Hold the tape so that the center of
inspection window. the 1 inch long side of the reflective tape is lined up with
the center of the number 919 balance setscrew location ,
(4) Using Isopropyl alcohol, clean an area and the optical RPM sensor line of sight is aimed at the
2-inches wide and 3-inches long on the output shaft that center of the lengthwise dimension of the reflective tape.
is in line with the number 919 balance setscrew location
and in the line of sight of the optical RPM sensor. (6) Verify that the reflective tape is properly
placed by rotating the output shaft until the reflective tape
NOTE passes the optical RPM sensor line of sight. The red light
on the back of the optical RPM sensor should illuminate
Placement of reflective tape is very impor- when the reflective tape is in the optical RPM sensor line
tant. If the tape is not properly lined up of sight.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 13

(7) If the red light does not illuminate then move screw installed in each setscrew balance point. Enter the
the reflective tape forward and then aft on the output shaft type of balance setscrew installed in each balance point
until the red light illuminates. If the red light fails to illu- in the appropriate setscrew Previous Configuration block
minate replace the optical RPM sensor. for the appropriate engine shaft on the Engine Output
Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet (Figure
(8) Once the proper tape location has been deter- 10). See (Figure 42) for an example of how to fill out the
mined, peel the backing off the reflective tape and attach data sheet.
the tape to the output shaft.

(9) Re-check reflective tape alignment by repeat- CAUTION

ing step (6) and step (7) above. Once the tape installation
is complete continue with step s.
To avoid damaging engine, thoroughly
NOTE inspect the doghouse and upper deck area
for any tools or debris which might dam-
Two types of balance setscrews may be age the engine.
installed on an output shaft setscrew bal-
ance location. The PL565A428H4 part t. Inspect doghouse and upper deck area of the air-
number is a steel balance setscrew and the craft prior to the ground run for FOD.
70361-08700-101 part number is a tita-
nium balance setscrew. u. Complete engine output shaft diaphragm coupling
balance measurements. Refer to Engine Output Shaft Dia-
s. Inspect the balance setscrews on the output shaft phragm Coupling Balance, Vibration Measurement
that is being balanced and note the type of balance set- (PARA 19).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 14

AIRCRAFT: DATA:
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE DATA SHEET
(ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.50 IPS OR LESS AT FLAT PITCH, 100% Nr)

SETSCREW BALANCE LOCATION

ENGINE OUTPUT
RUN AMP PHASE
(IPS) (DEG) 1 2 3 4 5 6 SHAFT
A B A B A B A B A B A B #1 #2
PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION

CHANGE REQUIRED

NEW CONFIGURATION

PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION

CHANGE REQUIRED

NEW CONFIGURATION

PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION

CHANGE REQUIRED

NEW CONFIGURATION

PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION

CHANGE REQUIRED

NEW CONFIGURATION

NOTES 1 REFLECTIVE
VIEW TAPE
1. WHEN PERFORMING BALANCE SETSCREW ADJUSTMENTS, LOOKING
DO NOT LOOSEN OR REMOVE THE BOLTS SECURING THE FORWARD
A B
DIAPHRAGM COUPLING TO THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT.
6 2
2. BALANCE SETSCREWS MAY BE RE−USED ONCE ONLY OR B A
A MAXIMUM OF 2 INSTALLS. IF IT IS UKNOWN WHETHER A
BALANCE SETSCREW HAS BEEN PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED, A B
DISCARD AND UTILIZE NEW HARDWARE.

3. INSTALLATION HEIGHT OF THE BALANCE SETSCREWS ABOVE

THE SURFACE OF THE OUTPUT SHAFT FLANGE SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE FOLLOWING LIMITS: B A
FOR TITANIUM (70361−08700−101), MAX PROTRUSION IS 0.070".
FOR STEEL (PL565A428H4), MAX PROTRUSION IS 0.050". A B
5 3
IF LIMITS ARE EXCEEDED, REPLACE THE BALANCE SETSCREW. SHAFT TO
DIAPHRAGM B A
4. TORQUE THE BALANCE SETSCREWS TO 35 INCH−POUNDS. COUPLING
BOLTS SETSCREW
BALANCE
4
TITANIUM SETSCREW LOCATION
STEEL SETSCREW
70361−08700−101 DIRECTION OF SLIP
PL565A428H4
DIRECTION OF DRIVE

ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT

DIAPHRAGM
THREAD = 1/4" − 28 THREAD = 1/4" − 28 COUPLING /
6
LENGHT = 0.250" LENGHT = 0.250" INTEGRAL
2" LONG X 1" WIDE A
B FLANGE
CADMIUM PLATED "Hi−Kote" COATING REFLECTIVE TAPE B

WT Grams = 0.953 WT Grams = 0.560

A
1
INTERNAL INTERNAL B
WRENCHING WRENCHING
SIZE = 0.125" SIZE = 0.096
SELF GREEN SELF GREEN A
LOCKING "POLY− LOCKING "POLY− B BALANCE LOCATIONS
2
FEATURE = LOCK" FEATURE = LOCK" (SETSCREWS
INSTALLED PER WP)
*GREEN PRIMER ON TIP
FB0396
SA

Figure 10. Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 15

INPUT MODULE

DIAPHRAGM
COUPLING

OUTPUT
SHAFT

FORWARD
SUPPORT
TUBE
2
A B
DRIVE
B

1 B
A

SLIP
B
A
6
A B

GIMBAL

REFLECTIVE
TAPE

LEFT (NO. 1) SIDE

DIAPHIRAGM FWD FWD DIAPHIRAGM

COUPLING / COUPLING /
INTEGRAL INTEGRAL
FLANGE FLANGE

2" LONG X 1" WIDE 2" LONG X 1" WIDE

2 REFLECTIVE TAPE REFLECTIVE TAPE 6
B A
A B
A B

B A
1 1
A B

B A
A B
6 2

BALANCE LOCATIONS BALANCE LOCATIONS

(SET SCREWS (SET SCREWS
INSTALLED PER WP) INSTALLED PER WP)
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT

LEFT (NO. 1) SIDE RIGHT (NO. 2) SIDE

FQ2200
SA

Figure 11. Engine Output Shaft Reflective Tape Installation for Balance Setscrew Configuration

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 16

S−70i 53 ENG INDX 12−NOV−10

1engck done
#1bal
2engck
#2bal

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

F1 F2 F3 F4 IM0440
SA

Figure 12. Measurement Selection Window After Successful Data Measurement

7. ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COU- only to determine if vibration is acceptable.
PLING BALANCE, VIBRATION MEASUREMENT. If you did not install the optical RPM sensor
bracket(s), only the 1engck and 2engck test
NOTE states can be measured. Balance setscrew
adjustments cannot be determined from the
The engine that is being measured must be 1engck and 2engck measurements. If
running the main rotor at 100% Nr for a vibration exceeds the limit the optical RPM
minimum of five (5) minutes before mea- sensor bracket(s) must be installed and the
suring data. This 5 minutes wait period is other two test states (#1 bal and #2 bal)
required to allow engine output shaft vibra- must be measured.
tion to stabilize. If the 5 minutes wait period
is not observed, measurements may not The #1 bal and #2 bal are the required
provide the correct results. measurements to determine balance
setscrew adjustments. The optical RPM sen-
Keystrokes on the CADU are identified by sor bracket(s) must be installed to perform
the use of bold print. the #1 bal and #2 bal measurements.
Measured vibration is compared to the
This procedure will measure engine output acceptance limit, and if the measurement
shaft 1/rev vibration and compare the exceeds the limit then the balance setscrew
vibration amplitude against the acceptance adjustment can be obtained through the
limit. Four (4) test states are programmed diagnostics.
into the test set for this purpose. Two test
states are programmed for the #1 engine An output shaft must be balanced if any
and two are programmed for the #2 one of the four balance measurements
engine. exceeds the acceptance limit.

This procedure can be completed on one If problems are encountered with the equip-
or both engines. If the task is being com- ment that are not addressed in this docu-
pleted on both engines only one engine can ment, then refer to the Operation And
be run at one time. Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
instruction.
The 1engck and 2engck test states are pro-
vided to measure the #1 engine and #2 If you are instructed to reboot the CADU or
engine output shaft vibration without opti- the CADU appears to be stuck in a particu-
cal RPM sensor data. These test states mea- lar operation then refer to Software/Data
sure vibration amplitude only and are used Management Instructions (WP 010 00).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 17

a. Make sure that test equipment is properly installed c. Get the copy of the Engine Output Shaft
according to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet (Figure 10) that
Balance, Test Equipment Installation (PARA 18). has been used for this output shaft diaphragm coupling
balance evolution.
b. Make sure the CADU is on the aircraft and
plugged into the DAU via the CADU-to-DAU cable.

Action

Continue These Test States

Save and Exit have not yet been
Abandon Flight measured:−
(No Data Collected)

#1bal
2engck
#2bal

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FB2386A
SA

Figure 13. Action Menu

NOTE screen after holding the CTRST key for 30
seconds, the CADU batteries are low on
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You charge. Plug the CADU into the battery
must use the arrow keys (s, d, g, and f) charger, 29315000, or plug the CADU
to highlight (area with dark background into a powered up DAU and repeat the
and light letters) the desired option then procedure.
press DO to select the option. If the wrong
option is highlighted by mistake, press The following section can be completed on
QUIT to go back to the main menu. the CADU at anytime prior to the ground
run without the CADU being connected to
If nothing appears on the CADU screen or powered by the DAU. It is recommended
when the CADU is turned on, the screen that the CADU be powered with the AC
contrast may be set improperly or the adapter, 29315000, whenever using the
CADU batteries are low on charge. Adjust CADU alone to prevent running down the
the screen contrast by pressing and hold- CADU batteries. CADU batteries automati-
ing the CTRST key on the CADU and cally recharge when plugged into the DAU
monitoring the CADU screen. Release the and the DAU is powered with 28 VDC.
CTRST key when the screen becomes
clear. The screen contrast key uses a rolling
adjustment approach, if the CTRST key is d. Prepare the CADU to measure data by performing
released too late, continue press and hold the following:
the CTRST key until the desired contrast is
seen again. If nothing is seen on the CADU (1) Turn the CADU on by pressing the ON key.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 18

is not on the CADU, upload the correct air-

craft setup file to the CADU. Refer to Soft-
SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL ware Setup Instructions (WP 009 00). If the
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20 proper software cannot be located, contact
12−NOV−10 14:02:36 a Sikorsky Aircraft or GE Aviation Systems
representative.
Aircraft Type ?
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ? (3) Check the main menu on the CADU (Figure
Flight I.D. ? 14) to make sure that the date and time are correct. If the
date and/or time is incorrect, refer to Software Setup
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item Instructions (WP 009 00), and reset the time and/or date.

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

Aircraft Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit
IM1462
SA 70iCEF
Figure 14. Main Menu FFT
S−70B
NOTE
S−70i

If the test set was left in the measurement S−80M

mode (Figure 12), press QUIT, to exit the
measurement mode, until the Action menu
is seen (Figure 13), If data was measured
or the user is not certain if data was mea-
sured, highlight Save and exit, press DO, IM10441
to exit the measurement mode, and press SA

QUIT to get back to the main menu. If no Figure 15. Aircraft Types Menu
data was measured, highlight Abandon
Flight, press DO press s or g until Yes is (4) From the main menu (Figure 14), press the d
seen next to Continue, and press DO to get or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.
back to the main menu.
NOTE
This procedure may not provide the correct
results if the incorrect software version is This procedure may not provide the correct
used. Verify that the software version on results if the incorrect aircraft software ver-
CADU corresponds with the version cov- sion is used. The aircraft version number is
ered by this manual. Refer to the INTRO- part of the aircraft type title. Refer to Intro-
DUCTION (WP 002 00), for proper soft- duction (WP 002 00), for proper software
ware designation. If the proper software is designation. If the proper aircraft software
not on the CADU, then contact a Sikorsky is not on the CADU, upload the correct air-
Aircraft or GE Aviation Systems represen- craft setup file to the CADU. Refer to Soft-
tative. ware Setup Instructions (WP 009 00). If the
proper aircraft software can not be located
(2) Press QUIT until the Main Menu is seen (Fig- then contact a Sikorsky Aircraft or GE
ure 14). Aviation Systems representative.

NOTE The aircraft setup file with the 9S-70i9 air-

craft type should be used for aircraft con-
This procedure may not provide the correct figurations without external tanks installed.
results if the incorrect aircraft software ver- The aircraft setup file with the 970iCEF9 air-
sion is used. The aircraft version number is craft type should be used for aircraft con-
part of the aircraft type title. Refer to Intro- figurations with external tanks installed.
duction (WP 002 00) for proper software The DCENGBAL flight plans for the 9S-70i9
designation. If the proper aircraft software and 970iCEF9 aircraft types are identical.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 19

For consistency use the aircraft type and (10) From the main menu (Figure 19), press the d
version that applies to the configuration or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.
being used for the engine output shaft bal-
ance procedure. (11) From The Flight Plans menu (Figure 18), press
the d or f keys to highlight 9DCENGBAL9 and press
(5) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 15), DO.
press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and
version 1.0 or 1.0EPP whichever is applicable, and press
DO. Entry Form

Please enter a new tail number

for the aircraft type S−70i :
Select Tail Number PAGE 1 OF 1

Tail No? 53
51
52
NEW [F1] & [F2] Scrolls thru character set
[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Arrows : Move Cursor
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line IM0442

SA
[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Tail No [QUIT] Exit Figure 17. Tail Number Entry
FG0457
SA
(12) From the main menu, make sure that the Air-
Figure 16. Select Tail Number Menu craft Type, Tail Number, and Flight Plan are properly
specified (Figure 19). Repeat step 4 through step 11 until
all required menu items are properly specified.
(6) From the main menu (Figure 19), press the d
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO. NOTE

(7) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 16), The Flight I.D. does not exist prior to mea-
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num- suring data. Flight I.D identifies previously
ber and press DO, continue with step (10). If the desired measured data that is stored in memory. A
tail number is not listed then continue with step 8. new flight ID is automatically created each
time F1 (MEASURE) is pressed and data is
(8) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 16), stored.
press the d or f keys to highlight NEW and press DO.
The test set automatically checks memory to
NOTE make sure that there is enough room to
store all of the data that can be measured
by the selected flight plan. If the CADU
Numbers can be entered using the numeric
indicates that insufficient memory exists,
keypad on the CADU. Alphanumeric char-
download data from the CADU to a PC,
acters can be input by using the F1 and F2
delete data from the CADU, and compress
keys. The F1 and F2 keys allows you to
the CADU memory. Refer to Software Setup
scroll through the available characters.
Instructions (WP 009 00).
When the desired character is seen, press
the g arrow key to move to the next block. (13) From the main menu (Figure 19), press F1
(MEASURE) to enter the measurement mode (Figure 20).
(9) From the Entry Form display (Figure 17), enter
the complete tail number of the aircraft. Up to seven digits (14) From the Measurement Selection Window
can be entered for the tail number. Press DO when tail (Figure 20), press F4 until LMT ON is seen above the F4
number entry is complete. key.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 20

Flight Plans DO−Select QUIT−Exit

BAL TAIL
DCENG BAL
FLT CHK
GRND BAL
GRND TRK
OIL COOL

IM0824
SA

Figure 18. Flight Plans Menu

NOTE
Careful inspection of the doghouse and
28 VDC power must be available at the upper deck must be done prior to the
DAU, and the CADU must be connected to ground run for any debris which might
the DAU to proceed any farther with this damage the engine.
procedure.
Precautions against fire should be taken.
You may view a brief setup description by Aircraft engine fire extinguisher effective-
pressing F3 (SETUP). Procedure references, ness is reduced with the inlets removed.
cable connections, and general procedure Ground support fire bottle must be avail-
is provided in the SETUP section. able.

NOTE
e. On the DAU, set the DAU power switch to the ON
position. Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling
Balance vibration data must be measured
f. On the CADU, press LAMP to turn the CADU with only the engine that is being measured
screen back-light on. driving the rotor at 100% Nr. If the second
engine is to be measured also, start the
second engine, shut down the first engine
CAUTION and repeat the procedure.

The engine that is being measured must be

If the aircraft is run with the engine inlets driving the rotor head at 100% Nr for a
removed, observe the following restrictions: minimum of (5) minutes before measuring
data.
The main rotor collective pitch must not g. With a qualified pilot at the controls start the
be increased above flat pitch. engine that is to be checked and run helicopter at flat
pitch, 100% Nr rotor speed, with the pedals centered.
Each ground run should be limited to 10
minutes per engine with a normal (2 min- h. Shut down the second engine if applicable. Only
utes) cool down, if required, prior to shut- the engine that is being measured should be running
down. when measurements are being taken.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 21

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:03:45

Aircraft Type S−70i

Tail Number 53
Flight Plan DCENG BAL
Flight I.D. ?

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1026
SA

Figure 19. Completed Main Menu

NOTE the #1engck and/or #2engck test states
prior to shutting the aircraft down to
If the optical RPM sensor bracket(s) is not acquire amplitude data to determine if
installed, measure the 1engck test state to shaft vibration is acceptable.
measure vibration amplitude on #1 engine
or measure 2engck test state to measure You may exit the measurement selection
vibration amplitude on #2 engine. These window (Figure 20) at any time by press-
test states will measure the engine output ing QUIT. If you wish to save the data that
shaft 1/rev vibration amplitude only and was measured, then from the Action menu
can be used to determine if vibration is (Figure 29), highlight Save and Exit and
within the limit. If vibration exceeds the limit press DO. If no data was measured or the
the engine inlets must be removed, optical data is not to be stored, from the Action
RPM sensors must be installed, and the bal- menu, highlight Abandon Flight, press DO,
ance test states (#1 bal and #2 bal) must press g key until Yes is seen next to Con-
be measured to obtain balance adjust- tinue?, and press DO.
ments.
i. If the optical RPM sensor brackets are not installed,
If the optical RPM sensor brackets are from the Measurement Selection Window (Figure 20),
installed, measure the #1 bal and #2 bal highlight the 1engck test state, if #1 Engine is being mea-
test states to measure vibration amplitude sured, or highlight the 2engck test state if #2 Engine is
and phase. These test states will measure being measured, continue with step k.
both amplitude and phase data so that an
output shaft balance setscrew adjustment j. If the optical RPM sensor brackets are installed,
can be calculated if the vibration amplitude from the Measurement Selection Window (Figure 4),
exceeds the acceptance limit. If a persistent highlight the #1 bal test state if #1 Engine is being mea-
TACHO error is encountered for either the sured or highlight the #2 bal test state if #2 Engine is
#1 bal and/or #2 bal test state measure being measured, continue on.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 22

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12−NOV−10

1engck
#1bal
2engck
#2bal

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1027
SA

Figure 20. Measurement Selection Window

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12−NOV−10

1engck
#1bal
2engck
#2bal

* #1 ENG 100% Nr − #2 ENG OFF

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON
IM1028
SA

Figure 21. Measurement Initiation

vibration to stabilize. If the five minutes
CAUTION wait period is not observed, measurements
may not provide the correct results, result-
ing in excessive runs and maintenance to
The engine that is being measured must be complete this task.
running the rotor at 100% Nr for a mini-
mum of five minutes before measuring k. Make sure that the engine is being checked has
data. This five minutes wait period is been running the rotor at 100% Nr for a minimum of five
required to allow the engine output shaft minutes before beginning data measurement.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 23

NOTE DAU is ready an asterisk mark will be seen at the start of

the measurement prompt (Figure 21).
The CADU and DAU power must be on for
a minimum of 20 seconds before proceed- m. Make sure the aircraft is at a steady flat pitch,
ing any further with this procedure. If a 100% Nr, Pedals centered, for five (5) minutes, with only
measurement is tried before the 20 second the engine being checked running. Press the DO key to
wait period, an error will be noted. Clear start the measurement. As the measurement is being
the error by pressing QUIT, wait 20 sec- taken, a measurement screen will be displayed (Figure
onds then retry the measurement. 22).

NOTE
If an error message is displayed on the
CADU screen, write down the error and
If a tachometer error is noted when mea-
the recommended troubleshooting steps,
suring any of the balance data points that
press QUIT to clear the error, perform the
require the optical RPM sensor retry the test
first recommended troubleshooting step,
state several times. If problems persist then
and repeat the measurement. Repeat this
measure the data points that do not require
process until all recommended
the RPM optical RPM sensor (1engck or
troubleshooting steps have been taken. If
2engck) and continue with the procedure.
problems persist then go to the Operation
And Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for n. When the measurement is complete and the test
troubleshooting. set is processing the data, the screen shown in Figure 23
will be seen. Do not press any keys at this time, wait until
If an error is seen on the CADU screen that the CADU screen prompts for a user input.
does not provide troubleshooting steps,
press QUIT to clear the error, and retry the o. If limit checking was turned on prior to the mea-
measurement. If the same error persists, surement, then continue on, otherwise go to step p.
reboot the CADU (WP 010 00), toggle the
DAU power switch off and then on again NOTE
(this reboots the DAU), wait 20 seconds,
and retry the measurement. If problems If an error was encountered during mea-
persist then replace the CADU-to-DAU surement then 9?9 will be seen under MEA-
cable, the DAU and the CADU respectively. SURED on the LIMITS display.
Retry the measurement after each compo-
The ALL LIMITS display allows you to view
nent is replaced.
the measured vibration amplitude if the
vibration is within the limit. The vibration
If a Communications Failure (Error 8199)
amplitude is not displayed on the LIMITS
or a CADU-DAU Comms Failure (Error
screen if the measurement is within the
32756) is noted and all of the on-screen
limit.
troubleshooting has failed, disconnect the
tracker cable and retry the measurement (1) If limit checking was turned on prior to the
(Shorted tracker cables have resulted in measurement, then one of two LIMITS displays will be
communication errors). If the measurement seen. If all measurements are within the acceptance limit
worked after the tracker cable was discon- then a LIMITS display similar to the one shown in Figure
nected, then replace the tracker cable. If 25 will be seen. If the measurement exceeded the accep-
the problem remained or the tracker cable tance limit then the LIMITS display similar to the one
was not connected, replace the DAU-to- shown in Figure 24 will be seen.
CADU cable, the DAU, and the CADU in
that order. Retry the measurement after (2) Enter the measured ips level on the Engine
each component is replaced. Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet
(Figure 10). If the measurements are within limits (the LIM-
l. Once the correct test state is highlighted, press DO. ITS display shown in Figure 25 is seen), then press the d
This prepares the DAU for the measurement. When the arrow key to see the ALL LIMITS screen (Figure 26).

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 24

MEASURING

Tachometer Freq (RPM) : 30000

Flight Plan : DCENGBAL

Test State : 1engck

Acquisition No. : 01 of 01

Measuring

FB0110
SA

Figure 22. Measurement Screen

Processing Data . . .

* * * Pilot Transition * * *

Next Test State: #1bal

Standby . . . While data is loading

FB0225
SA

Figure 23. Data Processing Screen

(3) Exit the LIMITS or ALL LIMITS display by press- with a measurement attempt between each
ing QUIT until the measurement selection window (Figure action.
28) is seen. Continue with step p.
If the #1 bal or #2 bal measurement can-
not be taken due to TACHO errors (optical
NOTE
RPM sensor errors), measure the 1engck
and/or 2engck, and proceed with step r of
If the test set measured data successfully this procedure.
then 9done9 will be seen next to the test
state on the measurement selection p. If data was successfully measured and 9done9 is
window. If an error was encountered dur- seen next to the test state (Figure 28), then continue on. If
ing measurement then 9failed9 will be seen an error was experienced and data was not measured
next to the test state. NO data exists for then repeat the measurement.
any test state with 9failed9 next to it. If
9failed9 is seen then repeat the measure- q. If all measurements have been completed for the
ment before performing recommended engine being measured and the second engine needs to
troubleshooting as displayed on CADU be measured then repeat this procedure starting at step g.
screen. If errors persist then begin perform- If all required vibration measurements have been com-
ing troubleshooting actions one at a time pleted then continue with step r.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 25

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
1engck #1 Shaft 1/Rev 0.50 1.19 ips

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All

IM1029
SA

Figure 24. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Exceeds Limits)

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Measurements are within specified limits

Press QUIT to return to MEASUREMENT menu

Press UP to view all limits

IM1003
SA

Figure 25. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within Limits)

NOTE s. From the Action menu (Figure 29) highlight Save
and Exit and press DO.
If data was measured at all four test states, NOTE
the Finish menu will be seen. If you wish to
exit the measurement mode, highlight Fin- If it is known that the vibration exceeds the
ish, press DO and continue with step u. acceptance limit and balance measure-
ments were taken, from the End of Flight
If data was measured at all four test states, menu (Figure 27) highlight Diagnostics,
the Finish menu will be seen. If you wish to press DO, and go to Engine Output Shaft
stay in the measurement mode, highlight Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Corrective
Continue, press DO, and continue with Actions (PARA 21), and start with step f.
step p.
t. From the End of Flight menu (Figure 27), highlight
Main Menu and press DO.
r. From the Measurement Selection Window (Figure
28), press QUIT to exit the measurement mode. u. Shut down the aircraft.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 26

ALL LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
1engck #1 Shaft 1/Rev 0.50 0.28 ips

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle Exc’d

IM1030
SA

Figure 26. 9ALL LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within Limits)

End of Flight

Diagnostics
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0513
SA

Figure 27. End Of Flight Menu

v. If data was successfully measured and the Engine Engine Output Shaft 1/rev vibration level is 0.50 ips or
Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet less for a shaft, the Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Cou-
was not filled out, then refer to Engine Output Shaft Dia- pling Balance task is complete for that engine. If vibration
phragm Coupling Balance, Recalling Data (PARA 20), is acceptable, perform step y.
and fill out the data sheet. If the data sheet was filled out
previously then continue on. y. Perform the following:

(1) Perform applicable torque verifications (Heli-

w. Press OFF to turn the CADU off.
copter Maintenance Manual).

x. IF ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT 1/REV VIBRA- (2) Make a task completion logbook entry and
TION LEVEL IS GREATER THAN 2.00 ips GO TO indicate any necessary torque stabilization verifications
PT 4 IN THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT required by applicable maintenance procedures (Helicop-
DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE ter Maintenance Manual).
TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART (Figure 44).
IF ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT 1/REV VIBRATION (3) Remove all test equipment, refer to Engine
LEVEL IS GREATER THAN 0.50 ips AND LESS Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Test Equip-
THAN OR EQUAL TO 2.00 ips GO TO STEP Z. If ment Removal (PARA 23).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 27

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12−NOV−10

1engck done
#1bal
2engck
#2bal

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1031
SA

Figure 28. Measurement Selection Window After Successful Data Measurement

Action

Continue These Test States

Save and Exit have not yet been
Abandon Flight measured:−
(No Data Collected)

#1bal
2engck
#2bal

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FB0325
SA

Figure 29. Action Menu

z. If the Engine Output Shaft 1/rev vibration level is ing (rather than decreasing), go to PT 1 in the Engine
greater than 0.50 ips and is less than or equal to 2.00 ips Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Troubleshoot-
for a shaft and the #1 bal or #2 bal test state was mea- ing Flowchart (Figure 44). If vibration amplitudes are
sured for that engine shaft, continue the procedure for decreasing as expected or this is the first measurement,
that shaft. continue this procedure for that shaft.

(1) Compare the most recent data to the previous (2) If more than three sets of balance setscrew
data for each shaft that exceeded 0.50 ips and less than adjustments (four runs) have been made on the shaft, go
2.00 ips. If the vibration amplitude appears to be increas- to PT 2 in the Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 28

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−00 14:29:41

Aircraft Type S−70i

Tail Number 53
Flight Plan DCENG BAL
Flight I.D. 12−NOV−10 at 14:11

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1032
SA

Figure 30. Main Menu With Selected Flight I.D.

Select Flight ID PAGE 1 OF 1

S−70i 53 DCENG BAL 12 NOV 10 14:11

S−70i 53 DCENG BAL 12 NOV 10 13:05
S−70i 53 DCENG BAL 12 NOV 10 11:00

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Flight [QUIT] Exit

IM1033
SA

Figure 31. 9Select Flight I.D.9 Menu

Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Figure 44). If three or aa. If the engine output shaft 1/rev vibration level is
less balance setscrew adjustments have been made on the greater than 0.50 ips and is less than or equal to 2.00 ips
shaft, continue this procedure for that shaft. on the shaft, and only the 1engck or 2engck test state was
measured for that shaft, install the optical RPM sensor for
(3) Determine the required balance setscrew that shaft. Refer to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Cou-
adjustments. Refer to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm pling Balance, Test Equipment Installation (PARA 18), and
Coupling Balance, Corrective Actions (PARA 21), for that repeat engine output shaft data measurement for that
shaft.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 29

shaft. Refer to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling and a list of all Flight I.D.’s presently stored
Balance, Vibration Measurement (PARA 19). on the CADU will be displayed.

8. ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COU- (1) From the main menu (Figure 30), press the d
PLING BALANCE, RECALLING DATA. or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.

NOTE (2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 15),

press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and
If the CADU is being operated on internal version 1.0 or 1.0EPP whichever is applicable and press
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU DO.
or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
indicates low power (internal batteries (3) From the main menu (Figure 30), press the d
require charging), perform one of the fol- or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
into the DAU using the CADU-to- DAU
(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 16),
cable and turn DAU power on. A second
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
method is to plug the CADU battery
ber and press DO.
charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
receptacle and plug the probe end of the
battery charger into the CADU. The CADU (5) From the main menu (Figure 30), press the d
battery charger receptacle is located under or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.
the credit card access panel on top of the
CADU. (6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 18), press
the d or f keys to highlight 9DCENGBAL9 and press
a. Get the copy of the Engine Output Shaft DO.
Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet (Figure 10) that
was previously started for this balance evolution. If a data (7) From the main menu (Figure 30), press the d
sheet has not been started for this balance evolution yet, or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.
obtain a copy before proceeding with step b.
NOTE

CAUTION Data is stored in memory with the most

recent data at the top of the list. If the most
recent data is being recalled then simply
Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type, select the first flight id.
Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. are
specified prior to recalling data. If the
(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 31),
wrong parameter is specified before recall-
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
ing data, incorrect data will be recalled.
press DO.
b. From the main menu (Figure 30), make sure that
the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. c. With the correct Flight I.D. specified on the main
are correctly specified. If all of the parameters are cor- menu (Figure 30), press F2 (DISPLAY).
rect, go to step c, otherwise continue on:
d. From the Display Mode menu (Figure 32), high-
NOTE light Summary Displays and press DO.

You should change only the parameters e. If data was measured at either the #1 bal or #2
that are improperly specified. bal test state, perform the following, otherwise continue
with step f.
To view all of the flight I.D.’s stored on the
CADU, highlight Aircraft Type and press (1) From the Select Summary Displays menu (Fig-
QUIT to change all main menu items to ure 34), highlight #1 & #2 ENGINE 1/REV BALANCE
9?9. Highlight Flight I.D. and press DO, DATA and press DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 30

Display Mode

One Test State

Complete Flight
Trend Flights
View Limits
Summary Displays

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FG0516
SA

Figure 32. 9Display Mode9 Menu

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL
FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
SYNCHRONOUS VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
ENGINE 1 / REV BALANCE DATA (ips / deg)
STATE #1_ENG deg #2_ENG deg
1engck ? ? ? ?
#1 bal 1.17 100 ? ?
2engck ? ? ? ?
#2 bal ? ? 0.44 34

Enter these values on the data sheet.

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit IM1034
SA

Figure 33. Engine Output Shaft Balance Data Summary Display Page
(2) From the balance data summary display page sheet with the appropriate data (see Figure 42, for an
(Figure 33), enter the vibration amplitude and phase data example of how to fill out data sheet).
for each shaft measured in the appropriate block on the
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data (3) From the vibration data summary display page
Sheet (Figure 42). (Figure 35), press QUIT once. The Select Summary Dis-
plays menu (Figure 34) will be seen.
(3) Press QUIT until the main menu (Figure 30) is
seen, continue with step g. (4) If data is required for the second engine,
repeat step (1) through step (3) above for the second
f. If data was measured at either the 1engck or
engine.
2engck test state, perform the following:

(1) From the Select Summary Displays menu (Fig- (5) Once all required data is entered on the data
ure 34), highlight either #1 ENGINE 1/REV VIBRATION sheet, press QUIT three times to return to the main menu
DATA or #2 ENGINE 1/REV VIBRATION DATA, which- (Figure 30).
ever is applicable, and press DO.
g. Return to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Cou-
(2) From the display page (Figure 35) enter the pling Balance, Vibration Measurement (PARA 19), and
vibration amplitude in the Amp (ips) block on the data continue procedure with step w.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 31

9. ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COU- COUPLING BALANCE TROUBLESHOOTING

PLING BALANCE, CORRECTIVE ACTIONS. FLOWCHART (Figure 44), If the engine output shaft
diaphragm coupling balance vibration level is greater
NOTE than 0.50 ips but less than or equal to 2.00 ips continue
with this procedure. If the vibration level is 0.50 ips or
Complete this corrective action procedure less at all test states then this task is complete. Remove
if any of the Engine Output Shaft vibration test equipment from the aircraft, refer to Engine
Diaphragm Coupling Balance vibration Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Test Equip-
measurements exceeded 0.50 ips. ment Removal (PARA 23).

When the Diaphragm Coupling balance is NOTE

applicable (hardware kit 70000-30100-
044), balance setscrews are added or sub- Make sure that the type, quantity, and
tracted within the six balance locations location of the balance setscrews currently
(each containing two balance points). installed on the output shaft is known and
entered on the Previous Configuration
This correction procedure uses the vibra- block on the Engine Output Shaft
tion and phase data measured in the Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet
Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling for each engine (see Figure 42 for an
Balance procedure and determines correc- example of how to fill out the data sheet).
tive actions to reduce the vibration to within
the acceptance limit. The measurements If the CADU is being operated on internal
that must be acquired are the #1 bal batteries (It is disconnected from the DAU
and/or #2 bal measurements. The primary or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
balance adjustment used to reduce Engine indicated low power (internal batteries
Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance require charging) perform one of the fol-
1/Rev Vibration is the balance setscrew lowing: One method is to plug the CADU
adjustment. If the #1 bal and/or #2 bal into the DAU using the CADU-to-DAU
measurements were not made, then bal- cable and turn DAU power on, a second
ance setscrew adjustments can not be cal- method is to plug the CADU battery
culated by the test set. charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
receptacle and plug the probe end of the
If the 1engck or 2engck test states (vibra- battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
tion amplitude only measurements) were battery charger receptacle is located under
the only measurements made then this cor- the credit card access panel on top of the
rective action procedure can not be com- CADU.
pleted. You must install the optical RPM
sensors on the applicable Engine Output b. Get the copy of the Engine Output Shaft
Shaft (refer to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet (Figure 10 that
Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Test Equip- has the type and quantity of previously installed balance
ment Installation, PARA 18). setscrews entered on it.

Other maintenance will be recommended c. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power
on the engine output shaft system, if it is on.
determined that the balance setscrews
required to balance the shaft exceeds the
maximum allowable numbers of setscrews CAUTION
that can be installed, or if balance setscrew
adjustment does not provide the proper
vibration reduction. Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type,
Tail Number, Flight Plan, Flight I.D. are
a. IF ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT 1/REV VIBRA- specified prior to running diagnostics. If
TION LEVEL IS GREATER THAN 2.0 ips GO TO PT incorrect Flight I.D. is specified, the diag-
4 IN THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM nostics will call out incorrect adjustments

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 32

Select Summary Display PAGE 1 OF 1

#1 & #2 ENGINE 1/REV BALANCE DATA

#1 ENGINE 1/REV VIBRATION DATA
#2 ENGINE 1/REV VIBRATION DATA
PRINT ALL DISPLAYS

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Display [QUIT] Exit

FB2409
SA

Figure 34. 9Select Summary Display9 Menu

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL
FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
PEAK VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
STATE CHAN AMP(ips) FREQ(rpm)
ENGINE 1 / Rev VIBRATION DATA
1engck #1_ENG 1.190 20925.00

Enter this value on the data sheet.

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

IM1035
SA

Figure 35. Engine Output Shaft Vibration Data Summary Display Page
d. From the main menu (Figure 14), make sure that (2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 15),
the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and
are correctly specified. If all of the main menu parameters version 1.0 or 1.0EPP whichever is applicable, and press
are correct, go to step e, otherwise continue on. DO.

NOTE (3) From the main menu (Figure 14), press the d
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.
You should change only the parameters
that are improperly specified.
(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 16),
To view all of the flight I.D.’s stored on the press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
CADU, highlight Aircraft Type and press ber and press DO.
QUIT to change all main menu items to
9?9. Highlight Flight I.D. and press DO, (5) From the main menu (Figure 14), press the d
and a list of all Flight I.D.’s presently stored or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.
on the CADU will be displayed.
(6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 18), press
(1) From the main menu (Figure 14), press the d the d or f keys to highlight 9DCENGBAL9 and press
or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 33

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
1 engck #1 SHAFT 1/REV 0.50 ? ips
#1 bal #1 SHAFT 1/REV 0.50 1.17 ips
2 engck #2 SHAFT 1/REV 0.50 ? ips
#2 bal #2 SHAFT 1/REV 0.50 0.44 ips

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All

IM1036
SA

Figure 36. 9LIMITS9 Screen in Diagnostics, Engine Output Shaft Vibration Exceeds Limit
(7) From the main menu (Figure 19), press the d
or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.
The LIMITS display will show you what
NOTE measurements exceeded the limit and what
measurements were not taken. Any mea-
Data is stored in memory with the most surement that was measured and is within
recent data at the top of the list. If the most limits will not be shown. To see all of the
recent data is being recalled then simply measurements compared to the
select the first flight id. programmed limit, press the d key and the
ALL LIMITS display will be shown.
(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 31),
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and f. The limit display should be seen on the CADU (Fig-
press DO. ure 36). From the LIMITS screen press DO to continue.

e. With the correct Flight I.D. selected (Figure 30),

CAUTION
press the F3 key to execute the diagnostics.

NOTE The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screens

(Figure 37) identify the type, quantity and
If the LIMITS display indicates that location of balance setscrews that were
Measurement are within Specified Limits or previously installed on each engine output
the MEASURED ips level is less than the shaft. Do not mistake these values for the
LIMIT value then vibration is acceptable adjustments that need to be made. The
and no corrective action is necessary. adjustments need to be made will be dis-
Complete this procedure to exit the diag- played on THE 9CORRECTIONS FOR9
nostic mode, however, no adjustments are screen (Figure 38).
required.
Make sure that the current configuration
In the LIMITS display , a 9?9 indicates that screens are properly specified. Incorrectly
data was not measured at that test state. specified current configuration screens may

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 34

provide an incorrect balance setscrew (3) Repeat step 1 through step 2 above until all
adjustment, or may result in unnecessary previously installed balance setscrews are properly
maintenance. entered on CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen. Once
all values are correct then continue with step h.
NOTE
h. Once the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screens
The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen are properly specified (Figure 37), press DO to start
acts as an inventory tool where you must diagnostics.
enter the quantity, type, and location of
setscrews that are presently installed on NOTE
each of the engine output shafts WHEN
THE VIBRATION WAS MEASURED. This Make sure that all 9CORRECTIONS FOR9
allows the test set to provide adjustments screens are reviewed and the proper bal-
that prioritize removal of balance setscrews ance setscrew adjustment is entered on the
before installation of additional setscrews data sheet for the proper shaft and balance
on the output shaft. setscrew location. A maximum of four
separate 9CORRECTIONS FOR9 screens
There are two pages of CURRENT CON- may be displayed depending on the rec-
FIGURATION screens, one page is for the ommended adjustments. Each 9CORREC-
#1 engine, and the second page is for the TIONS FOR9 screen will only display one
#2 engine (Figure 37). setscrew type (Titanium-Light or Steel-
Heavy) for one particular engine output
shaft. BE SURE TO VERIFY THE TOTAL
If the current balance setscrew configura- NUMBER OF (CORRECTIONS FOR(
tion of an output shaft is not known then do SCREENS TO REVIEW BY LOOKING
not continue with this procedure until the AT THE UPPER RIGHT HAND COR-
type, quantity and location of installed bal- NER OF THE CADU DISPLAY (Figure
ance setscrews has been determined. If a 38).
shaft is not being balanced, then the cur-
rent configuration for that shaft is not
A plus sign (+) preceding the balance set-
required.
screw correction means add balance set-
screws to that balance setscrew. A minus
g. Review the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screens sign (-) preceding the balance setscrew
for the #1 engine (Figure 37), and for the #2 engine correction means subtract balance
(Figure 37), to make sure that the values entered match setscrews to that balance setscrew location.
what were installed on each engine output shaft when the
data was measured. Refer to the last Previous Configura- Balance setscrews are always added to or
tion block on the data sheet and make sure that the values subtracted from the balance setscrews that
match the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen. If the val- were installed on the output shaft at the
ues match go to step h. and continue this procedure. If the time the data was measured.
value do not match, then continue to change CURRENT
CONFIGURATION screen.
If the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen
is properly specified, the diagnostics will
(1) To change the value in the current configura- always try to remove balance setscrews
tion screen, press the s or g arrow key until the desired from the output shaft prior to adding bal-
blade (balance setscrew location) and setscrew type ance setscrews. Therefore, it is possible that
(Titanium-Light or Steel-Heavy) is highlighted. the diagnostics may require adjustment on
all six balance setscrew locations.
(2) Once the correct blade (balance setscrew loca- However, when all of the adjustments are
tion) and setscrew type (Titanium-Light or Steel-Heavy) is made, balance setscrews should never be
highlighted, use the keypad to enter the correct quantity installed on any more than six balance set-
of the specific setscrew type that is currently installed at screw points per engine. If balance
that balance setscrew location and press DO to enter the setscrews are installed on seven or more
value. balance setscrew points, the CURRENT

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 35

Page 1 of 2 Page 2 of 2
S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12 NOV 10 14:11 S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12 NOV 10 14:11
ENTER CURRENT CONFIGURATION ENTER CURRENT CONFIGURATION
BLADE Eng #1 TITANIUM ENG #1 STEEL BLADE Eng #2 TITANIUM ENG #2 STEEL
−−−−−−−− ( LIGHT ) −−−−−− ( HEAVY ) −−−−−−−− ( LIGHT ) −−−−−− ( HEAVY )
1 2.000 0.000 1 0.000 0.000
6 0.000 0.000 6 0.000 0.000
5 0.000 0.000 5 0.000 1.000
4 0.000 0.000 4 0.000 1.000
3 0.000 0.000 3 0.000 0.000
2 0.000 1.000 2 0.000 0.000

[DO] to Confirm [QUIT] to Abort [DO] to Confirm [QUIT] to Abort

CLEAR CLR BLD CLR ADJ RESET CLEAR CLR BLD CLR ADJ RESET

F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1037
SA

Figure 37. 9CURRENT CONFIGURATION9 Screen In Diagnostics

CONFIGURATION screen was not j. From the 9CORRECTIONS FOR9 screen (Figure 38),
properly specified, or an error was made press QUIT to exit.
during the adjustment.
k. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 39), highlight
The diagnostics will offer balance setscrew View Predictions and press DO.
adjustments even if vibration is within the
acceptance limit. You are not required to
l. The RESPONSES FOR screen, (Figure 41), will
make the recommended balance setscrew
show you what measured vibration level was and what
adjustments in this situation. Disregard
the vibration is predicted to be after the recommended
these adjustments, unless it is desired to
adjustments are made. This feature informs you if the
balance to an even lower level.
vibration is correctable. If the predicted vibrations are
i The 9CORRECTIONS FOR9 screen (Figure 38) 0.50 ips or less for all measured points, then press DO
shows you what balance setscrew adjustments are and continue with step o. If the predicted vibration is
required to reduce output shaft 1/rev vibration. Enter greater than 0.50 ips at any of the measured points, then
these values in the appropriate Change Required block it is not expected that the vibration can be corrected with
on the data sheet (Figure 42). A maximum of four sepa- the allotted amount of balance setscrews, press DO and
rate 9CORRECTIONS FOR9 screens may be displayed continue with step m.
depending on the recommended adjustments. Each
9CORRECTIONS FOR9 screen will only display one set- m. If the predicted vibration is unacceptable, and this
screw type (Titanium-Light or Steel-Heavy) for one par- is the first time during this evolution that unacceptable
ticular engine output shaft. BE SURE TO VERIFY THE vibrations were predicted by the test set, go to step o.
TOTAL NUMBER OF (CORRECTIONS FOR(
SCREENS TO REVIEW BY LOOKING AT THE n. If the predicted vibration is unacceptable and this
UPPER RIGHT HAND CORNER OF THE CADU is not the first time during this evolution that unacceptable
DISPLAY (Figure 38). vibrations were predicted by the test set, continue on:

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 36

CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 1 OF 4 CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 2 OF 4

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12−NOV−10 14:11 S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12−NOV−10 14:11

ENG #1 Titanium ( Light ) ENG #1 STEEL ( Heavy )

+ means ADD SETSCREW + means ADD SETSCREW
− means REMOVE SETSCREW − means REMOVE SETSCREW
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− Blades −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− Blades −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
1 6 5 1 6 5
−2.00 +1.00 0.00 +1.00 0.00 0.00
4 3 2 4 3 2
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page [LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu [DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu

CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 3 OF 4 CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 4 OF 4

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12−NOV−10 14:11 S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12−NOV−10 14:11

ENG #2 Titanium ( Light ) ENG #2 STEEL ( Heavy )

+ means ADD SETSCREW + means ADD SETSCREW
− means REMOVE SETSCREW − means REMOVE SETSCREW
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− Blades −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− Blades −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
1 6 5 1 6 5
0.00 0.00 +1.00 0.00 0.00 −1.00
4 3 2 4 3 2
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page [LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu [DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu

IM1038
SA

Figure 38. Corrections For Display Screen

NOTE make subsequent balance setscrew correc-
tions.
The Engine Output Shaft Troubleshooting
Flowchart is used only after the primary (1) From the 9Diagnostics Menu9 (Figure 39), press
adjustment (balance setscrews) fails to QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode.
reduce vibrations to within the acceptance
limit. Corrections made as a result of this (2) From the 9DIAGS9 display (Figure 40), press
flowchart may not immediately reduce QUIT to exit diagnostics without updating the current
vibration to within the acceptance limit, but configuration list.
are intended to correct any defect in the
engine output shaft that is preventing the (3) From the main menu (Figure 30), press OFF to
shaft from balancing properly. After a cor- turn the CADU off.
rective action is made from this flowchart,
you must repeat the Engine Output Shaft (4) Enter the Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm
Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Vibration Coupling Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Figure 44)
Measurement procedure, (PARA 19), and at PT 3.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 37

Diagnostics Menu

View Predictions
Edit Adjustables
View Corrections
View Limits
Edit Defaults
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0523
SA

Figure 39. Diagnostics Menu

DIAGS

Do you wish to store the new

adjustment values?

PRESS DO for YES

PRESS QUIT for NO

FG0525
SA

Figure 40. 9DIAGS9 Display Exiting Diagnostics

o. From the 9Diagnostics Menu9 (Figure 39), press r. On the data sheet (Figure 10), add (or subtract)
QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode. the type and quantity of setscrews in the 9Change
Required9 block to (or from) the type and quantity of set-
screws in the Previous Configuration block and enter the
p. From the 9DIAGS9 display (Figure 40), press DO
result in the 9New Configuration9 block. If the 9New Con-
if you plan to make the last set of adjustments recom-
figuration9 row indicates that balance setscrews will be
mended by the diagnostics, this will update the current
installed on seven or more setscrew locations on one
configuration list by adding the recommended adjust-
shaft, then an error was made. Repeat this procedure,
ments to the old list. You will press QUIT if the test set
starting at step c. (make sure that the CURRENT CON-
recommended adjustments are not going to be made. In
FIGURATION screen is properly specified). Otherwise
this case the current configuration list is not changed.
continue on.

q. From the main menu (Figure 30), press OFF to s. Make the output shaft balance setscrew adjust-
turn the CADU off. ments specified on the data sheet , refer to Engine Output

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 38

RESPONSES FOR: PAGE 1 OF 1

S−70i 53 DCENGBAL 12 NOV 10 14:11
Vibration Results: Measured Predicted
Test Channel IPS DEG IPS DEG
#1bal #1_ENG 1.17 100 0.24 347
#2bal #2_ENG 0.44 34 0.10 214

[UP] Prev Line [Right] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
[DO] / [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu
IM1039
SA

Figure 41. View Predictions Display Within Diagnostics

Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance, Setscrew Trim Bal- b. Inspect the identified shaft and compare the bal-
ance Adjustment (PARA 22). ance setscrews installed on the shaft against what is writ-
ten in the last Previous Configuration block on the data
10. ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM sheet. If what is on the shaft matches what is on the data
COUPLING BALANCE, SETSCREW TRIM BAL- sheet then continue on. If what is on the shaft does not
ANCE ADJUSTMENT. match what is on the data sheet then correct the data
sheet and re-run the diagnostics. Refer to the Engine Out-
put Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Corrective Action
CAUTION (PARA 21). Make sure that the CURRENT CONFIGURA-
TION screen (Figure 37) in diagnostics is properly speci-
fied.
Make sure the proper shaft is being
adjusted. c. Check the adjustments that are to be made to the
shaft and compare them to what is currently on the shaft.
Make sure the proper balance setscrew If the adjustments require the removal of balance
location is being adjusted. setscrews that are not installed, or the adjustment will
result in balance setscrews being installed on more than
NOTE six points, then either an error was made transcribing the
adjustments or the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen
When the Diaphragm Coupling balance is in diagnostics was not properly specified, rerun diagnos-
applicable (hardware kit 70000-30100- tics. Refer to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling
044), balance setscrews are added or sub- Balance, Corrective Actions (PARA 21). If none of the
tracted within the six balance locations above conditions exist, and all of the adjustments seem
(each containing two balance points). reasonable, continue on.

Only make balance setscrew adjustments d. On the required engine rotate the output shaft until
per the diagnostics. If at any time there is a the required balance setscrew location is visible.
confusion as to what adjustment is to be
made or what was installed on the shaft to
start, remove all installed balance setscrews CAUTION
from the output shaft and begin the task
over again.
Balance setscrews may be re-used once
a. Review the Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Cou- only or a maximum of two installs. If it is
pling Balance Data Sheet (Figure 10) that has been used unknown whether a balance setscrew has
throughout this task and identify which output shaft is to been previously installed, discard and uti-
be adjusted. lize new hardware.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 39

ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE DATA SHEET

(Engine Output Shaft 1 / rev vibration shall be 0.50 ips or less at flat pitch, 100% Nr)

Set Screw Balance Location ENGINE OUTPUT

Run Amp Phase 1 2 3 4 5 6
SHAFT
(ips) (Deg) A B A B A B A B A B A B #1 #2
St Ti Previous Configuration

1 1.17 100 +Ti −Ti / +St Change Required

Ti St St New Configuration

Ti St St Previous Configuration

FB0394
SA

Figure 42. Example Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Data Sheet
balance location requiring adjustment. For corrections
requiring use of both the A and B points and both set-
Within each balance evolution, a balance screw types for one balance location, the heavy and light
setscrew may be relocated to another loca- setscrews can be installed at either point without prefer-
tion only once to achieve final vibration ence.
limits.
(2) Using a strap wrench to prevent output shaft
When performing balance setscrew adjust- from turning, add or subtract (whichever applies) the
ments, do not loosen or remove the bolts required balance setscrews to or from the first balance
securing the diaphragm coupling to the setscrew location.
engine output shaft.
NOTE
NOTE

The maximum number of balance setscrews

The A and B points for each balance loca-
in any combination that can be added to
tion are treated as the same. For consis-
an engine output shaft is six. A stuck set-
tency, it is recommended to install a set-
screw shall be included in the maximum
screw in the A point prior to using the B
count of six setscrews.
point for any balance location requiring
adjustment. For corrections requiring use of
both the A and B points and both setscrew If a balance setscrew becomes stuck or
types for one balance location, the heavy seized in one of the balance locations, it
and light setscrews can be installed at may be necessary to add a balance set-
either point without preference. screw of equal type directly opposite the
stuck setscrew as an offset.
(1) Obtain the required balance setscrew adjust-
ment from the data sheet. All recommended adjustments Installation height of the balance setscrews
from the test set are stated in terms of type and quantity of above the surface of the output shaft flange
setscrews, i.e. steel Heavy: setscrews PL565A428H4 and shall not exceed the following limits:
titanium Light setscrews 70361-08700-101. Use the
specifications listed in Figure 43 for assistance in identi-
For Titanium (70361-08700-101), max
fying the type of any previously installed balance
protrusion is 0.0709.
setscrews (wrench size is different for each type). The A
and B points for each balance location are treated as the
same. For consistency, it is recommended to install a set- For Steel (PL565A428H4), max protru-
screw in the A point prior to using the B point for any sion is 0.0509.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 40

(3) Enter values in the appropriate Previous Con-

If installation height limits are exceeded, figuration block for the appropriate shaft on the data
replace the balance setscrew. sheet to reflect that no balance setscrews are installed on
that shaft.
(3) Install each setscrew in the indicated balance
setscrew point by threading the setscrew into the hole (4) Go to step e. and continue this procedure.
until the setscrew bottoms. If the setscrew bottoms and
there is the presence of run-on torque, the setscrew is 11. ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM
considered installed. TORQUE THE BALANCE COUPLING BALANCE, TEST EQUIPMENT
SETSCREW TO 35 INCH-POUNDS. REMOVAL.

(4) Repeat step (3) for each required setscrew a. Disconnect the accelerometer cable from the
adjustment called out on the data sheet until all adjust- accelerometer at the input module of each engine that
ments for the output shaft presently under adjustment have was measured/balanced. Remove the accelerometer from
been completed. the accelerometer block. If the accelerometer block,
70351-08408-102, was used, do not remove the accel-
(5) Inventory the total number of balance erometer block from the input module, the accelerometer
setscrews installed on the output shaft. No more than six block is a permanent installation. Return the accelerom-
(6) setscrews are to be installed. If more than six setscrews eter(s) to the appropriate case. If the L-shaped accelerom-
are installed, go to step h. Otherwise continue. eter bracket, 29313000, was used, remove the bracket
from the input module of each engine that was measured/
e. If balance setscrew adjustments are required on balanced and perform step (1) through step (3).
the other engine, repeat step d. of this procedure for that
engine output shaft. (1) Install a new nut on the input module(s) on the
stud that the L-shaped bracket was installed on. TORQUE
NUT TO 260-289 INCH-POUNDS.
CAUTION
(2) Cover nuts with sealing compound 8030-00-
723-2746.
Thoroughly inspect the doghouse and
upper deck area of the aircraft prior to the
next run for any tools or debris which may (3) Return the accelerometer(s) to the appropriate
damage the engine. case.

f. Inspect doghouse and upper deck area of the air-

craft prior to the next run for FOD. CAUTION

g. Once all required balance setscrew adjustments

are completed, re-measure engine output shaft balance Be careful not to cut aircraft wiring or
data, refer to Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling accelerometer cables when cutting tiedown
Balance, Vibration Measurement (PARA 19). strap that secured accelerometer wires.

h. More than the maximum number of allowable bal- b. Remove all accelerometer cables and return them
ance setscrews are installed on an output shaft. It is sus- to the appropriate case.
pected that an error was made previously when making
the adjustments. Perform the following to remove all bal- c. If the optical RPM sensors were installed for output
ance setscrews and begin the balance evolution from the shaft balancing, perform the following:
beginning:
(1) Disconnect optical RPM sensor cable from the
(1) Apply a strap wrench to prevent output shaft DAU and pull the wire back up to the optical RPM sensor
from turning. bracket.

(2) Remove all balance setscrews from the output (2) Remove the optical RPM sensor bracket from
shaft. the input module gimbal. Reinstall the two AN5-5A bolts

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 41

STEEL SETSCREW TITANIUM SETSCREW

PL565A428H4 70361−08700−101

THREAD = 1/4" − 28 THREAD = 1/4" − 28

LENGTH = 0.250" LENGTH = 0.250"
CADMIUM PLATED "Hi−Kote" COATING
WT Grams = 0.953 WT Grams = 0.560
INTERNAL INTERNAL
WRENCHING WRENCHING
SIZE = 0.125" SIZE = 0.096"
SELF GREEN SELF GREEN
LOCKING "POLY− LOCKING "POLY−
FEATURE = LOCK" FEATURE = LOCK"
*GREEN PRIMER ON TIP

FB0667
SA

Figure 43. Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Setscrew Types
and washers that were removed during the test equip- e. Disconnect the CDU cable from both the CDU and
ment installation. TORQUE BOLTS TO 185 INCH- the DAU. Remove both the CDU-to-DAU cable and CDU
POUNDS. from the aircraft, and return to the appropriate case

(3) If required, remove the optical pickup from the f. Disconnect the CADU-to-DAU cable from the
optical RPM sensor bracket by removing the optical RPM CADU and DAU. Remove both the CADU-to-DAU cable
sensor guide and unscrewing the optical RPM sensor from and DAU from the aircraft and return to the appropriate
the bracket. Return the optical RPM sensor and bracket to case.
the test set kit.
g. If all vibration tasks are complete on the aircraft
(4) Remove bleed-air hose plug. undergoing vibration tuning, perform the following (Refer
to Software/Data Management Instructions (WP 010 00):
(5) Install the crotch assembly. Refer to applicable
maintenance manual.
(1) Download data from the CADU to PC, this
(6) Install the engine inlet. Refer to applicable manual.
maintenance manual.
(2) Delete data from the CADU, this manual.
d. Disconnect the 28 VDC power cable from the DAU
and from the aircraft 28 VDC receptacle, remove the (3) Compress the CADU memory, this manual.
cable from the aircraft, and return to the appropriate
case. (4) Return the CADU to the basic kit case.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 42

PT 1
NOTES
1. IF THIS PATH IS FOLLOWED REPEATEDLY WITHOUT
EXPLANATION REPLACE TEST EQUIPMENT
(ESPECIALLY ACCELEROMETERS) AND REPEAT
VIBRATION BALANCE AMPLITUDE FOR
PROCEDURE. IF PROBLEMS PERSIST THEN GO TO
IDENTIFIED SHAFT IS INCREASING OVER
"PT 3" IN THIS FLOWCHART.
SUCCESSIVE RUNS.
(SEE NOTE 1)
2. IT IS EXPECTED THAT VIBRATION MAY INCREASE
IF ANY COMPONENTS WERE REPLACED OR IF ALL
WAS MAINTENANCE PERFORMED ON
BALANCE WASHERS WERE REMOVED FROM THE
THAT OUTPUT SHAFT THAT MIGHT
OUTPUT SHAFT TO START THE PROCEDURE FROM
EXPLAIN THE INCREASE?
THE BEGINNING.
(SEE NOTE 2)

YES NO

DETERMINE BALANCE SETSCREW CHECK ALL TEST EQUIPMENT FOR

ADJUSTMENT, REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT PROPER INSTALLATION, REFER TO ENGINE
SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE,
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS, THIS WP. TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, THIS WP.

PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:

− ACCELEROMETER INSTALLATION & ORIENTATION.

− OPTICAL RPM SENSOR LOCATION.
− REFLECTIVE TAPE INSTALLATION & LOCATION.
− BALANCE SETSCREW LOCATION LABELING.

ANY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

PROBLEMS NOTED?

NO YES

1. CORRECT INSTRUMENTATION PROBLEMS.

REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM
COUPLING BALANCE, TEST EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION, THIS WP.
2. REMOVE ALL BALANCE SETSCREWS FROM
THAT OUTPUT SHAFT. REFER TO ENGINE
OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING
BALANCE, SETSCREW TRIM BALANCE
ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.
3. ANNOTATE THE "PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION"
BLOCKS ON THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
SECTION OF THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT
THAT ALL SETSCREWS WERE REMOVED FROM
THE SPECIFIC SHAFT.
4. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE
DATA. REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, DATA
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

FB0355_1
SA

Figure 44. Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 43

PT 2 PT 3

MORE THAN THREE BALANCE SETSCREW VIBRATION PREDICTIONS FROM RADS−AT

ADJUSTMENTS (FOUR RUNS) HAVE BEEN DIAGNOSTICS HAVE BEEN OVER THE
MADE ON AN ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT. ACCEPTANCE LIMIT REPEATEDLY DURING
THIS EVOLUTION.

INSPECT THE INSIDE OF THE OUTPUT HAVE DIAGNOSTICS BEEN RE−RUN A

SHAFT FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS. SECOND TIME WITH SPECIAL ATTENTION
PAID TO MAKE SURE THAT THE "CURRENT
WAS ANY FOD FOUND? CONFIGURATION" SCREEN IS PROPERLY
DEFINED?

NO YES YES NO

HAS VIBRATION TEST EQUIPMENT 1. INSPECT OUTPUT SHAFT AND MAKE SURE
INSTALLATION BEEN INSPECTED AND THE THE "PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION" BLOCK ON
OUTPUT SHAFT TO DIAPHRAGM COUPLING THE DATA SHEET IS EQUIVALENT TO WHAT
BOLTS BEEN CHECKED FOR PROPER IS ACTUALLY INSTALLED ON THE SHAFT.
TORQUE?
2. RE−RUN DIAGNOSTICS, REFER TO ENGINE
OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING
YES NO BALANCE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS, THIS WP.
MAKE SURE THAT THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION
SCREEN IS EQUIVALENT TO WHAT IS ACTUALLY
INTALLED ON THE OUTPUT SHAFT.

1. CHECK ALL TEST EQUIPMENT FOR PROPER 1. REMOVE FOD.

INSTALLATION. REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT
SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, TEST 2. REMOVE ALL BALANCE SETSCREWS FROM
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, THIS WP. THAT OUTPUT SHAFT. REFER TO ENGINE
OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING
PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING: BALANCE, SETSCREW TRIM BALANCE
ACCEL INSTALLATION & ORIENTATION ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.
OPTICAL RPM SENSOR LOCATION
REFLECTIVE TAPE INSTALLATION & LOCATION 3. ANNOTATE THE "PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION"
BALANCE SETSCREW LOCATION LABELING BLOCKS ON THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
SECTION OF THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT
2. PERFORM TORQUE CHECK ON OUTPUT SHAFT THAT ALL SETSCREWS WERE REMOVED
TO DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BOLTS (REFER FROM THE SPECIFIC SHAFT.
TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
4. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE
WERE ANY DEFECTS NOTED?
DATA. REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
NO YES DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, DATA
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

A B

FB0355_2
SA

Figure 44. Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 44

A B

HAS VIBRATION TEST EQUIPMENT BEEN

1. CORRECT PROBLEM.
REPLACED? (ESPECIALLY THE
ACCELEROMETER). 2. REMOVE ALL BALANCE SETSCREWS FROM
THAT OUTPUT SHAFT. REFER TO ENGINE
YES NO OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING
BALANCE, SETSCREW TRIM BALANCE
ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.

3. ANNOTATE THE "PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION"

BLOCKS ON THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
HAS INPUT FLANGE/COUPLING NUT
SECTION OF THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT
TORQUE BEEN CHECKED?
THAT ALL SETSCREWS WERE REMOVED
FROM THE SPECIFIC SHAFT.
YES NO 4. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE
DATA. REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, DATA
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

CHECK TORQUE ON INPUT MODULE FLANGE/

COUPLING NUT. (REFER TO APPLICABLE 1. REPLACE VIBRATION EQUIPMENT ESPECIALLY
MAINTENANCE MANUAL). THE ACCELEROMETER AND CABLE.

WAS THE INPUT MODULE 2. REMOVE ALL BALANCE SETSCREWS FROM

FLANGE/COUPLING NUT LOOSE? THAT OUTPUT SHAFT. REFER TO ENGINE
OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING
NO YES BALANCE, SETSCREW TRIM BALANCE
ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.

3. ANNOTATE THE "PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION"

BLOCKS ON THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
SECTION OF THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT
1. RE−TORQUE INPUT MODULE FLANGE/ THAT ALL SETSCREWS WERE REMOVED
COUPLING NUT. (REFER TO APPLICABLE FROM THE SPECIFIC SHAFT.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
4. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE
2. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE DATA. REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
DATA. REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, DATA
DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, DATA MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

HAVE THE OUTPUT SHAFT AND DIAPHRAGM

COUPLING BEEN REPLACED?

YES NO

CONTACT A SIKORSKY AIRCRAFT 1. REPLACE OUTPUT SHAFT AND DIAPHRAGM

REPRESENTATIVE FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE. COUPLING. (REFER TO APPLICABLE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
2. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE
DATA. REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT
DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, DATA
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

FB0355_3
SA

Figure 44. Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 004 00
Page 45/(46 Blank)

PT 4

ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT 1 / REV VIBRATION

LEVEL IS GREATER THAN 2.00 IPS.

HAS THE OUTPUT SHAFT BEEN INDEXED RELATIVE TO THE

DIAPHRAGM COUPLING FIVE TIMES DURING THIS
BALANCE ITERATION?

YES NO

1. REPLACE OUTPUT SHAFT AND DIAPHRAGM COUPLING. 1. INDEX THE OUTPUT SHAFT RELATIVE TO THE DIAPHRAGM
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL). COUPLING 60 DEGREES (1 BOLT) COUNTERCLOCKWISE
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
2. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE DATA.
REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM 2. REMOVE ALL BALANCE SETSCREWS FROM THAT OUTPUT
COUPLING BALANCE, DATA MEASUREMENT,THIS WP. SHAFT (IF APPLICABLE). REFER TO ENGINE OUTPUT
SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE, SETSCREW TRIM
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.

3. ANNOTATE THE "PREVIOUS CONFIGURATION"BLOCKS ON

THE ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT SECTION OF THE DATA
SHEET TO REFLECT THAT ALL SETSCREWS WERE
REMOVED FROM THAT SPECIFIC SHAFT.

4. RE−MEASURE OUTPUT SHAFT BALANCE DATA. REFER TO

ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT DIAPHRAGM COUPLING BALANCE,
DATA MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

FB0355_4
SA

Figure 44. Engine Output Shaft Diaphragm Coupling Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

OIL COOLER VIBRATION CHECK

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

RADS-AT Operation And Maintenance Manual ....................................................... 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page No.

Aircraft Configuration .............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Conditions ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Procedure, Oil Cooler Vibration Check .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Indexing Oil Cooler Output Shaft ..................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Oil Cooler Vibration Check, Test Equipment Installation .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Oil Cooler Vibration Check, Test Equipment Removal ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Oil Cooler Vibration Measurement ................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Recalling Oil Cooler Data ......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Vibration Task Sequencing .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

Model 991 Accelerometer (54 mV/g) (Wilcoxon

Research)
29103900 Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29104700 28 VDC Power Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29105600 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 50 ft
length (GE Aviation Systems)
29283200 Cable Distribution Unit Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29315000 CADU Battery Charger (GE Aviation
Systems)
29325601 DAU-to-CADU Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 2

Support Equipment Required (Cont)

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE

Aviation Systems)
29481400 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
- Torque Wrench (0 - 30 in-lbs)
- Torque Wrench (30 - 150 in-lbs)
All required vibration test equipment is
found in the basic kit, and the adapter kit,
29743100.

Materials Required

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature

AN3H14A Bolt
MS20995NC32 Safety Wire
NAS1149D0332K Washer
5975-00-984-6582 or equivalent Tiedown Straps
70361-03016-101 Bracket

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 3

1. VIBRATION TASK SEQUENCING (Figure 1). 5. TEST PROCEDURE, OIL COOLER VIBRATION
CHECK.
a. The Oil Cooler Vibration Check task can be done
Install test equipment. Refer to OIL COOLER VIBRATION
at the same time the Tail Rotor Balance, Engine Output
CHECK, TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, this WP.
Shaft Balance, Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking, or Main
Rotor Ground Balancing tasks are being completed. It is
6. OIL COOLER VIBRATION CHECK, TEST
not necessary that criteria for any one of the above listed
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.
tasks be satisfied before the Oil Cooler Vibration task is
performed.
NOTE

b. The Oil Cooler vibration check task is required if All vibration test equipment required is
any of the following conditions are true. found in the basic kit, and the adapter kit,
29743100.
(1) Any of the aircraft Phase Inspections have
a. On oil cooler, check if bracket is already installed.
been completed.
If it is not, remove bolt (AN3-4A) (Figure 2) and in its
place install bracket 70361-03016-101 with bolt
(2) Any of the bolts that attach either the input or AN3H14A and washer NAS1149D0332K. Torque bolt
output shafts to the oil cooler were loosened or removed to 43-52 inch-pounds. Safety wire as follows.
for any reason. Refer to applicable maintenance manual.
(1) Safety wire the bracket 70361-03016-101 to
an adjacent bolt.
(3) Any of the bolts that secure the oil cooler to the
airframe were loosened or removed. Refer to applicable
(2) Safety wire bracket bolt AN3H14A to another
maintenance manual.
adjacent bolt.

c. If the Oil Cooler vibration check task is required it b. Install two accelerometers on the bracket located
must be completed prior to flying the aircraft. on the oil cooler (Figure 2). One accelerometer must be
oriented vertically and the second fore/aft. Torque accel-
2. PURPOSE. erometers to 20 inch-pounds.

a. Oil Cooler Vibration Check contains the proce-

CAUTION
dure for checking the 1/rev vibration of the Oil Cooler
assembly on the ground for the S-70i type aircraft.
To avoid damaging accelerometer or
b. The Oil Cooler Vibration Check procedure mea- accelerometer cable be sure that the 3-pin
sures the Oil Cooler 1/rev vibration (4,115 RPM) ampli- socket end of the cable is attached to the
tude at Flat Pitch, 100% Nr, and compares the level accelerometer.
against limits. If the vibration is determined to exceed
limits, the Oil Cooler Troubleshooting must be c. Connect three-pin female end of one accelerom-
accomplished. eter cable to the vertical accelerometer. Label the four-pin
male end as VERT.
3. TEST CONDITIONS.
d. Connect three-pin female end of one accelerom-
eter cable to the fore/aft accelerometer. Label the four-
a. Oil Cooler Vibration Check can be accomplished pin male end as F/A.
day or night in any weather conditions.

4. AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION.
WARNING
a. The aircraft must be ready for ground runs up to
100% Nr with both main rotor and tail rotor blades Make sure that cables are secure and do
installed. not interfere with emergency escape routes.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 4

ALL TASKS WITHIN DOTTED BOX CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED SIMULTANEOUSLY

WP 003 00 WP 005 00 WP 006 00

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE OIL COOLER VIBRATION MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING
CHECK
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: TASK REQUIRING FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. 1. MAIN ROTOR BLADE REPLACED.
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF TAIL
ROTOR RETENTION PLATE BOLTS. 2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVING OF 2. PCR OR PC ROD END REPLACED.
ANY OIL COOLER SHAFT ATTACHMENT
3. THE ADJUSTMENT OF ANY TAIL
BOLTS (INPUT OR OUTPUT). 3. PCR’S ADJUSTED DURING MR RIG.
ROTOR PITCH LINKS.
3. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY 4. MAIN ROTOR HEAD REMOVED.
BOLTS THAT SECURE OIL COOLER
TO AIRFRAME. 5. MAIN ROTOR QCU REMOVED.

6. MR SPINDLE REMOVED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. 100% NR 100%NR, NOSE INTO WIND

WP 004 00 WP 007 00
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING
BALANCE TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: 1. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. FLAT PITCH TRACKING, THIS MANUAL.
2. GROUND VIBRATION DISCREPANCY
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTS.
BOLTS THAT ATTACH THE ENGINE
SHAFT TO THE INPUT MODULE 3. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
FLANGE. 1 / REV TUNING, THIS MANUAL.
4. BLADE RETENTION PIN REPLACED.
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND.

WP 008 00
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
2. FOLLOWING MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING.
3. INFLIGHT VIBRATION DISCREPANCY EXISTS.
4. MAIN ROTOR DAMPER OR DAMPER BEARING REPLACED.
5. MAIN ROTOR PCR BEARING REPLACED.
6. MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAP REPLACED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS WITH EXTERNAL TANKS
FP GROUND, 100% NR FP GROUND, 100% NR
OGE HOVER, 100% NR OGE HOVER, 100% NR
80 KTS, 100% NR 80 KTS, 100% NR
120 KTS, 100% NR 120 KTS, 100% NR
140KTS, 100% NR VH, 100% NR
VH, 100% NR

IM1040
SA

Figure 1. Vibration Task Sequencing

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 5

VERTICAL
ACCELEROMETER
(TORQUE TO
20 IN. LBS)

STA
385

U
P
WL
284

T
ON
FR

U
FORE / AFT P
ACCELEROMETER FRONT
(TORQUE TO
20 IN. LBS)
70361−03016−101 BRACKET
(REMOVE AN3−4A FAN & RADIATORASSEMBLY
BOLT AND INSTALL
70361−03016−101 BRACKET
WITH AN AN3H14A BOLT AND
NAS1149D0332K WASHER. TORQUE
BOLT TO 43−52 IN. LBS AND
SAFETY WIRE.
FB2303A
SA

Figure 2. Oil Cooler Vibration Accelerometer Installation

side, cabin ceiling) and then to the 28 VDC receptacle on
CAUTION the DAU (Figure 3).

(4) Connect the male end of the Cable Distribution

To avoid damaging equipment make sure Unit cable, 29283200, to the MULTI-CH receptacle on
cables are clear of flight controls, moving the DAU (Figure 3). Connect the female end of the CDU
parts, hot fluid lines and bleed-air tubes. cable to the MULTI-CH receptacle on the CDU (Figure 4).

e. Route the accelerometer cables down along the (5) Connect the VERT accelerometer cable,
main gearbox and into the cabin area through the drip 29105600, to the ACC 9 receptacle of the Cable Distri-
pan. Secure the cables using tiedown straps. bution Unit (Figure 4).

f. Place DAU, 29481400, CADU, 29481301, and (6) Connect the F/A accelerometer cable,
Cable Distribution Unit, 29103900, in forward cabin 29105600, to the ACC 10 receptacle of the Cable Dis-
area and secure DAU and CAU to aircraft using tie-down tribution Unit (Figure 4).
rings in the floor. Make the following cabling connections
g. Make a copy of the Oil Cooler Vibration Check
(Figures 3 and 4).
Data Sheet (Figure 5). One data sheet will be used for the
entire Oil Cooler Vibration Check task evolution.
(1) Connect DAU-to-CADU cable, 29325601, to
the CADU receptacle on the DAU (Figure 3).
h. Measure Oil Cooler vibration. Refer to Oil Cooler
Vibration Measurement (PARA 7).
(2) Connect DAU-to-CADU cable, 29325601, to
the receptacle on the CADU. To avoid damaging the 7. OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT.
CADU, place the CADU in a protected yet accessible
location. NOTE

(3) Connect the 28 VDC power cable, 29104700, Keystrokes on the CADU are identified by
to the aircraft 28 VDC power receptacle (STA 293, right the use of bold print.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 6

CADU CABLE

DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

NIGHT
DAY TEST

ACC 1 ACC 3 FUSE

TACHO 1 TRACKER
CADU 15 AMP
MODE STROBE

ON

TACHO 2
ACC 2 ACC 4 OFF
TRACKER 1 28VDC POWER
MULTI−CH

MULTI−CH CABLE 28 VDC

FROM THE CDU POWER CABLE
FG0489
SA

Figure 3. DAU Cable Connections For Oil Cooler Vibration Check

MULTI−CH CABLE
FROM THE DAU

CABLE DISTRIBUTION UNIT

ACC 5 ACC 6 ACC 7 ACC 8 ACC 9 TACHO 2

MULTI−CH

ACC 10 ACC 11 ACC 12 ACC 13 ACC 14 ABT 2

OIL COOLER "F / A" OIL COOLER "VERT"

ACCELEROMETER ACCELEROMETER

FB2304
SA

Figure 4. Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) Cable Connections For Oil Cooler Vibration Check

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 7

AIRCRAFT: DATE:

OIL COOLER VIBRATION CHECK DATA SHEET

(Criteria: All Oil Cooler 1 / Rev Vibrations shall be 1.00 ips or less at Flat Pitch, 100% Nr)

Run OC F/A OC Vert

Number (ips) MAINTENANCE ACTION
(ips)

VERTICAL
ACCELEROMETER

STA
385

U
P
WL
284

D
FW

U
FORE / AFT P
ACCELEROMETER FWD

FAN & RADIATOR ASSEMBLY

STA STA STA STA STA STA

342.9 380 470.9 521 591.8 664

STA
752

SECTION I

OIL COOLER
DRIVE SHAFT SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IV SECTION V SECTION VI

S−70A/C TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM FB2305

SA

Figure 5. Oil Cooler Vibration Check Data Sheet

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 8

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL Aircraft Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
70iCEF
12−NOV−10 14:02:36
FFT
Aircraft Type ?
S−70B
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ? S−70i
Flight I.D. ? S−80M
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

IM1462 IM1041
SA SA

Figure 6. Main Menu Figure 7. 9Aircraft Types9 Menu

This procedure will measure Oil Cooler

1/rev vibration on the aircraft and com- Select Tail Number PAGE 1 OF 1
pare the vibration amplitude against the 51
acceptance limit.
52
NEW
The COOLER test state will perform both
the Vertical and Fore/Aft measurements on
the oil cooler.

If problems are encountered with the equip-

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line
ment that are not addressed in this docu- [LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
ment, then refer to the Operation And [DO] Select Tail No [QUIT] Exit
Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
instruction. FG0500
SA

If you are instructed to reboot the CADU or Figure 8. 9Select Tail Number9 Menu
the CADU appears to be stuck in a particu- highlight (area with dark background and
lar operation then refer to Software/Data light letters) the desired option then press
Management Instructions (WP 010 00). DO to select the option. If the wrong option
is highlighted by mistake, press QUIT to
a. Make sure the test equipment is properly installed. go back to the main menu.
Refer to Oil Cooler Vibration Check, Test Equipment
Installation (PARA 6).
If nothing appears on the CADU screen
when the CADU is turned on then suspect
b. Make sure the CADU is on the aircraft and that the screen contrast is set improperly or
plugged into the DAU via the CADU-to-DAU cable. the CADU batteries are low on charge.
Adjust the screen contrast by pressing and
c. Get the copy of the Oil Cooler Vibration Check holding the CTRST key on the CADU and
Data Sheet (Figure 5). monitoring the CADU screen. Release the
CTRST key when the screen becomes
NOTE clear. The screen contrast key uses a rolling
adjustment approach, therefore if the
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You CTRST key is released too late, then con-
must use the arrow keys s, d, g, and f to tinue to press and hold the CTRST key until

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 9

Entry Form

Please enter a new tail number SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

for the aircraft type S−70i: RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:03:45
Tail No? 53
Aircraft Type S−70i
Tail Number 53
Flight Plan OIL COOL
[F1] & [F2] Scrolls thru character set Flight I.D. ?
[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Arrows: Move Cursor
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit [DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

IM1042
SA MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

Figure 9. Tail Number Entry

F1 F2 F3 F4
Flight Plans DO−Select QUIT−Exit
BAL TAIL
DCENG BAL
FLT CHK IM1044
GRND BAL SA

GRND TRK
OIL COOL Figure 11. Completed Main Menu
d. Prepare the CADU to measure data by performing
the following:

(1) Turn the CADU on by pressing the ON key.

NOTE
IM1043
SA

If the test set was left in the measurement

Figure 10. 9Flight Plans9 Menu mode (Figure 12), then press QUIT, to exit
the measurement mode, until the Action
the desired contrast is seen again. If noth- menu is seen. If vibration was measured,
ing is seen on the CADU screen after hold- or it is not known that vibration was mea-
ing the CTRST key for 30 seconds then sured, highlight Save and Exit and press
suspect that the CADU batteries are low on DO. If no vibration was measured high-
charge. Plug the CADU into the battery light Abandon Flight, press g arrow key
charger, 29315000, or plug CADU into until Yes is seen next to Continue and press
powered up DAU and repeat procedure. DO. The main menu now should be seen.

The following section can be completed on This procedure may not provide the correct
the CADU at anytime prior to the ground results if the incorrect software version is
run without the CADU being connected to used. The software version is found on the
or powered by the DAU. It is recommended main menu. Verify that the software ver-
that the CADU be powered with the AC sion being used corresponds with the ver-
adapter, 29315000, whenever using the sion covered by this manual. Refer to the
CADU alone to prevent running down the (WP 002 00), if the proper software is not
CADU batteries. CADU batteries automati- on the CADU, then contact Sikorsky Air-
cally recharge when plugged into the DAU craft or GE Aviation Systems representa-
and the DAU is powered with 28 VDC. tive.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 10

The aircraft setup file with the S-70i aircraft

type should be used for aircraft configura-
S−70i 53 OIL COOL 12−NOV−10 tions without external tanks installed.

COOLER The aircraft setup file with the 70iCEF air-

craft type should be used for aircraft con-
figurations with external tanks installed.
The versions 1.0 and 1.0EPP corresponds
to aircraft configured without EPP and with
EPP respectively. Use version that cor-
[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit responds to the aircraft configuration being
flown.
DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

The OIL COOL flight plans for the S-70i

and 70iCEF aircraft types are identical. For
F1 F2 F3 F4 consistency use the aircraft type that
applies to the configuration being used for
the oil cooler vibration check procedure.

(5) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 7), press

the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and ver-
IM1045 sions 1.0 or 1.0EPP whichever is applicable, and press
SA
DO.
Figure 12. Measurement Selection Window
(6) From the main menu (Figure 11), press the d
(2) Press QUIT repeatedly until the Main Menu is
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.
seen (Figure 6). Check for proper software version on
main menu.
(7) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 8),
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
(3) Check the main menu on the CADU (Figure 6) ber and press DO, continue with step (10). If the desired
to make sure that the date and time are correct. If the date tail number is not listed then continue with step (8).
and time are wrong then refer to Software Setup Instruc-
tions (WP 009 00).
(8) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 8),
press the d or f keys to highlight 9NEW9 and press
(4) From the main menu (Figure 6), press the d or DO.
f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.
NOTE
NOTE
Numbers can be entered using the numeric
This procedure may not provide the correct keypad on the CADU. Alphanumeric char-
results if the incorrect aircraft software ver- acters can be entered by using the F1 and
sion is used. Refer (WP 002 00) to verify F2 keys. The F1 and F2 keys allow you to
the aircraft software version. The aircraft scroll through the available characters.
version number is part of the aircraft type When the desired character is seen, then
title. If the proper aircraft software is not on press the g arrow key to move to the next
the CADU, then upload the aircraft setup block.
file to the CADU. Refer to Software/Data
Management Instructions (WP 010 00). If (9) From the Entry Form display (Figure 9), enter
the proper aircraft software can not be the complete tail number of the aircraft. Up to seven digits
located then contact Sikorsky Aircraft or can be entered for the tail number. Press DO when tail
GE Aviation Systems representative. number entry is complete.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 11

(10) From the main menu (Figure 11), press the d f. On the CADU, press LAMP to turn the CADU
or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO. screen back-light on.

(11) From The Flight Plans menu (Figure 10), press NOTE
the d or f keys to highlight OIL COOL and press DO.
Oil Cooler Vibration Check may be com-
(12) Make sure that the Aircraft Type and Flight pleted with both engines or any one engine
Plan are properly specified (Figure 11). Repeat steps (4) running the rotor at 100% Nr.
through (11) until all required menu items are properly
specified. g. With a qualified pilot at the controls run helicopter
at flat pitch, 100% Nr rotor speed, with the pedals cen-
tered (Operator’s Manual).
NOTE
NOTE
The Flight I.D. does not exist prior to mea-
suring vibration. Flight I.D. identifies previ- You may exit the measurement selection
ously measured vibration data that is window (Figure 12) at any time by press-
stored in memory. A new Flight I.D. is ing QUIT. If you wish to save the data that
automatically created by the test set each was measured then, from the Action menu,
time F1 (MEASURE) is pressed and data is highlight Save and Exit and press DO. If
stored. no data was measured or the data is not to
be stored then, from the Action menu,
The test set automatically checks memory to highlight Abandon Flight, press DO, press
make sure that there is enough room to g key until Yes is seen next to Continue?,
store all of the data that can be measured and press DO. Go to step m to continue
by the selected flight plan. If the CADU this procedure if the measurement mode
indicates that insufficient memory exists, was exited.
then download data from the CADU to a
PC. Delete data from the CADU. Compress The CADU and DAU power must be on for
the CADU memory. Refer to Software/Data a minimum of 20 seconds before proceed-
Management Instructions (WP 010 00). ing any further with this procedure. If a
measurement is tried before the 20 second
(13) From the main menu (Figure 11), press F1 wait period, an error will be noted. Clear
(MEASURE) to enter the measurement mode (Figure 12). the error by pressing QUIT, wait 20 sec-
onds then retry the measurement.
(14) From the Measurement Selection Window
(Figure 12), press F4 until LMT ON is seen above the F4 If an error message is displayed on the
key. CADU screen, then write down the error
and the recommended troubleshooting
NOTE steps, press QUIT to clear the error, per-
form the first recommended troubleshoot-
ing step, then repeat the measurement.
28 VDC power must be available at the
Repeat this process until all recommended
DAU, and the CADU must be connected to
troubleshooting steps have been taken. If
the DAU to proceed any farther with this
problems persist then go to the Operation
procedure.
And Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
troubleshooting.
You may view a brief setup description by
pressing F3 (SETUP). Procedure references, If an error is seen on the CADU screen that
cable connections, and general procedure does not provide troubleshooting steps,
is provided in the SETUP section. then press QUIT to clear the error, and
retry the measurement. If the same error
e. On the DAU, set the DAU power switch to the ON persists then reboot the CADU (WP 010
position. 00), toggle the DAU power switch off and

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 12

i. Press the DO key to start measurement. As the

measurement is being taken, one of two measurement
screens will be displayed (Figure 14). The two screens are
S−70i 53 OIL COOL 12−NOV−10 seen because the VERT and F/A measurements are taken
one after the other.
COOLER
j. When the measurement is complete and the test set
is processing the data, the screen shown in Figure 15 will
be seen. Do not press any keys at this time, wait until the
CADU screen prompts for a user input.
* Oil Cooler − Flat Pitch 100% Nr
k. If limit checking was turned on prior to the mea-
[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit
surement then continue the procedure, otherwise go to
DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON step l.

NOTE

F1 F2 F3 F4 If an error was encountered during mea-

surement then 9?9 will be seen under MEA-
SURED on the LIMITS display (Figure 17).

The ALL LIMITS display allows you to view

the measured vibration amplitude, if the
IM1046 vibration is within limit. The vibration
amplitude is not displayed on the LIMITS
SA

Figure 13. Measurement Initiation screen if the measurement is within the

limit.
then on again (this reboots the DAU), wait
20 seconds, and retry the measurement. If (1) If limit checking was turned on prior to the
problems persist then replace the CADU- measurement, then one of two LIMITS displays will be
to-DAU cable, the DAU, and the CADU seen. If all measurements are within acceptance limits
respectively. Retry the measurement after then the LIMITS display shown in Figure 16 will be seen. If
each component is replaced. any one of the two measurements exceeded acceptance
limits then the LIMITS display shown in Figure 17 will be
If a Communications Failure (Error 8199) seen.
or a CADU-DAU Comms Failure (Error
32756) is noted and all of the on-screen (2) Press the d arrow key to see the ALL LIMITS
troubleshooting has failed, then disconnect screen (Figure 18) and enter the measured ips level on the
the tracker cable and retry the measure- Oil Cooler Vibration Check Data Sheet (Figure 27).
ment (Shorted tracker cables have resulted
(3) Exit the LIMITS or ALL LIMITS display by press-
in communication errors). If the measure-
ing QUIT twice.
ment worked after the tracker cable was
disconnected, then replace the tracker
NOTE
cable. If the problem persists or the tracker
cable was not connected then suspect the If a measurement error was experienced
DAU-to-CADU cable, the DAU, and the then either 9partial9 or 9failed9 will be seen
CADU in that order next to the test state. If 9failed9 is seen then
NO data was measured. If 9partial9 is seen
h. From the Measurement Selection Window (Figure then only one of the two measurements
12), highlight COOLER and press DO. This prepares the were successful. Perform the troubleshoot-
DAU for the measurement. When the DAU is ready an ing steps provided on the CADU with a
asterisk mark will be seen at the start of the measurement measurement attempt between each
prompt (Figure 13). troubleshooting action.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 13

MEASURING MEASURING

Tachometer Freq (RPM) : 6,000 Tachometer Freq (RPM) : 6,000

Flight Plan : OIL COOL Flight Plan : OIL COOL

Test State : COOLER Test State : COOLER

Acquisition No. : 01 of 02 Acquisition No. : 02 of 02

Measuring Measuring

FB2312
SA

Figure 14. Measurement Screen

Processing Data . . .

* * * Pilot Transition * * *

Standby . . . While data is loading

FG0536
SA

Figure 15. Data Processing Screen

n. From the Finish menu (Figure 20), highlight Finish
and press DO to exit the measurement mode.
If all vibration was successfully measured
but you wish to re-measure data, then from o. From the End of Flight menu (Figure 21), highlight
the Finish menu, highlight Continue, press Main Menu and press DO.
DO, and go to step h. to re-measure data.
The new data will overwrite the previously p. If vibration was successfully measured and the Oil
measured data. Cooler Vibration Check Data Sheet was not filled out then
refer to Recalling Oil Cooling Data (PARA 8), and fill out
l. If vibration was measured successfully then the Fin- the Oil Cooler Vibration Check Data Sheet. If the data
ish menu (Figure 20) will be seen, continue with step m. If sheet was filled out previously then continue the proce-
a measurement error was encountered then the measure- dure.
ment selection window (Figure 19) will be seen, correct
measurement problem and repeat procedure starting at q. Press OFF to turn the CADU off.
step h.
r. If both the VERTICAL and FORE/AFT oil cooler
m. Shutdown the helicopter. 1/rev vibration levels are 1.00 ips or less the Oil Cooler

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 14

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Measurements are within specified limits

Press QUIT to return to MEASUREMENT menu

Press UP to view all limits

IM1047
SA

Figure 16. 9LIMITS9 Display (All Measured Data Within Limits)

LIMITS ALL LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10 S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1 PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED LIMIT MEASURED
COOLER Fore / Aft 1 / Rev 1.00 1.15 ips COOLER Fore / Aft 1 / Rev 1.00 1.15 ips
COOLER Vertical 1 / Rev 1.00 0.35 ips

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down [LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All [DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle Exc’d

IM1048 IM1049
SA SA

Figure 17. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Exceeds Figure 18. 9ALL LIMITS9 Display
Limits)
or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
Vibration task is complete. Remove all test equipment. indicates low power (internal batteries
Refer to Oil Cooler Vibration Check, Test Equipment require charging) then perform one of the
Removal (PARA 10). following. One method is to plug the CADU
into the DAU using the CADU-to DAU
s. If either the VERTICAL or FORE/AFT oil cooler cable and turn DAU power on. A second
1/rev vibration levels are greater than 1.00 ips then go to method is to plug the CADU Battery
the Oil Cooler Troubleshooting Flowchart (Figure 28). Charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
receptacle and plug the probe end of the
8. RECALLING OIL COOLER DATA.
Battery Charger into the CADU. The CADU
NOTE receptacle is located under the credit card
access panel on top edge of the CADU.
If the CADU is being operated on internal
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 15

highlight Flight I.D. and press DO, a com-

plete list of all data in memory will be dis-
played.
S−70i 53 OIL COOL 12−NOV−10

(1) From the main menu (Figure 22), press the d

COOLER partial
or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.

(2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 7), press

the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and ver-
sions 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable, and press
DO.
[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit
DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON
(3) From the main menu (Figure 22), press the d
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.

F1 F2 F3 F4 (4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 8),

press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
ber and press DO.

(5) From the main menu (Figure 22), press the d

or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.
IM1050
SA
(6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 10), press
the d or f keys to highlight OIL COOL and press DO.
Figure 19. Measurement Selection Window After
Unsuccessful Data Measurement
(7) From the main menu (Figure 22), press the d
a. Get the copy of the Oil Cooler Vibration Check or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.
Data Sheet (Figure 5) that is being used for the aircraft
currently checked. NOTE

NOTE
Data is stored in memory with the most
recent data at the top of the list. Therefore
Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type, if the most recent data is being recalled
Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. are then simply select the first Flight I.D.
specified prior to recalling data. If the
wrong parameter is specified before recall-
ing data then incorrect data will be recalled (8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 23),
and incorrect decisions may be made. press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
press DO.
b. From the main menu (Figure 22), make sure that
the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. c. With the correct Flight I.D. specified on the main
are correctly specified. If all of the parameters are correct menu (Figure 22), press F2 (DISPLAY) to view data.
go to step c, otherwise continue the procedure:
d. From the Display Mode menu (Figure 24), high-
NOTE light Summary Displays and press DO.

You should change only the parameters e. From the Select Summary Display menu (Figure
that are improperly specified. 25), highlight Oil Cooler Vibe Data and press DO.

To view all data stored in memory, high- f. From the summary display data page (Figure 26)
light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to enter the VERT and F/A ips in the Amp (ips) block on the
change all main menu items to 9?9. Then Oil Cooler Vibration Check Data Sheet (Figure 27).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 16

Finish

Finish
Continue

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0540
SA

Figure 20. 9FINISH9 Menu

End Of Flight

Diagnostics
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0541
SA

Figure 21. 9End Of Flight9 Menu

g. Once all required data is entered on the Data b. Disconnect the oil cooler output shaft from the #2
Sheet, then press QUIT until the main menu (Figure 22) is section of the tail rotor drive shaft. Refer to applicable
seen. maintenance manual.

c. While viewing the shaft looking aft, turn the oil

h. Return to Oil Cooler Vibration Measurement pro- cooler output shaft counterclockwise 120 degrees, or turn
cedure (PARA 7, and continue the procedure starting at the tail rotor drive shaft clockwise 120 degrees.
step q).
d. Reconnect the oil cooler output shaft to the #2 sec-
9. INDEXING OIL COOLER OUTPUT SHAFT. tion of the tail rotor drive shaft. Refer to applicable main-
tenance manual.
a. Label the oil cooler output shaft flange and the e. Repeat the oil cooler vibration check measure-
flexible coupling so that it is obvious what the initial flange ment. Refer to Oil Cooler Vibration Measurement (PARA
to flexible coupling position was. 7).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 17

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:29:41

Aircraft Type S−70i

Tail Number 53
Flight Plan OIL COOL
Flight I.D. 12−NOV−10 at 14:11

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1051
SA

Figure 22. Main Menu With Selected Flight I.D.

Select Flight ID PAGE 1 OF 1

S−70i 53 OIL COOL 12 NOV 10 14:11

S−70i 53 OIL COOL 12 NOV 10 13:05
S−70i 53 OIL COOL 12 NOV 10 11:00

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Flight [QUIT] Exit

IM1052
SA

Figure 23. 9Select Flight I.D.9 Menu

10. OIL COOLER VIBRATION CHECK, TEST ometer block is a permanent installation. Return the accel-
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL. erometers to the appropriate case.

a. Disconnect the accelerometer cables and remove

the two accelerometers from the oil cooler. Do not remove
the accelerometer block from the oil cooler, the acceler-

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 18

d. Disconnect the Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) cable

CAUTION from both the CDU and the DAU. Remove both the CDU-
to-DAU cable and CDU from the aircraft, and return to
the appropriate case.
Be careful not to cut aircraft wiring or
accelerometer cables when cutting tiedown e. Disconnect the CADU-to-DAU cable from the
straps that secured accelerometer wires. CADU and DAU. Remove both the CADU-to-DAU cable
and DAU from the aircraft and return to the appropriate
b. Remove all accelerometer cables and return them case.
to the appropriate case.
f. If all vibration tasks are complete on that tail num-
c. Disconnect the 28 VDC power cable from the DAU ber aircraft, then download data from the CADU to PC,
and from the aircraft 28 VDC receptacle, remove the this manual. Delete data from CADU memory, this
cable from the aircraft, and return to the appropriate manual. Compress CADU memory, this manual and
case. return CADU to case.

Display Mode

One Test State

Complete Flight
Trend Flights
View Limits
Summary Displays

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FG0544
SA

Figure 24. 9Display Mode9 Menu

Select Summary Display PAGE 1 OF 1

Oil Cooler Vibe Data

PRINT ALL DISPLAYS

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Display [QUIT] Exit

FB2463
SA

Figure 25. 9Select Summary Display9 Menu

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 19

S−70i 53 OIL COOL

FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
PEAK VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
STATE CHAN AMP(ips) FREQ(rpm)
Oil Cooler 1 / Rev Vibe Data
COOLER OC F / A 1.15 4110
COOLER OC Vert 0.35 4110

Enter these values on the data sheet.

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

IM1053
SA

Figure 26. Oil Cooler Vibe Summary Display Data Page

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 20

OIL COOLER VIBRATION CHECK DATA SHEET

(Criteria: All Oil Cooler 1 / Rev Vibrations shall be 1.00 ips or less at Flat Pitch, 100% Nr)

Run OC F/A OC Vert

Number (ips) MAINTENANCE ACTION
(ips)

1 1.15 0.35 Index output shaft 120 deg.

VERTICAL
ACCELEROMETER

STA
385

U
P
WL
284

D
FW

U
FORE / AFT P
ACCELEROMETER FWD

FAN & RADIATOR ASSEMBLY

STA STA STA STA STA STA

342.9 380 470.9 521 591.8 664

STA
752

SECTION I

OIL COOLER
DRIVE SHAFT SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IV SECTION V SECTION VI

S−70A/C TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM FB2320

SA

Figure 27. Sample Oil Cooler Data Sheet

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 005 00
Page 21/(22 Blank)

INSPECT FOR CRACKS AND WORKING RIVETS AROUND

WHERE OIL COOLER ATTACHES TO AIRFRAME, AND
NEAR VISCOUS BEARING THAT CONNECTS OIL
COOLER OUTPUT SHAFT TO #2 TRDS.

WERE ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND?

YES NO

CORRECT ALL DISCREPANCIES AND RE−MEASURE HAVE THE OIL COOLER TO AIRFRAME
OIL COOLER VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ATTACHMENT BOLTS BEEN LOOSENED TO RELIEVE
OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT, PRE−LOAD THAT MAY EXIST?
THIS WP.
YES NO

CHECK THAT DRIVE SHAFT VISCOUS DAMPER LOOSEN ALL BOLTS THAT SECURE THE OIL COOLER
AT AFT END OF OIL COOLER IS PROPERLY SHIMMED TO THE AIRFRAME TO RELIEVE ANY PRE−LOAD THAT MAY
TO PREVENT AXIAL PRE−LOAD. EXIST. TIGHTEN AND TORQUE BOLTS
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
WERE ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND? RE−MEASURE OIL COOLER VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE
WITH OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT,
YES NO THIS WP.

CORRECT DRIVE SHAFT VISCOUS DAMPER SHIMMING HAS THE SECTION 2 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL). BEEN INDEXED AT THE FLEXIBLE COUPLING RELATIVE
TO THE OIL COOLER OUTPUT SHAFT?
RE−MEASURE OIL COOLER VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE
WITH OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP. YES NO

HAS THE OIL COOLER DRIVE SHAFT BEEN ADJUSTED INDEX THE SECTION 2 DRIVE SHAFT 120 DEGREES
FOR MINIMUM RUNOUT? RELATIVE TO THE OIL COOLER OUTPUT SHAFT
AT THE FLEXIBLE COUPLING (REFER TO INDEXING
YES NO OIL COOLER OUTPUT SHAFT, THIS WP).
NOTE
THIS CORRECTIVE ACTION IS TO BE DONE A
SECOND TIME IF THE FIRST INDEXING DOES NOT
REDUCE VIBRATION ADEQUATELY.
HAS THE OIL COOLER BEEN REPLACED? RE−MEASURE OIL COOLER VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE
WITH OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT,
YES NO THIS WP.

REPLACE THE OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY INDEX SECTION 2 DRIVE SHAFT RELATIVE TO THE
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL). OIL COOLER EXIT SHAFT TO THE POSITION THAT
RESULTED IN THE LOWEST VIBRATION.
RE−MEASURE OIL COOLER VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE
WITH OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT, PERFORM OIL COOLER EXIT SHAFT RUNOUT CHECK
THIS WP. (REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
ADJUST OIL COOLER EXIT SHAFT FOR MINIMUM
RUNOUT BY INDEXING FAN SECTION (FRONT SECTION)
OF OIL COOLER DRIVE SHAFT RELATIVE TO THE EXIT
REPLACE THE SECTION 2 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT SHAFT SECTION (AFT SECTION) OF THE OIL COOLER
(DRIVE SHAFT IMMEDIATELY AFT OF DRIVE SHAFT. SIX ORIENTATIONS ARE POSSIBLE
THE OIL COOLER EXIT SHAFT), (REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL).
(REFER TO APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE MANUAL). RE−MEASURE OIL COOLER VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE
RE−MEASURE OIL COOLER VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT,
WITH OIL COOLER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.
THIS WP. FB3233
SA

Figure 28. Oil Cooler Troubleshooting Flowchart

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

RADS-AT Operation and Maintenance Manual ........................................................ 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page No.

Aircraft Configuration .............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Conditions ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Procedure, Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Adjusting Main Rotor Pitch Control Rod ............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Determining Ground Tracking PCR Adjustments ......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main Rotor Ground Track Measurement ............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Main Rotor, Test Equipment Installation ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Recalling Ground Track Data ........................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety Wire Pitch Control Rods ..................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Vibration Task Sequencing .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

Model 991 Accelerometer (54 mV/g) (Wilcoxon

Research)
29103900 Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29104700 28 VDC Power Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29105403 Magnetic RPM Sensor Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29105605 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 25 ft
length (GE Aviation Systems)
29283200 Cable Distribution Unit Cable (CDU) (GE
Aviation Systems)
29288400 or 3030AN Magnetic RPM Sensor
29310700 UTD-Tracker (GE Aviation Systems)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 2

Support Equipment Required (Cont)

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

29313000 L-shaped Accelerometer Mount Bracket (GE

Aviation Systems)
29315000 CADU Battery Charger (GE Aviation
Systems)
29325601 DAU-to-CADU Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29325701 or 29725504 UTD Cable - 25 ft (GE Aviation Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE
Aviation Systems)
29481400 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29743200 UTD Bracket, S-70i (GE Aviation Systems)
3M-7610 Reflective Tape (3M)
- Torque Wrench (0 - 30 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (30 - 200 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (100 - 600 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (150 - 750 in. lbs.)

Warnings and Cautions for hazardous materials listed in this manual are designed to apprise
personnel of hazards associated with such items when they come in contact with them by
actual use. Consult your local Safety and Health staff concerning specific personnel protective
requirements and appropriate handling and emergency procedures for additional
information related to hazardous materials.

Materials Required

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature

MS20995NC32 Safety Wire

TT-I-735 Isopropyl Alcohol
- Masking Tape
5975-00-984-6582 or equivalent Tiedown Straps

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 3

1. VIBRATION TASK SEQUENCING (Figure 1). c. Once the flight tuning begins, the initial flat pitch
track limit is no longer applicable. This procedure simply
a. The Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking task can be prepares the aircraft for the initial flight after main rotor
done at the same time the Tail Rotor Balance, Engine maintenance.
Output Shaft Balance, or Oil Cooler Check tasks, (refer to
this manual for above tasks), are being completed. It is d. This procedure will use main rotor PCR adjust-
not necessary that criteria on any one of the above listed ments to reduce the total track split between the four main
tasks be satisfied before the Main Rotor Flat Pitch Track- rotor blades.
ing task is performed.
e. Prior to performing this task it is highly recom-
b. The main rotor ground balancing task (this mended that rotor system inspections be completed. These
manual), must be performed after flat pitch tracking is inspections are recommended for two reasons.
completed. The two tasks must be done sequentially.
(1) These inspections are intended to identify worn
c. The main rotor flat pitch tracking task is required if components that may compromise the main rotor 1/rev
any of the following conditions are true. flight tuning process and result in an increased number of
flights.
(1) One or more main rotor blades have been
replaced. (2) These inspections are intended to reduce the
frequency that the main rotor 1/rev flight tuning task is
(2) One or more Pitch Control Rods (PCRs) have required by identifying worn components that if discov-
been replaced. ered after the main rotor 1/rev flight tuning task were
completed, would require the main rotor 1/rev flight tun-
(3) One or more PCR ends have been replaced. ing task to be repeated.

f. Main Rotor Ground Balancing (this manual), and

(4) Main rotor PCRs were adjusted during main
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning (WP 008 00), MUST be
rotor re-rig procedures
performed after this task is completed.
(5) The main rotor head was removed.
3. TEST CONDITIONS.
(6) The main rotor QCU was removed.
NOTE
(7) One or more main rotor spindles removed. This task may become difficult in high and
gusting winds. Make sure the aircraft is
d. If the main rotor ground tracking task is required it always heading into the wind.
must be completed prior to flying the aircraft.
a. This task can be accomplished under any light
e. If the main rotor flat pitch tracking task is required, conditions. For dusk, dawn, or night flying, make sure
the ground balancing task is also required. that reflective tape is installed on all four blades. Refer to
Main Rotor Test Equipment Installation (PARA 6).
f. If the main rotor flat pitch tracking task is required,
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning is also required. 4. AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION.

2. PURPOSE.
WARNING
a. This procedure contains instructions for setting
main rotor blade flat pitch track on the ground for the
S-70i aircraft. Before every main rotor flat pitch tracking,
inspect spindle lugs and main rotor blade
b. Main rotor flat pitch track is set to provide a con- cuff lugs for any visual damage. If found,
sistent starting point for main rotor 1/rev flight tuning replace spindle immediately. If found on
(this manual), after maintenance has been performed on main rotor blade cuff lugs, replace main
the rotor system. rotor blade immediately.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 4

ALL TASKS WITHIN DOTTED BOX CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED SIMULTANEOUSLY

WP 003 00 WP 005 00 WP 006 00

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE OIL COOLER VIBRATION MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING
CHECK
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. 1. MAIN ROTOR BLADE REPLACED.
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF TAIL
ROTOR RETENTION PLATE BOLTS. 2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVING OF 2. PCR OR PC ROD END REPLACED.
ANY OIL COOLER SHAFT ATTACHMENT
3. THE ADJUSTMENT OF ANY TAIL
BOLTS (INPUT OR OUTPUT). 3. PCR’S ADJUSTED DURING MR RIG.
ROTOR PITCH LINKS.
3. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY 4. MAIN ROTOR HEAD REMOVED.
BOLTS THAT SECURE OIL COOLER
TO AIRFRAME. 5. MAIN ROTOR QCU REMOVED.

6. MR SPINDLE REMOVED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. 100% NR 100%NR, NOSE INTO WIND

WP 004 00 WP 007 00
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING
BALANCE TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: 1. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. FLAT PITCH TRACKING, THIS MANUAL.
2. GROUND VIBRATION DISCREPANCY
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTS.
BOLTS THAT ATTACH THE ENGINE
SHAFT TO THE INPUT MODULE 3. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
FLANGE. 1 / REV TUNING, THIS MANUAL.
4. BLADE RETENTION PIN REPLACED.
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND.

WP 008 00
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
2. FOLLOWING MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING.
3. INFLIGHT VIBRATION DISCREPANCY EXISTS.
4. MAIN ROTOR DAMPER OR DAMPER BEARING REPLACED.
5. MAIN ROTOR PCR BEARING REPLACED.
6. MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAP REPLACED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS WITH EXTERNAL TANKS
FP GROUND, 100% NR FP GROUND, 100% NR
OGE HOVER, 100% NR OGE HOVER, 100% NR
80 KTS, 100% NR 80 KTS, 100% NR
120 KTS, 100% NR 120 KTS, 100% NR
140KTS, 100% NR VH, 100% NR
VH, 100% NR

IM1025
SA

Figure 1. Vibration Task Sequencing

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 5

CAUTION Make sure that the main rotor blades are

color coded correctly. Any problems with
the above installations may result in PCR
Make sure that all accelerometers are ori- adjustments that cause blade track split to
ented properly and all accelerometer increase. Furthermore, these installation
cables are connected to the proper recep- errors may result in unnecessary main rotor
tacle on the DAU and CDU. head inspection or maintenance on the air-
craft.
NOTE
NOTE
It is highly recommended that the following
inspections be performed prior to the initial
The accelerometers are not used for ground
ground run, (refer to applicable
tracking but will be used immediately after-
maintenance manual). Replace any worn
wards for ground balance, and then for the
components.
flight check. It is recommended that the
accelerometers be installed at this time so
• Main rotor PCR bearings for wear.
the transition into the following tasks will be
quick and efficient.
• Main rotor damper bearings for wear.

• Swashplate, scissors, and spherical bear- a. Install accelerometers on pilot and copilot bulk-
ings for wear. heads as follows (Figure 2):

• Main rotor blade dampers for servicing. (1) Install accelerometers on L brackets,
29313000, and torque to 20 inch pounds (Detail A). Two
• Main rotor blade tip caps for cracks. accelerometers and brackets are required.

The aircraft must be ready for ground runs up to 100% NOTE

Nr, at flat pitch, with main rotor blades installed and
helicopter nose pointing into the wind.
Copilot and Pilot accelerometers are
5. TEST PROCEDURE, MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH installed so that the connector ends of both
TRACKING. accelerometers are pointing straight down.

Install test equipment. Refer to MAIN ROTOR, TEST (2) Using bolts (MS270396-1-14 or equivalent),
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, this WP. nuts (MS21044N3 or equivalent), and washers
(NAS1149B0363H or equivalent), attach one accelerom-
6. MAIN ROTOR, TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLA- eter and bracket to bulkhead behind the copilot seat, STA
TION. 247, WL 245, BL 45 left. Attach the second accelerom-
eter and bracket to bulkhead behind the pilot seat, STA
247, WL 245, BL 45 right. Make sure that both acceler-
CAUTION ometers are oriented with the connector ends pointing
down as shown in Detail A and make sure that both
accelerometer brackets are tight.
Make sure that all accelerometers are ori-
ented properly and all accelerometer
cables are connected to the proper recep- CAUTION
tacle on the DAU and CDU.

Make sure that the BLACK (BLK) main rotor To avoid damaging accelerometer or
blade is over the nose of the aircraft when accelerometer cable be sure that the 3-pin
the magnetic RPM sensor and interrupter socket end of the cable is attached to the
are aligned. accelerometer.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 6

(3) Connect the 3-pin end of one accelerometer (2) Install cockpit overhead lateral accelerometer
cable to the copilot accelerometer. Using masking tape and bracket at station 247, WL 261, BL 4 LH using screw
label the 4-pin end of the accelerometer cable as ACC 1 that attaches forward cabin overhead interior panel to
- CPLT_V. nutplate in cabin ceiling. Connector end of accelerometer
must be oriented to the right. If bracket mounting hole is
(4) Connect the 3-pin end of the second acceler- too large for screw head, use suitable washer.
ometer cable to the pilot accelerometer. Using masking
tape label the 4-pin end of the accelerometer cable as (3) Connect the 3-pin end of an accelerometer
ACC 2 - PLT_V. cable to the cockpit overhead lateral accelerometer. Using
masking tape label the 4-pin end of the accelerometer
cable as ACC 11 - OH_LAT.
CAUTION
(4) Route cockpit overhead lateral accelerometer
cable to the forward cabin area where the DAU will be
Route cockpit accelerometer cables so as
placed.
not to interfere with any helicopter moving
components. Use extra caution when rout-
ing cable around the cockpit pilot seats. c. Install pilot heel accelerometer P_Heel as follows
Make sure accelerometer cables are routed (Figure 2):
clear of the flight controls and do not inter-
fere with the operation of the cockpit seats. (1) Install accelerometer on L bracket, 29313000,
and torque to 20 inch pounds (Detail B).
Make sure that cables are secure and do
not interfere with emergency escape routes. NOTE

NOTE
The pilot heel P_Heel accelerometer is
installed so that the connector end of the
The cockpit overhead lateral accelerometer
accelerometers is pointing straight up.
is required if the helicopter has a external
tank system installed. If external tanks are
not installed the cockpit overhead lateral (2) On the right side of the cockpit center console,
accelerometer is not required. just aft of the pilots ICS footswitch on the floor, locate the
vertical line of screws that runs up from the floor at the
(5) Route the pilot and copilot accelerometer intersection where the console width increases (approxi-
cables to the forward cabin area where the DAU will be mately STA 198, WL 215, BL 9R). Remove the second
placed. screw from the cockpit floor and attach the accelerometer
and bracket with the same screw. Make sure that the
b. If helicopter has a external tank system installed accelerometer is oriented with the connector end pointing
install cockpit overhead lateral accelerometer as follows up as shown in detail B, and make sure that the acceler-
(Figure 2, Detail C): ometer bracket is sufficiently tight.

NOTE
CAUTION
The overhead interior panel that the cockpit
overhead lateral accelerometer is installed
to is the panel located between stations To avoid damaging accelerometer or
247 and 295. accelerometer cable make sure that the
3-pin socket end of the cable is attached to
The connector end of the cockpit overhead the accelerometer.
lateral accelerometer must be oriented to
the right. (3) Connect the 3-pin end of an accelerometer
cable to the P_Heel accelerometer. Using masking tape
(1) Install accelerometer on L bracket, 29313000, label the 4-pin end of the accelerometer cable as ACC 3
and torque to 20 inch-pounds. - P_HEEL.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 7

A
BOLT

T
BRACKET ON
(PILOT) (COPILOT) FR

A
WL
245

ACCELEROMETER
ACCELEROMETER
(PILOT) (COPILOT)
C CABLE
(PILOT) (COPILOT)

PILOT HEEL
ACCELEROMETER
B
"L" BRACKET

B SCREW

FR
ON
T

CENTER
CONSOLE

C
(USE ONLY IF EXTERNAL TANK SYSTEM IS INSTALLED)

STA
247

WL
261

RE
AR BL
4
LH

SCREW

BRACKET

COCKPIT LATERAL
CABLE ACCELEROMETER
(TORQUE 20 IN. LBS)
FB4372A
SA

Figure 2. Accelerometer Installation

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 8

CAUTION CAUTION

Route cockpit accelerometer cables so as Route cable so as not to interfere with any
not to interfere with any helicopter moving rotating or moving components. Magnetic
components. Use extra caution when rout- RPM sensor cable must have sufficient slack
ing cable around the cockpit pilot seats. at rotor head (about 12 inches) to allow full
Make sure accelerometer cable is routed range of movement of swashplate.
clear of the flight controls and does not
interfere with the operation of the cockpit (3) Connect magnetic RPM sensor cable,
seats. 29105403, to magnetic RPM sensor. Route cable down
along main gearbox through drip pan and into cabin.
Use nylon tie down straps as necessary to secure cable to
Make sure that cables are secure and do aircraft.
not interfere with emergency escape routes.
e. Install UTD and cable as follows (Figure 4).
(4) Route the pilot heel accelerometer cable to the
forward cabin area where the DAU and CDU will be (1) Remove the 12 screws from the nose avionics
placed. bay door vent screen. Remove the vent screen.

(2) Install S-70i UTD bracket, 29743200, over the

d. Install magnetic RPM sensor and cable as follows nose avionics bay door vent opening utilizing the middle
(Figure 3): three screw holes in the top and bottom rows of vent
screen screw holes. Install the UTD bracket with six of the
(1) Remove outer jamnut from magnetic RPM sen- screws that were used for the vent screen.
sor, 29288400 or 3030AN, and install sensor into
bracket on stationary swashplate. Loosely install jamnut. (3) Tighten the six screws that attach the UTD
Turn main rotor head so magnetic RPM sensor and inter- bracket to the nose avionics bay door.
rupter bracket attached to rotating swashplate are in
alignment. (4) Attach UTD (P/N 29310700) to the UTD
bracket using the two UTD mount bolts. Make sure that
the arrow on the UTD is pointing in the direction of main
NOTE
rotor blade rotation. Adjust the UTD angle so that it is
pointing as far down as the UTD bracket will permit,
When the magnetic RPM sensor and inter- which will be approximately 38 degrees from the horizon
rupter bracket are aligned the BLACK main (Figure 4). TORQUE UTD ATTACHMENT BOLTS TO 100
rotor blade must be over the nose of the INCH POUNDS.
aircraft as shown in Figure 3.

It may be necessary to remove bracket with CAUTION

magnetic RPM sensor from stationary
swashplate to obtain clearance required to
Route UTD-to-DAU cable so as not to inter-
safety wire jamnuts.
fere with any helicopter moving
components. Use extra caution when rout-
(2) Adjust magnetic RPM sensor so that gap ing cable through cockpit. Make sure cable
between sensor and interrupter bracket is 0.022 to 0.024 does not interfere with the operation of the
inch. Tighten outer jamnut on magnetic RPM sensor to tail rotor pedals, cockpit seat, and aircraft
where a sharp increase in torque is felt, then tighten 1/6 emergency brake.
to 1/3 turn more. Safety wire inner and outer jamnuts
together. If necessary, remove two bolts that secure Leave sufficient slack in the UTD-to-DAU
bracket with magnetic RPM sensor to stationary swash- cable so the avionics bay door can be fully
plate, remove bracket, safety wire jamnuts, and reinstall opened without preloading the UTD-to-
bracket on stationary swashplate. DAU cable.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 9

BLACK BLADE

MAGNETIC RPM SENSOR

IS LOCATED HERE NOTE
BLACK BLADE MUST
ROTATING STATIONARY BE OVER NOSE WHEN
SWASHPLATE SWASHPLATE MAGNETIC RPM SENSOR
AND INTERRUPTER ARE
RED BLADE ALIGNED.

INTERRUPTER
BRACKET
YELLOW BLADE

MEASURE GAP
HERE 0.022 TO MAGNETIC RPM
0.024 INCH SENSOR

OUTER BLUE BLADE

JAMNUT

FG0550
SA

Figure 3. Magnetic RPM Sensor Installation And Main Rotor Blade Orientation with Magnetic RPM Sensor and
Interrupter Aligned

UTD LINE
A UTD LINE OF SIGHT
OF SIGHT

UTD UNIVERSAL
TRACKING DEVICE

38O

O
UTD ANGLE (38 )
ADJUSTED ALL THE
WAY DOWN ON THE
TRACKER BRACKET
UTD ATTACHMENT BOLTS FB3234
SA

Figure 4. UTD Installation

NOTE (5) Connect UTD cable, 29325701, to UTD. Route
UTD cable through the air vent, into the avionics bay,
UTD-to-DAU cable, 29325701, is through the cockpit along left side of center console, and
interchangeable with UTD-to-DAU cable, into the forward cabin area. Secure cable to left-hand
29725504. If UTD-to-DAU cable, side of center console with tape as required. Use tiedown
29725504, is being used, secure the hard- strap to secure the UTD cable to UTD bracket.
wired grounding strap to the end of the
cable.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 10

f. If tracking in low light conditions or at night, do the (1) Connect DAU-to-CADU cable, 29325601, to
following: the CADU receptacle on the DAU (Figure 7).

(1) For aircraft without EPP cut four pieces of (2) Connect DAU-to-CADU cable, 29325601, to
reflective tape, with each piece being four (4) feet long. the receptacle on the CADU. To avoid damaging the
For aircraft with EPP cut four pieces of reflective tape, with CADU, place the CADU in a protected yet accessible
each piece being five (5) feet long. location.

(3) Connect the 28 VDC Power cable, 29104700,

to the aircraft 28 VDC power receptacle (STA 293, right
side, cabin ceiling) and then to the 28 VDC receptacle on
the DAU.
Isopropyl Alcohol, TT-I-735 25
(4) Connect the magnetic RPM sensor cable,
(2) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean area of blade 29105403, to the TACHO 1 receptacle on the DAU.
where reflective tape will be applied (Figure 5).
(5) Connect the Copilot Bulkhead accelerometer
cable (marked with ACC 1 - CPLT_V) to the ACC 1 recep-
(3) Apply the reflective tape on the underside of
tacle of the DAU.
the blade (Figure 5 and Figure 6).
(6) Connect the Pilot Bulkhead accelerometer
(4) Apply tape to all four main rotor blades. cable (marked with ACC 2 - PLT_V) to the ACC 2 recep-
tacle of the DAU.
g. Place DAU, 29481400, and CADU, 29481301,
in forward cabin area and secure DAU to aircraft using (7) Connect the Pilot heel accelerometer cable
tiedown rings in the floor. Make the following cabling (marked with ACC 3 - P_HEEL) to the ACC 3 receptacle of
connections (Figure 7). the DAU.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 11

REFLECTIVE TAPE

4 FEET (125 cm)

A 4 FOOT STRIP OF REFLECTIVE TAPE MUST BE APPLIED TO THE UNDERSIDE OF EACH

MAIN ROTOR BLADE FOR NIGHT TIME TRACKING. THE REFLECTIVE TAPE MUST BE PLACED
AT THE TRAILING EDGE OF THE BLADE IN THE LOCATION SHOWN ABOVE. FB3235
SA

Figure 5. Night Time Tracking Setup

REFLECTIVE
5 FEET TAPE

HUB−END OF 18" INBOARD OF

TRIM TAB HUB−END EDGE
TRIM TAB
6 INCHES

IM1054
SA

Figure 6. Reflective Tape Placement for Wide Chord Blade (EPP)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 12

COPILOT BULKHEAD PILOT HEEL MAGNETIC RPM POWER ON

ACCELEROMETER ACCELEROMETER SENSOR CABLE CADU CABLE LIGHT
(COCKPIT LEFT SIDE)

DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

NIGHT
DAY TEST

ACC 1 ACC 3 FUSE

TACHO 1 TRACKER
CADU 15 AMP
MODE STROBE

ON

TACHO 2
ACC 2 ACC 4 OFF
TRACKER 1 28VDC POWER
MULTI−CH

PILOT BULKHEAD UTD CABLE 28V DC

ACCELEROMETER POWER CABLE
(COCKPIT RIGHT SIDE) FB2323
SA

Figure 7. DAU Receptacle Layout for Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking, Ground Balancing, and Flight Check Tuning

MULTI-CH CABLE
FROM THE DAU

CABLE DISTRIBUTION UNIT

ACC 5 ACC 6 ACC 7 ACC 8 ACC 9 TACHO 2

MULTI-CH

ACC 10 ACC 11 ACC 12 ACC 13 ACC 14

ABT 2

OVERHEAD LATERAL
ACCELEROMETER

FG0453A
SA

Figure 8. Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) Receptacle Layout (Required for External Tanks Configuration)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 13

(8) Connect the UTD cable to TRACKER 1 recep- lar operation, reboot the CADU. Refer to
tacle of the DAU. Software Data/Management Instructions
(WP 010 00).
h. If helicopter has a external tank system installed
install Cable Distribution Unit (CDU) and connect over- a. Make sure the test equipment is properly installed.
head lateral accelerometer cable as follows (Figure 8): Refer to Main Rotor Test Equipment Installation (PARA 6).

(1) Connect the male end of the CDU cable, b. Make a copy of the Main Rotor Ground Data
29283200, to the MULTI-CH receptacle on the DAU (Fig- Sheet (Figure 8).
ure 7). Connect the female end of the CDU cable to the
MULTI-CH receptacle on the CDU, 29103900. c. Make sure the CADU is on the aircraft and
plugged into the DAU via the CADU-to-DAU cable.
(2) Connect 4-pin end of overhead lateral accel-
erometer cable to the ACC 11 receptacle of the CDU. NOTE

i. Once all test equipment is properly installed, mea- The CADU is a menu-driven device. You
sure track data, refer to Main Rotor Ground Track Mea- must use the arrow keys (s, d, g, and f)
surement (PARA 7). to highlight (area with dark background
and light letters) the desired option then
7. MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACK MEASURE- press DO to select the option. If a wrong
MENT. option is highlighted by mistake, press
QUIT to return to the previous menu.
NOTE
If nothing appears on the CADU screen
Keystrokes on the CADU are identified by when the CADU is turned on, suspect that
the use of bold print. the screen contrast is set improperly or the
CADU batteries are low on charge. Adjust
This procedure will measure main rotor the screen contrast by pressing and hold-
blade track and determine if the total track ing the CTRST key on the CADU and
split between the four installed blades is monitoring the CADU screen. Release the
acceptable. CTRST key when the screen becomes
clear. The screen contrast key uses a rolling
Data quality is extremely important. To adjustment approach, therefore if the
obtain data of the proper quality, make CTRST key is released too late, continue
sure that the aircraft is pointing directly into press and hold the CTRST key until the
the wind, collective is all the way down, desired contrast is seen again. If nothing is
cyclic is centered, and the condition is held seen on the CADU screen after holding the
steady for the entire measurement. CTRST key for 30 seconds, suspect that the
CADU batteries are low on charge. Plug
If problems are encountered with the test the CADU into the battery charger,
equipment that are not addressed in this 29315000, or plug CADU into powered
document, refer to the Operation And up DAU and repeat procedure.
Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
instruction. The following section can be completed on
the CADU at anytime prior to the ground
If you are instructed to reboot the CADU or run without the CADU being connected to
the CADU appears to be stuck in a particu- or powered by the DAU.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 14

S−70i MAIN ROTOR GROUND DATA SHEET

AIRCRAFT DATE

MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING

(Criteria: Track split between the highest and lowest blade shall be
12 mm or less at flat pitch, 100% Nr)
RUN For manual adjustment: Track MAIN ROTOR BLADES
# 1 Notch = 3.4 mm Split (mm) YEL BLU RED BLK

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Total Adj. Made

NOTES

1. 80 OUNCES IS THE MAXIMUM WEIGHT

THAT CAN BE INSTALLED ON ANY ONE MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE
BLADE SPINDLE.
Limit without external tanks installed: ROLL Ground Balance shall be 0.20 ips or less
2. WEIGHT OF 70106−08105−102 BALANCE Limits with external tanks installed: LATERAL Ground Balance shall be 0.30 ips or less
WASHER IS 1 OUNCE.
3. WEIGHT OF THE ATTACHING
GRND BAL Weight Limit MAIN ROTOR BLADE WEIGHT (oz)
HARDWARE IS ABOUT 2 OUNCES (ONE
NAS566C65 BOLT, ONE MS21044N6 per Blade is
RUN Amp Phase
NUT, AND ONE OR TWO NAS1149F0663P 80 ounces (oz) YEL BLU RED BLK
# (ips) (Deg)
WASHERS). WEIGHT OF ATTACHING
HARDWARE IS INCLUDED IN THE
TOTAL WEIGHT. Previously Installed (oz)
4. A MINIMUM OF 1−1/2 THREADS MUST BE
Change Required (oz)
EXPOSED BEYOND NUT AFTER WEIGHT
IS INSTALLED AND NUT IS TORQUED.
5. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF 70106−08105−102 New Total (oz)
BALANCE WASHERS THAT CAN BE
USED PER BOLT IS 18, WITH THE Change Required (oz)
NAS1149F0663P WASHER UNDER THE
BOLTHEAD REMOVED TO OBTAIN A 5.0 New Total (oz)
POUND MAXIMUM. IF THE NAS1149F0663P
WASHER IS INSTALLED UNDER THE Change Required (oz)
BOLTHEAD, MAXIMUM BALANCE
WASHERS USED PER BOLT IS 17.
New Total (oz)
6. THERE ARE FOUR LOCATIONS PER
SPINDLE TO INSTALL REQUIRED Change Required (oz)
BALANCE WEIGHT: TWO LOCATIONS
ON UPPER BRACKET, AND TWO
LOCATIONS ON LOWER BRACKET. New Total (oz)
WEIGHT MAY BE ADDED TO ANY
LOCATION ON A SPINDLE, IN ANY
ORDER, AS LONG AS MAXIMUM
WEIGHT PER BOLT AND SPINDLE IS
NOT EXCEEDED.
IM1055
SA

Figure 9. Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 15

d. Prepare the CADU to measure data by performing

the following:
SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
NOTE
12−NOV−10 14:02:36

If the CADU is being operated on internal Aircraft Type ?

batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ?
or the DAU power is off) and the CADU Flight I.D. ?
indicates low power (internal batteries
require charging), perform one of the fol- [DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
into the DAU using the CADU-to-DAU
MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER
cable and turn DAU power on. A second
method is to plug the CADU battery IM1462
charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC SA

receptacle and plug the probe end of the Figure 10. Main Menu
battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
receptacle is located under the credit card (3) Check the main menu on the CADU (Figure
access panel on top edge of the CADU. 10) to make sure that the date and time are correct. If the
The CADU batteries automatically recharge date and time are wrong, refer to Software Data/
when the CADU is plugged into a power Management Instructions (WP 010 00), and reset time
source. and date.

(1) Turn the CADU on by pressing the ON key. (4) From the main menu, press the d or f keys
to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.

NOTE
NOTE

If the test set was left in the measurement This procedure may not provide required
mode (Figure 16), press QUIT , to exit the results if the incorrect AIRCRAFT software
measurement mode, until the 9Action9 version is used. Refer (WP 002 00) to verify
menu is seen. If vibration was measured the aircraft software version. The
previously, or it is not known that if the AIRCRAFT software version number is part
vibration was measured, highlight Save of the aircraft type title. If the proper AIR-
and Exit and press DO. If no vibration was CRAFT software is not on the CADU,
measured, highlight Abandon Flight, Press upload the aircraft setup file to the CADU.
g until Yes is seen next to Continue? and Refer to Software Setup Instructions (WP
press DO. The Main Menu should now be 009 00). If the proper aircraft software
seen. cannot be located, contact Sikorsky Aircraft
or GE Aviation Systems representative.
This procedure may not provide required
results if the incorrect software version is The aircraft setup file with the 9S-70i9 air-
used. The software version is found on the craft type should be used for aircraft con-
main menu. Verify that the software ver- figurations without external tanks installed.
sion being used corresponds with the ver-
sion covered by this manual. Refer to WP The aircraft setup file with the 970iCEF9 air-
002 00. If the proper software is not on the craft type should be used for aircraft con-
CADU, contact Sikorsky Aircraft or GE figurations with external tanks installed.
Aviation Systems representative.
The 9GRND TRK9 flight plans for the 9S-70i9
(2) Press QUIT at each menu until the Main Menu and 970iCEF9 aircraft types are identical.
is showing (Figure 10). Check for proper software version For consistency use the aircraft type that
on main menu. applies to the configuration being used for

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 16

Aircraft Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit Select Tail Number PAGE 1 OF 1

70iCEF
FFT 51
S−70B 52

S−70i NEW

S−80M

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Tail No [QUIT] Exit

IM1056 FG0457
SA SA

Figure 11. 9Aircraft Types9 Menu Figure 12. 9Select Tail Number9 Menu
the Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking proce- (9) In the Entry Form display (Figure 13), enter the
dure. The versions 1.0 and 1.0EPP corre- complete tail number of the aircraft. Up to seven digits
sponds to aircraft configured without EPP can be entered for the tail number. Press DO when tail
and with EPP respectively. It is imperative number entry is complete.
that the correct version is used due to the
significant sensitivity difference between (10) From the main menu (Figure 15), press the d
the two main rotor blade designs. or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.

(5) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 11), (11) From The 9Flight Plans9 menu (Figure 14),
press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and press the d or f keys to highlight 9GRND TRK9 and
versions 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever applicable, and press press DO.
DO.
(12) Make sure that Aircraft Type, Tail Number,
(6) From the main menu (Figure 15), press the d and Flight Plan are properly specified (Figure 15). Repeat
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO. step (4) through step (11) until all required menu items
are properly specified.
(7) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 12),
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num- NOTE
ber and press DO, continue with step (10). If the desired
tail number is not listed, continue with step (8). The Flight I.D. does not exist prior to mea-
suring data. Flight I.D. identifies previously
(8) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 12), measured data that is stored in memory. A
press the d or f keys to highlight NEW and press DO. new flight ID is automatically created by
the test set each time F1 (MEASURE) is
NOTE pressed and data is stored.

Numbers can be input using the numeric The test set automatically checks memory to
keypad on the CADU. Alphanumeric char- make sure that there is enough room to
acters can be input by using the F1 and F2 store all of the data that can be measured
keys. The F1 and F2 keys allow you to by the selected flight plan. If the CADU
scroll through the available characters. indicates that insufficient memory exists,
When the desired character is seen, press download data from the CADU to a PC,
the g arrow key to move to the next block. delete data from the CADU, and compress

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 17

Entry Form

Please enter a new tail number SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

for the aircraft type S−70i :
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:03:45
Tail No? 53
Aircraft Type S−70i
Tail Number 53
Flight Plan GRND TRK
[F1] & [F2] Scrolls thru character set Flight I.D. ?
[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Arrows : Move Cursor
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit [DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item
IM1057
SA MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

Figure 13. Tail Number 9Entry Form9

F1 F2 F3 F4
Flight Plans DO−Select QUIT−Exit

BAL TAIL
DCENG BAL
FLT CHK
GRND BAL IM1059
SA

GRND TRK
OIL COOL Figure 15. Completed Main Menu
the DAU to proceed any further with this
procedure.

You may view a brief setup description by

pressing F3 (SETUP). Procedure references,
cable connections, and general procedure
IM1058
SA
is provided in the SETUP screens.

Figure 14. 9Flight Plans9 Menu e. On the DAU, set the DAU power switch to the ON
position.
the CADU memory. Refer to Software/Data
Management Instructions (WP 010 00). f. On the DAU, turn the TRACKER MODE switch to
the DAY position if performing this task during daylight
(13) From the main menu (Figure 15), press F1 hours, or turn the switch to the 9NIGHT9 position for low
(MEASURE) to enter the measurement mode (Figure 16). light or night time tracking. Reflective tape must be
installed for low light or night tracking, refer to Main Rotor
(14) From the Measurement Selection Window Test Equipment Installation (PARA 6).
(Figure 16), press F4 until LMT ON is seen above the F4
key. g. On the CADU, press LAMP to turn the CADU
screen back-light on.
NOTE
h. With a qualified pilot at the controls run helicopter
28 VDC power must be available at the at flat pitch, 100% Nr rotor speed, with the pedals cen-
DAU and the CADU must be connected to tered.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 18

ing QUIT. If you wish to save the data that

was measured, from the 9Action9 menu,
highlight 9Save and Exit9 and press DO. If
S−70i 53 GRND TRK 12−NOV−10 no data was measured or the data is not to
be stored, from the 9Action9 menu, high-
FP TRK light 9Abandon Flight9, press DO, press g
key until Yes is seen next to Continue?, and
press DO. If the measurement mode is
exited, continue this procedure with step n.

The CADU and DAU power must be on for

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit a minimum of 20 seconds before proceed-
DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON ing any further with this procedure. If a
measurement is tried before the 20 second
wait period, an error will be noted. Clear
the error by pressing QUIT, wait 20 sec-
F1 F2 F3 F4 onds and retry the measurement.

If an error message is displayed on the

CADU screen, write down the error and
the recommended troubleshooting steps,
press QUIT to clear the error, perform the
IM1060 first recommended troubleshooting step,
SA
then repeat the measurement. Repeat this
Figure 16. Measurement Selection Window process until all recommended
troubleshooting steps have been taken. If
NOTE problems persist, go to the Operation And
Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
When measuring blade track on the troubleshooting.
ground, avoid placing the helicopter on
bright, reflective surfaces (concrete, If an error is seen on the CADU screen that
painted surfaces, etc.) if possible. Also does not provide troubleshooting steps,
avoid positioning the helicopter so that the press QUIT to clear the error, and retry the
UTD line of sight is in direct view of the sun. measurement. If the same error persists,
Ability to measure blade track data may be reboot the CADU (refer to SOFTWARE/
compromised with the helicopter on bright, DATA MANAGEMENT INSTRUCTIONS,
reflective surfaces or if the UTD line of sight this manual), toggle the DAU power switch
is in direct view of the sun. If blade track off and on again (this reboots the DAU),
measurement is unsuccessful, make sure the wait 20 seconds, and retry the measure-
helicopter is on a dark surface such as ment. If problems persist, replace the
black asphalt, and make sure the UTD line CADU-to-DAU cable, the DAU, and the
of sight is not in direct view of the sun. CADU respectively. Retry the measurement
after each component is replaced.
Main rotor track is sensitive to wind direc-
tion on the ground at flat pitch. Make sure
If a Communications Failure (Error 8199)
the nose of the helicopter is pointing into
or a CADU-DAU Comms Failure (Error
the wind for all flat pitch measurements.
32756) is noted and all of the on-screen
troubleshooting has failed, disconnect the
The FP TRK test state will measure blade tracker cable and retry the measurement.
track data only. (Shorted tracker cables have resulted in
communication errors). If the measurement
You may exit the measurement selection prompt was seen after the tracker cable
window (Figure 16) at any time by press- was disconnected, replace the tracker

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 19

S−70i 53 GRND TRK 12−NOV−10

MEASURING

FP TRK
Tachometer Freq (RPM) : 257.93

Flight Plan : GRND TRK

Test State : FP TRK

* MR TRACK _ FLAT PITCH 100% Nr Acquisition No. : 01 of 01

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON Measuring

IM1061 FB2331A
SA SA

Figure 17. Measurement Initiation Figure 18. Measurement Screen

cable. If the problem persists, suspect the rotor magnetic pickup cable is connected
DAU-to-CADU cable, the DAU, and the to the TACHO 1 receptacle on the DAU.
CADU in that order. and retry the measurement several times. If
the errors persist, perform the trouble
i. From the Measurement Selection Window (Figure shooting on the CADU screen. If no defects
16), highlight the FP TRK test state and press DO. This were noted , replace the magnetic RPM
prepares the DAU for the measurement. When the DAU sensor cable. Cable resistance can be
is ready an asterisk mark will be seen at the start of the checked using the wiring diagram in the
measurement prompt (Figure 17). Operators Manual, 29480100. If magnetic
RPM sensor cable is installed without
NOTE enough slack to permit full swashplate
travel, it is possible that the internal wires
Measure all data at 100% Nr (258 RPM). were stretched and broken without any vis-
Monitor the CADU screen during measure- ible external damage.
ment and make sure that the RPM is
between 257.5 to 258.5 RPM If a tracker error is seen and the UTD
tracker is looking directly into the sun, turn
Hold the condition steady for the entire the aircraft out of the sun and re-try the
measurement. If the pilot moves the con- measurement. If tracker errors persist,
trols, re-measure the data after the flat pitch check the tracker installation angle and
condition is re-established. UTD cable. Replace the UTD cable and UTD
tracker in that order.
A measurement can be retaken by simply
If a tracker error is seen and the lighting
repeating the measurement procedure for
conditions are dark or dusk, perform test
that test state. When data is re-measured
equipment installation for low light tracking
the old data is overwritten by the new data.
(PARA 6).
j. Once ready, press DO to start the measurement. k. When the measurement is complete and the test
The measurement screen (Figure 18) will be seen. set is processing the data, the screen shown in Figure 19
will be seen. Do not press any keys at this time, wait until
NOTE the CADU screen prompts for a user input.

If a tachometer error is seen during the l. If limit checking was turned on prior to the mea-
measurement, make sure that the main surement, continue on, otherwise go to step m.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 20

Processing Data . . .

* * * Please Wait * * *

Standby . . . While data is loading

FG0560
SA

Figure 19. Data Processing Screen

NOTE

If an error was seen during measurement, LIMITS

9?9 will be seen under MEASURED on the
S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10
LIMITS display (Figure 21).
Measurements are within specified limits
The ALL LIMITS screen allows the measured
track split to be viewed if the measurement
is within the limit. Measured track split is
not shown on the LIMITS screen if the mea-
surement is within the limit. Press QUIT to return to MEASUREMENT menu
Press UP to view all limits
(1) If limit checking was turned on prior to the
measurement, one of two LIMITS displays will be seen. If
all measurements are within acceptable limits, a LIMITS IM1062
SA
display similar to the one shown in Figure 20 will be
seen. If any measurement exceeded acceptable limits, a Figure 20. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within
LIMITS display similar to the one shown in Figure 21 will Limits)
be seen. Press the d arrow key to see the ALL LIMITS
screen (Figure 22) if measurement is within the limit. CADU with a measurement attempt
between each troubleshooting action.
(2) Enter the total track split in the Track Split block
of the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet. If track measurement was successful but
you wish to re-measure track data, from
the Finish menu, highlight Continue, press
(3) Exit the LIMITS or ALL LIMITS display by press- DO, and go to step i to re-measure track
ing QUIT until the Finish menu (Figure 23) is seen. Con- data. The new data will overwrite the pre-
tinue with step m. viously measured track data.

NOTE m. From the Finish menu (Figure 23), highlight Finish

and press DO.
If a measurement error was seen, 9failed9
will be seen next to the test state on the n. If the track split is known to exceed the acceptance
measurement selection window. If 9failed9 limit, from the End of Flight menu (Figure 24), highlight
is seen, NO data was measured. Perform Diagnostics and press DO. Continue with step f. in Deter-
the troubleshooting steps provided on the mining Ground Track PCR Adjustments (PARA 9).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 21

(1) Safety wire all four main rotor PCRs. Refer to

Safety Wire Pitch Control Rods (PARA 11).
LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10 (2) Perform main rotor ground balancing. Refer to
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits Main Rotor Ground Balancing (WP 007 00).
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
(3) After Main Rotor Ground Balance is complete,
FP TRK Total Trk Split 12.00 35.45 mm
perform in-flight vibration check. Refer to Main Rotor
1/Rev Flight Tuning (WP 008 00).

r. If the total track split is greater than 12 mm,

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down (greater than 20mm in adverse conditions), determine
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All
PCR adjustments to reduce the track split. Refer to Deter-
mining Ground Tracking PCR Adjustments (PARA 9).
IM1063
SA

8. RECALLING GROUND TRACK DATA.

Figure 21. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Exceeds
Limits) NOTE

If the CADU is being operated on internal

batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
ALL LIMITS or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10 indicates low power (internal batteries
require charging), perform one of the fol-
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
LIMIT MEASURED into the DAU using the CADU-to DAU
FP TRK Total Trk Split 12.00 9.03 mm cable and turn DAU power on. A second
method is to plug the CADU battery
charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
receptacle and plug the probe end of the
[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle Exc’d receptacle is located under the credit card
access panel on top of the CADU. The
IM1064 CADU batteries automatically recharge
SA
when the CADU is plugged into a power
Figure 22. 9ALL LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within source.
Limits)
a. Get a copy of the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet
o. If the track split is acceptable or not known, from (Figure 9).
the End of Flight menu (Figure 24), highlight Main Menu
and press DO and continue with step p.
CAUTION
p. Fill out the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet. Refer
to Recalling Ground Track Data (PARA 8).
Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type,
NOTE
Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D.are
If this task is being performed in adverse specified prior to recalling data. If the
weather conditions and after five ground wrong parameter is specified before recall-
runs the total track split is 20 mm or less, ing data, incorrect data will be recalled
the ground track is acceptable. and incorrect adjustments will be called
out.
q. If the total track split is 12 mm or less, (20mm or
less in adverse conditions), the ground tracking task is b. From the main menu (Figure 25), make sure that
complete. Perform the following: the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 22

Finish

Finish
Continue

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0563
SA

Figure 23. 9Finish9 Menu

End of Flight

Diagnostics
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0470
SA

Figure 24. 9End of Flight9 Menu

are correctly specified. If all of the parameters are correct (2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 11),
go to step c, otherwise continue on: press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and
versions 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable, and
NOTE press DO.

You should change only the parameters (3) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
that are improperly specified. or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.

To view all data stored in memory, high- (4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 12),
light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
change all main menu items to 9?9, then ber and press DO.
highlight Flight I.D. and press DO, a com-
plete list of all data in memory will be dis- (5) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
played. or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.

(1) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d (6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 14), press
or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO. the d or f keys to highlight 9GRND TRK9 and press DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 23

Select Flight ID PAGE 1 OF 1

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL S−70i 53 GRND TRK 12 NOV 10 14:11

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20 S−70i 53 GRND TRK 12 NOV 10 13:05
12−NOV−10 14:29:41 S−70i 53 GRND TRK 12 NOV 10 11:00

Aircraft Type S−70i

Tail Number 53
Flight Plan GRND TRK
Flight I.D. 12−NOV−10 at 14:11
[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item [LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item [DO] Select Flight [QUIT] Exit

IM1066
MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER SA

Figure 26. 9Select Flight I.D.9 Menu

F1 F2 F3 F4

Display Mode

One Test State

IM1065
SA Complete Flight
Trend Flights
Figure 25. Main Menu with Selected Flight I.D. View Limits
Summary Displays
(7) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d
or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.

NOTE
[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu
Data is stored in memory with the most
recent data at the top of the list. Therefore, FG0566
SA

if the most recent data is being recalled,

simply select the first flight id. Figure 27. 9Display Mode9 Menu
(1) From the Select Summary Display menu (Fig-
(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 26), ure 28), highlight Main Rotor Blade Track and press DO.
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
press DO. (2) From the Track summary display data page
(Figure 29), enter the blade track in the appropriate
c. With the correct Flight I.D. specified on the main blocks on the Main Rotor Ground Tracking section of the
menu (Figure 25), press F2 (DISPLAY) to view data. main rotor ground data sheet. Blade track split can be
calculated by taking the difference between the highest
d. From the Display Mode menu (Figure 27), high- (most positive blade track value) and the lowest (most
light Summary Display and press DO. negative blade track value).

NOTE (3) Press QUIT once to get back to the Select

Summary Display menu (Figure 28).
All track units should be in 9mm9. To
change units, refer to Software Setup f. Press QUIT until the main menu (Figure 25) is
Instructions (WP 009 00). seen.

e. Recall the main rotor blade track data as follows. g. Press OFF to turn the CADU off.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 24

If four sets of PCR adjustments have been

Select Summary Display PAGE 1 OF 1 made and the main rotor track split is still
above the limit refer to the Main Rotor Flat
Main Rotor Blade Track Pitch Tracking Troubleshooting Flowchart
Main Rotor Blade Lead / Lag Figure 34.
PRINT ALL DISPLAYS
a. If the ground track split is greater than 12 mm (or
20mm in adverse conditions), continue with this proce-
dure. If the ground track split is 12 mm or less, safety wire
all four PCRs. Refer to Safety Wire Pitch Control Rods
[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line
[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
(PARA 11).
[DO] Select Display [QUIT] Exit

FB2462
(1) If four sets of PCR adjustments have been made
SA
and the main rotor track split is still above the limit refer to
the Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking Troubleshooting Flow-
Figure 28. 9Select Summary Display9 Menu
chart Figure 34.

NOTE
S−70i 53 GRND TRK
FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
If the CADU is being operated on internal
Main−R ROTOR Page 1 of 1 batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
TRACK RELATIVE TO MEAN (mm)
STATE Yel Blu Red Blk
or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
indicates low power (internal batteries
FP TRK 25.3 −5.2 −9.9 −10.2
require charging), perform one of the fol-
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
into the DAU using the CADU-to- DAU
cable and turn DAU power on. A second
method is to plug the CADU battery
charger ,29315000, into a 120 VAC
[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit receptacle and plug the probe end of the
IM1067 battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
SA
receptacle is located under the credit card
access panel on top of the CADU. The
Figure 29. Ground Track Summary Display Data Page
CADU batteries automatically recharge
h. Return to step q. in Main Rotor Ground Track when the CADU is plugged in a power
Measurement (PARA 7). source.

9. DETERMINING GROUND TRACKING PCR b. Get the copy of the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet
ADJUSTMENTS. (Figure 9) previously started for the aircraft currently
being tracked.
NOTE
c. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power
This procedure provides PCR adjustments on.
to reduce total track split at flat pitch, 100%
Nr.
NOTE
If this task is being performed in adverse
weather conditions and after five ground Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type,
runs the total track split is 20 mm or less, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. are
the ground track is acceptable, safety wire specified prior to running diagnostics. If
all four PCRs, refer to Safety Wire Pitch wrong parameter is specified, the incorrect
Control Rods (PARA 11). adjustments will be called out.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 25

d. From the main menu (Figure 25), make sure that

the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D.
LIMITS
are correctly specified. If all of the main menu parameters
are correct, go to step e., otherwise continue on: S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
NOTE PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
FP TRK Total Trk Split 12.00 35.5 mm
You should change only the parameters
that are improperly specified.

To view all data stored in memory, high-

light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to [LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All
change all main menu items to 9?9, then
highlight Flight I.D. and press DO, a com-
plete list of all data in memory will be dis- IM1068
SA

played.
Figure 30. 9LIMITS9 Screen in Diagnostics, Main Rotor
(1) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d Track Exceed Limits
or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.
NOTE
(2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 11),
press the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and If the LIMITS display indicates that
versions 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable, and Measurements are within specified limits or
press DO. the MEASURED track split is less than the
LIMIT value, the track split is acceptable
(3) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d and no corrective action is necessary.
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO. Complete this procedure to exit the diag-
nostic mode, however no adjustments are
(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 12), required. Safety wire all four PCRs. Refer to
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num- Safety Wire Pitch Control Rods (PARA 11).
ber and press DO.
In the LIMITS display, a 9?9 indicates that
(5) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d data was not measured at that test state.
or f keys to highlight Flight Plans and press DO.

(6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 14), press The LIMITS display will show you what
the d or f keys to highlight GRND TRK and press DO. measurements exceeded limits and what
measurements were not taken. Any mea-
(7) From the main menu (Figure 25), press the d surement that was measured and is within
or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO. limits will not be shown. To see all of the
measured data compared to the limits,
NOTE press the d key and the ALL LIMITS display
will be shown.
Data is stored in memory with the most
recent data at the top of the list. Therefore, f. The limits display should be seen on the CADU
if the most recent data is being recalled (Figure 30). From the LIMITS screen press DO to con-
simply select the first flight id. tinue.

(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 26),

NOTE
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired Flight I.D.
and press DO.
PCR corrections use the adjustment units of
e. With the correct Flight I.D. selected (Figure 25), notches. One notch moves the safety tang
press F3 to enter the diagnostic mode in the test set. one castellation on the PCR.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 26

a. Identify one of the PCRs that require adjustment as

specified on the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet.
CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 1 OF 1
S−70i 53 GRND TRK 12−NOV−10 14:11
b. Prior to loosening the PCR, verify the following:
MR PCR (Notch)
+ means Increase PCR Length
− means Decrease PCR Length (1) The main rotor blade color code is correct.
Blades
Yel Blu Red Blk (2) The correct PCR is being adjusted.
−7.00 −2.00 0.00 0.00
(3) The PCR is being adjusted in the correct direc-
tion.
[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu
(4) The PCR is being adjusted the correct number
IM1069
of notches.
SA

c. If required, remove safety wire from both the upper

Figure 31. Corrections Display Screen
and lower jam nuts (Figure 33).

d. While holding the PCR at the lower flats, loosen

Main rotor blade PCR corrections are lower jam nut.
called out in units of notches. A plus sign
(+) preceding the correction means to NOTE
increase length of the PCR for the identified
blade. A minus sign (-) preceding the cor- Upper jamnut has left hand threads.
rection means to shorten the length of the
PCR for the identified blade. e. Continue holding link and loosen upper jamnut
until safety tang is clear of notches in castellated link.
g. The CORRECTIONS FOR screens (Figure 31)
shows you what main rotor PCR corrections are required NOTE
to reduce main rotor blade track split. Enter the recom-
mended PCR corrections on the Main Rotor Ground Data To go up (+), increase pitch rod length by
Sheet. turning the link counterclockwise. To go
down (–), shorten the PCR length by turning
h. From the CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 31), the link clockwise.
press QUIT to exit.
f. Rotate link in the proper direction and the correct
i. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 32), press
number of notches as specified for that blade in the Main
QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode.
Rotor Ground Data Sheet.
j. From the main menu (Figure 25), press OFF to turn
g. Once proper adjustment has been made, rotate
the CADU off.
upper jam nut to re-engage safety tang in castellated link
and tighten both the upper and lower jamnuts.
k. Make the all the PCR corrections as specified on
the data sheet. Refer to Adjusting Main Rotor Pitch Con-
trol Rod (PARA 10). h. While holding PCR at lower flats, do the following:

10. ADJUSTING MAIN ROTOR PITCH (1) TORQUE LOWER JAMNUT TO 700 -
CONTROL ROD. 750 INCH-POUNDS.

NOTE (2) Set 10-degree angular position of PCR. Refer

to applicable maintenance manual.
A Pitch Control Rod (PCR) adjustment is
specified in notches. One notch is moving (3) TORQUE UPPER JAMNUT TO 700 - 750
the safety tang one castellation on the PCR. INCH-POUNDS.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 27

Diagnostics Menu

View Predictions
Edit Adjustables
View Corrections
View Limits
Edit Defaults
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0481
SA

Figure 32. Diagnostics Menu

11. SAFETY WIRE PITCH CONTROL RODS.
WARNING
WARNING
The main rotor PCRs must be safety wired
before the aircraft can fly.
The main rotor PCRs must be safety wired
before the aircraft can fly.
NOTE
NOTE
The main rotor PCRs are not safety wired Upper jamnut has left hand threads.
until the ground tracking is complete. This
is done to reduce the risk of damaging the a. Check that upper and lower jamnuts are torqued
safety tang and safety wire holes due to to 700 - 750 inch-pounds.
excessive removal and installation of safety
wire. b. Check PCR for no more than 0.75 inch of threads
visible on lower end of PCR.
i. Check PCR for no more than 0.75 inch of threads c. Safety wire, MS20995NC32, lower jamnut in both
visible on lower end of PCR. directions (double safety).

d. Safety wire, MS20995NC32, upper jamnut to

j. Inspect component security and make sure area is
lock key and back to opposite side of jamnut.
clean and free of foreign objects.
e. Inspect component security and make sure area is
k. Repeat procedure starting at step a., until all clean and free of foreign objects.
required PCR adjustments specified by the Main Rotor
Ground Data Sheet have been made. f. Repeat procedure starting at step a. until all PCRs
are properly safety wired.

l. Return to step d. of Main Rotor Ground Track Mea- g. Return to step q. (2) of Main Rotor Ground Track
surement (PARA 7). Measurement (PARA 7).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 28

PITCH CONTROL ROD

UPPER
LOCKNUT
(TORQUE 700−750 +2 MINUTES/NOTCH
IN. LBS)

LOCK KEY ROTATE LINK

TO ADJUST
BLADE TRACK
NOTCH
A
−2 MINUTES/NOTCH
LINK A

3/4 IN. MAXIMUM

THREAD SHOWING LINK DECAL
LOWER LOCKNUT
(TORQUE 700−750
IN. LBS)

FA1574A
SA

Figure 33. Main Rotor Pitch Control Rod (PCR) Adjustment

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 006 00
Page 29/(30 Blank)

FOUR SETS OF PITCH CONTROL ROD ADJUSTMENTS HAVE

BEEN MADE AND THE MAIN ROTOR TRACK SPLIT IS NOT
WITHIN 12 MILLIMETER LIMIT.

HAS THE BLADE COLOR CODE SEQUENCE BEEN CHECKED?

YES NO

CHECK BLADE COLOR CODE SEQUENCE WITH RESPECT TO

THE MAGNETIC RPM SENSOR INSTALLATION,
IS THE AIRCRAFT BEING OPERATED WITHIN ADVERSE REFER TO FIGURE 3.
CONDITIONS?
WERE ANY PROBLEMS FOUND?
NO YES

NO YES

IS THE TRACK SPLIT 20 MILLIMETERS OR LESS?

NO YES 1. CORRECT ALL DISCREPANCIES

2. MAKE THE RECOMMENDED RADS−AT MAIN ROTOR

GROUND TRACK PCR ADJUSTMENT, REFER TO
ADJUSTING MAIN ROTOR PITCH CONTROL ROD, THIS WP.

3. REPEAT THE GROUND TRACK MEASUREMENT,

REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACK MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP.
DOES THE LATEST RADS−AT MAIN ROTOR TRACKING PCR
CORRECTION RECOMMEND ADJUSTING ADJACENT 4. DETERMINE MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING PCR
BLADES? CORRECTIONS, REFER TO DETERMINING GROUND
TRACKING PCR ADJUSTMENTS, THIS WP.
YES NO

DO NOT MAKE THE RECOMMENDED ADJUSTMENT ON MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACK CAN BE CONSIDERED
ADJACENT BLADES, DETERMINE ADJUSTMENT AS ACCEPTABLE. PROCEED WITH STEP Q OF MAIN ROTOR
FOLLOWS: GROUND TRACK MEASUREMENT (PARA 7).
IF THE RECOMMENDED ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTS THREE
ADJACENT BLADES ONLY MAKE THE ADJUSTMENT THAT
ADJUSTS OPPOSING BLADES SO ADJACENT BLADES ARE
NOT ADJUSTED.

IF THE RECOMMENDED ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTS TWO

ADJACENT BLADES ADJUST THE BLADE WITH LARGER
NUMBER OF NOTCHES, IF BOTH BLADES REQUIRE THE
SAME NUMBER OF NOTCHES CHOOSE ONE OF THE BLADES 1. MAKE THE RECOMMENDED RADS−AT MAIN ROTOR
TO ADJUST. GROUND TRACK PCR ADJUSTMENT, REFER TO
ADJUSTING MAIN ROTOR PITCH CONTROL ROD, THIS WP.
1. MAKE THE MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACK PCR
ADJUSTMENT DETERMINED FROM ABOVE GUIDELINES, 2. REPEAT THE GROUND TRACK MEASUREMENT, REFER
REFER TO ADJUSTING MAIN ROTOR PITCH CONTROL TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACK MEASUREMENT, THIS
ROD, THIS WP. WP.
2. REPEAT THE GROUND TRACK MEASUREMENT, 3. DETERMINE MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING PCR
REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACK MEASUREMENT, CORRECTIONS, REFER TO DETERMINING GROUND
THIS WP. TRACKING PCR ADJUSTMENTS, THIS WP.
3. DETERMINE MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING PCR
CORRECTIONS, REFER TO DETERMINING GROUND
TRACKING PCR ADJUSTMENTS, THIS WP.
FB1649
SA

Figure 34. Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking Troubleshooting Flowchart

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

RADS-AT Operation And Maintenance .................................................................... 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page No.

Aircraft Configuration .............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Test Conditions ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Test Procedure, Main Rotor Ground Balancing ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Determining Ground Balance Weight Adjustments ......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Main Rotor Ground Balance Vibration Measurement ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Main Rotor Hub Weight Adjustment .................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Main Rotor Test Equipment Installation ................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Recalling Ground Balance Data ..................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Vibration Task Sequencing .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

Model 991 Accelerometer (54 mV/g) (Wilcoxon

Research)
29103900 Cable distribution Unit (CDU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29104700 28 VDC Power Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29105403 Magnetic RPM Sensor Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29105605 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 25 ft
length (GE Aviation Systems)
29288400 or 3030AN Magnetic RPM Sensor
29313000 L-Shaped Accelerometer Mount Bracket (GE
Aviation Systems)
29315000 CADU Battery Charger (GE Aviation
Systems)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 2

Support Equipment Required (Cont)

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

29325601 DAU-to-CADU Cable (GE Aviation

Systems)
29325701 UTD Cable - 25 ft (GE Aviation Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE
Aviation Systems)
29481400 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29743200 UTD Bracket S-70i (GE Aviation Systems)
29750000 UTD-Tracker (GE Aviation Systems)
29283200 Cable Distribution Unit Cable (CDU) (GE
Aviation Systems)
3M-7610 Reflective Tape (3M)
- Torque Wrench (30 - 200 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (150 - 750 in. lbs.)
All required vibration test equipment is
found in the basic kit, and the adapter kit,
29743100.

Materials Required

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature

70106-08105-102 Balance Washer

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 3

1. VIBRATION TASK SEQUENCING. uses a cockpit overhead lateral measure-

ment for ground balance. Both flight plans
a. The Main Rotor Ground Balance task can be done use only main rotor hub weight to correct
the same time the tail rotor balance, engine output shaft ground balance.
balance, or oil cooler check tasks, (Refer to this manual
for above tasks), are being completed. It is NOT neces- The GRND BAL flight plans for the S-70i
sary that criteria on any one of the above listed tasks be and 70iCEF aircraft types employ different
satisfied before the Ground Balancing task is performed. ground balance measurements and differ-
ent diagnostic setups, one cannot be sub-
b. The main rotor ground balancing task can not be stituted for the other.
performed the same time as the Main Rotor Flat Pitch
Tracking task, (this manual) is being accomplished. If Flat
Pitch tracking is required it must be completed before per- If ground balance is done with external
forming ground balancing. tanks installed it is important that the exter-
nal fuel tanks be full or nearly full during
c. The main rotor ground balancing task is required data measurement for the most consistent
if any of the following conditions are true. results. Helicopters WITH wide chord
blades (EPP) exhibit a different response
(1) Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006 00) than helicopters WITHOUT EPP due to sig-
was completed. nificant differences between the two main
rotor blade designs. The aircraft setup file
(2) Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning (WP 008 00) versions 1.0 and 1.0EPP corresponds to
was completed and ground balance vibration is not within aircraft configured without EPP and with
the limit. EPP respectively. It is imperative that the
correct version is used.
(3) Ground Vibration discrepancy written-up by
aircrew. e. If the main rotor ground balancing task is required
after completion of Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning, this
(4) One or more main rotor blade retention pins manual, then:
have been replaced.
(1) For aircraft WITHOUT external tanks installed:
d. If the main rotor ground balancing task is required Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning is not required after post-
after completion of ground tracking, this manual, then flight ground balancing unless a main rotor corrective
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning, this manual, is also action other than main rotor hub weight adjustment (for
required. example changing a main rotor blade) was required to
satisfy the ground balance limit.
NOTE

The aircraft setup file with the 9S-70i 9 air- (2) For aircraft WITH external tanks installed:
craft type must be used for aircraft configu- Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning is required after post-
rations without external tanks installed. flight ground balancing since main rotor hub weight
adjustment is an integral part of main rotor 1/Rev Flight
The aircraft setup file with the 970iCEF 9 Tuning on helicopters WITH external tanks installed.
aircraft type must be used for aircraft con- However, post-flight ground balancing should not nor-
figurations with external tanks installed. mally be required for helicopters WITH external tanks
installed because main rotor hub weight is used to correct
both ground and in-flight main rotor 1/rev vibration with
Helicopters WITHOUT external tanks
this helicopter configuration.
installed exhibit a roll ground balance
response. Helicopters WITH external tanks
2. PURPOSE.
installed exhibit a lateral ground balance
response. The GRND BAL flight plan for the
S-70i aircraft type uses a cockpit roll mea- a. This procedure contains instructions for correcting
surement for ground balance. The GRND the mass balance of the main rotor system on the S-70i
BAL flight plan for the 70iCEF aircraft type model aircraft.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 4

ALL TASKS WITHIN DOTTED BOX CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED SIMULTANEOUSLY

WP 003 00 WP 005 00 WP 006 00

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE OIL COOLER VIBRATION MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING
CHECK
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. 1. MAIN ROTOR BLADE REPLACED.
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF TAIL
ROTOR RETENTION PLATE BOLTS. 2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVING OF 2. PCR OR PC ROD END REPLACED.
ANY OIL COOLER SHAFT ATTACHMENT
3. THE ADJUSTMENT OF ANY TAIL
BOLTS (INPUT OR OUTPUT). 3. PCR’S ADJUSTED DURING MR RIG.
ROTOR PITCH LINKS.
3. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY 4. MAIN ROTOR HEAD REMOVED.
BOLTS THAT SECURE OIL COOLER
TO AIRFRAME. 5. MAIN ROTOR QCU REMOVED.

6. MR SPINDLE REMOVED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. 100% NR 100%NR, NOSE INTO WIND

WP 004 00 WP 007 00
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING
BALANCE TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: 1. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. FLAT PITCH TRACKING, THIS MANUAL.
2. GROUND VIBRATION DISCREPANCY
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTS.
BOLTS THAT ATTACH THE ENGINE
SHAFT TO THE INPUT MODULE 3. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
FLANGE. 1 / REV TUNING, THIS MANUAL.
4. BLADE RETENTION PIN REPLACED.
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND.

WP 008 00
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
2. FOLLOWING MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING.
3. INFLIGHT VIBRATION DISCREPANCY EXISTS.
4. MAIN ROTOR DAMPER OR DAMPER BEARING REPLACED.
5. MAIN ROTOR PCR BEARING REPLACED.
6. MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAP REPLACED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS WITH EXTERNAL TANKS
FP GROUND, 100% NR FP GROUND, 100% NR
OGE HOVER, 100% NR OGE HOVER, 100% NR
80 KTS, 100% NR 80 KTS, 100% NR
120 KTS, 100% NR 120 KTS, 100% NR
140KTS, 100% NR VH, 100% NR
VH, 100% NR

IM1025
SA

Figure 1. Vibration Task Sequencing (Figure 1)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 5

b. Main rotor ground balance is used to compensate

for any mass unbalance on the main rotor that results Make sure that the BLACK (BLK) main rotor
from installed components having slight differences in blade is over the nose of the aircraft when
mass and/or dimensional tolerancing. the magnetic pickup and interrupter are
aligned.
c. The main rotor ground balance check is required
before the start of the 1/rev flight tuning process and is Be sure that the main rotor blades are color
performed for the following reasons: coded correctly.

(1) 1/rev dynamic balancing of the main rotor on

the ground provides a safety check of the rotor system Any problems with the above installations
that makes sure that rotor components are manufactured may result in main rotor hub weight adjust-
and installed correctly. ments that could cause ground balance
vibration to increase. Furthermore, these
installation errors may result in unneces-
(2) A reasonable comfort level is achieved for the
sary main rotor head inspection or mainte-
pilots and crew.
nance on the aircraft.
d. This procedure uses main rotor hub weight adjust-
ments to reduce the main rotor unbalance. NOTE

3. TEST CONDITIONS. All vibration test equipment required for

this task is found in the Basic Kit, and the
NOTE Adapter Kit, 29743100.

This task may become difficult in high and

The same equipment that was installed for
gusting winds. Make sure that the helicop-
the Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking task is
ter is heading into the wind.
required for the Main Rotor Ground Bal-
ancing task. Make sure that all equipment
a. This task can be accomplished under any light is secured and ready for ground runs.
conditions.

4. AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION. a. Install vibration test equipment, refer to Main Rotor

Flat Pitch Tracking, Test Equipment Installation (WP 006
The aircraft must be ready for ground runs up to 100% 00).
Nr with the main rotor blades installed.
b. Make a copy of the Main Rotor Ground Data
5. TEST PROCEDURE, MAIN ROTOR GROUND Sheet (Figure 2).
BALANCING.
c. Inspect the main rotor head and determine how
Install test equipment. Refer to MAIN ROTOR, TEST much balance weight is installed on each blade. Use the
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, this WP. hardware-to-weight conversion information on the data
sheet to calculate the installed weight in ounces.
6. MAIN ROTOR TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLA-
TION.
d. Enter the amount of weight, in ounces, that is
installed on each blade in the Previously Installed blocks
CAUTION on the Main Rotor Ground Balance section of the data
sheet. This information is required by diagnostics when a
ground balance hub weight solution is calculated.
Make sure that all accelerometers are ori-
ented properly and all accelerometer e. Once all test equipment is properly installed, mea-
cables are connected to the proper recep- sure ground balance data. Refer to Main Rotor Ground
tacle on the DAU and CDU. Balance Vibration Measurement (PARA 7).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 6

S−70i MAIN ROTOR GROUND DATA SHEET

AIRCRAFT DATE

MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING

(Criteria: Track split between the highest and lowest blade shall be
12 mm or less at flat pitch, 100% Nr)
RUN For manual adjustment: Track MAIN ROTOR BLADES
# 1 Notch = 3.4 mm Split (mm) YEL BLU RED BLK

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Blade Track (mm)

PCR Adj. (notches)

Total Adj. Made

NOTES

1. 80 OUNCES IS THE MAXIMUM WEIGHT

THAT CAN BE INSTALLED ON ANY ONE MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE
BLADE SPINDLE.
Limit without external tanks installed: ROLL Ground Balance shall be 0.20 ips or less
2. WEIGHT OF 70106−08105−102 BALANCE Limits with external tanks installed: LATERAL Ground Balance shall be 0.30 ips or less
WASHER IS 1 OUNCE.
3. WEIGHT OF THE ATTACHING
GRND BAL Weight Limit MAIN ROTOR BLADE WEIGHT (oz)
HARDWARE IS ABOUT 2 OUNCES (ONE
NAS566C65 BOLT, ONE MS21044N6 per Blade is
RUN Amp Phase
NUT, AND ONE OR TWO NAS1149F0663P 80 ounces (oz) YEL BLU RED BLK
# (ips) (Deg)
WASHERS). WEIGHT OF ATTACHING
HARDWARE IS INCLUDED IN THE
TOTAL WEIGHT. Previously Installed (oz)
4. A MINIMUM OF 1−1/2 THREADS MUST BE
Change Required (oz)
EXPOSED BEYOND NUT AFTER WEIGHT
IS INSTALLED AND NUT IS TORQUED.
5. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF 70106−08105−102 New Total (oz)
BALANCE WASHERS THAT CAN BE
USED PER BOLT IS 18, WITH THE Change Required (oz)
NAS1149F0663P WASHER UNDER THE
BOLTHEAD REMOVED TO OBTAIN A 5.0 New Total (oz)
POUND MAXIMUM. IF THE NAS1149F0663P
WASHER IS INSTALLED UNDER THE Change Required (oz)
BOLTHEAD, MAXIMUM BALANCE
WASHERS USED PER BOLT IS 17.
New Total (oz)
6. THERE ARE FOUR LOCATIONS PER
SPINDLE TO INSTALL REQUIRED Change Required (oz)
BALANCE WEIGHT: TWO LOCATIONS
ON UPPER BRACKET, AND TWO
LOCATIONS ON LOWER BRACKET. New Total (oz)
WEIGHT MAY BE ADDED TO ANY
LOCATION ON A SPINDLE, IN ANY
ORDER, AS LONG AS MAXIMUM
WEIGHT PER BOLT AND SPINDLE IS
NOT EXCEEDED.
IM1071
SA

Figure 2. Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 7

7. MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE VIBRA- CTRST key when the screen becomes
TION MEASUREMENT. clear. The screen contrast key uses a rolling
adjustment approach, therefore if the
NOTE CTRST key is released too late, continue
with press and hold the CTRST key until
Keystrokes on the CADU are identified by the desired contrast is seen again. If noth-
the use of bold print. ing is seen on the CADU screen after hold-
ing the CTRST key for 30 seconds, suspect
This procedure will measure main rotor that the CADU batteries are low on charge.
1/Rev Ground balance vibration and Plug the CADU into the battery charger,
determine if the vibration level is accept- 29315000, or plug CADU into powered
able. up DAU and repeat procedure above.

Data quality is extremely important. To The following section can be completed on

obtain data of the proper quality, make the CADU at anytime prior to the ground
sure that the aircraft nose is pointing run without the CADU being connected to,
directly into the wind and the condition is or powered by the DAU.
held steady for the entire measurement.
c. Prepare the CADU to measure data by perform-
If problems are encountered with the equip- ing the following:
ment that are not addressed in this docu-
ment, refer to the Operation and Mainte- NOTE
nance Manual, 29480100, for instruction.
If the CADU is being operated on internal
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
If you are instructed to reboot the CADU or
or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
the CADU appears to be stuck in a particu-
indicates low power (internal batteries
lar operation, reboot the CADU. Refer to
require charging), perform one of the fol-
Software/Data Management Instructions
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
(WP 010 00).
into the DAU using the CADU-to-DAU
cable and turn DAU power on. A second
a. Get the copy of the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet
method is to plug the CADU battery
(Figure 2) that has the previously installed main rotor hub
charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
weight entered on it.
receptacle and plug the probe end of the
battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
b. Make sure the CADU is on the aircraft and receptacle is located under the credit card
plugged into the DAU via the CADU-to-DAU cable. access panel on top of the CADU. The
CADU batteries automatically recharge
NOTE when the CADU is plugged into a power
source.
The CADU is a menu driven device. You
must use the arrow keys (s, d, g, and f) (1) Turn the CADU on by pressing the ON key.
to highlight (area with dark background
and light letters) the desired option, then NOTE
press DO to select the option. If the wrong
option is highlighted by mistake, press If the test set was left in the measurement
QUIT to go back to the main menu. mode, press QUIT to exit the measurement
mode, until the Action menu is seen. If
If nothing appears on the CADU screen vibration was measured, or it is not known
when the CADU is turned on, suspect that that the vibration was measured, highlight
the screen contrast is set improperly or the Save and Exit and press DO. If no vibra-
CADU batteries are low on charge. Adjust tion was measured, highlight Abandon
the screen contrast by pressing and hold- Flight and press g until Yes is seen next to
ing the CTRST key on the CADU and Continue and press DO. The main menu
monitoring the CADU screen. Release the should now be seen.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 8

ware can not be located, contact Sikorsky

Aircraft or GE Aviation Systems represen-
SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL tative.
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:02:36 The aircraft setup file with the 9S-70i 9 air-
craft type must be used for aircraft configu-
Aircraft Type ?
rations without external tanks installed.
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ?
Flight I.D. ? The aircraft setup file with the 970iCEF9 air-
craft type must be used for aircraft configu-
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item rations with external tanks installed

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER Helicopters WITHOUT external tanks

installed exhibit a roll ground balance
IM1462
SA response. Helicopters WITH external tanks
installed exhibit a lateral ground balance
Figure 3. Main Menu response. The GRND BAL flight plan for the
S-70i aircraft type uses a cockpit roll mea-
surement for ground balance. The GRND
BAL flight plan for the 70iCEF aircraft type
This procedure may not provide correct
uses a cockpit overhead lateral measure-
results if the incorrect software version is
ment for ground balance. Both flight plans
used. The software version is found in the
use only main rotor hub weight to correct
main menu. Verify that the software ver-
ground balance.
sion is being used corresponds with the
version covered by this manual, refer to
Introduction (WP 002 00), to check soft- The GRND BAL flight plans for the S-70i
ware version. If the proper software is not and 70iCEF aircraft types employ different
on the CADU, contact Sikorsky Aircraft or ground balance measurements and differ-
GE Aviation Systems representative ent diagnostic setups, one cannot be sub-
stituted for the other
(2) Press QUIT at each menu until the Main Menu
If ground balance is done with external
is showing (Figure 3).
tanks installed it is important that the exter-
nal fuel tanks be full or nearly full during
(3) Check the main menu on the CADU (Figure 3) data measurement for the most consistent
to make sure that the date and time are correct. If the date results.
and time are wrong, refer to Software/Data Manage-
ment Instructions (WP 010 00), and reset time and date.
The aircraft setup file with version 91.0EPP9
must be used for aircraft configured with
(4) From the main menu (Figure 3), press the d or EPP.
f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.
The aircraft setup file with version 91.09
NOTE must be used for aircraft configured with-
out EPP.
This procedure may not provide correct
results if the incorrect aircraft software ver- Helicopters WITH wide chord blades (EPP)
sion is used. Refer to Introduction (WP 002 exhibit a different response than helicop-
00) to verify aircraft software version. The ters WITHOUT EPP due to significant differ-
aircraft version number is part of the air- ences between the two main rotor blade
craft type title. If the proper aircraft soft- designs. The aircraft setup file versions 1.0
ware is not on the CADU, upload the air- and 1.0EPP corresponds to aircraft config-
craft setup file to the CADU. (Refer to ured without EPP and with EPP respectively.
Software/Data Management Instructions It is imperative that the correct version is
(WP 010 00). If the proper aircraft soft- used.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 9

Aircraft Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit Select Tail Number PAGE 1 OF 1

70iCEF
FFT 51
S−70B 52

S−70i NEW

S−80M

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Tail No [QUIT] Exit

IM1072 FG0457
SA SA

Figure 4. 9Aircraft Types9 Menu Figure 5. 9Select Tail Number9 Menu

(5) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 4), press
the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and ver-
sions 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable, and press
DO. Entry Form

(6) From the main menu (Figure 8), press the d or Please enter a new tail number
for the aircraft type S−70i :
f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.
Tail No? 53
(7) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 5),
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
ber and press DO. Continue with step (10). If the desired
tail number is not listed, continue with step (8). [F1] & [F2] Scrolls thru character set
[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Arrows : Move Cursor
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit
(8) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 5),
press the d or f keys to highlight NEW and press DO.
IM1073
SA

NOTE
Figure 6. Tail Number 9Entry Form9
Numbers can be input using the numeric (12) Make sure that the Aircraft Type, Tail Num-
keypad on the CADU. Alphanumeric char- ber, and Flight Plan are properly specified (Figure 8).
acters can be input by using the F1 and F2 Repeat steps (4) through (11) until all required menu items
keys. The F1and F2 keys allow you to are properly specified.
scroll through the available characters.
When the desired character is seen, press NOTE
the g arrow key to move to the next block.
The Flight I.D. does not exist prior to mea-
(9) From the Entry Form display (Figure 6), enter suring vibration. Flight I.D. identifies previ-
the tail number of the aircraft. Up to seven digits can be ously measured vibration data that is
entered for the tail number. Press DO when tail number stored in memory. A new Flight I.D. is
entry is complete. automatically created by the test set each
time the F1 (MEASURE) key is pressed and
(10) From the main menu (Figure 8), press the d data is stored.
or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.
The test set automatically checks memory to
(11) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 7), press make sure that there is enough room to
the d or f keys to highlight GRND BAL and press DO. store all of the data that can be measured

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 10

NOTE
Flight Plans DO−Select QUIT−Exit
The main rotor ground balance vibration
BAL TAIL
DCENG BAL can be sensitive to wind direction and main
FLT CHK landing gear strut pre-load. Make sure the
GRND BAL aircraft is pointing into the wind, and reset
GRND TRK the main landing gear struts to relieve any
OIL COOL pre-load before measuring data. Reset
main landing gear struts by pulling enough
collective pitch to go light on the wheels
and then removing all collective pitch at
such a rate to firmly set the helicopter
weight straight down on the landing gear.

IM1074
SA g. Have the pilot relieve any pre-load that may be in
the main landing gear by pulling enough collective to go
Figure 7. 9Flight Plans9 Menu light on wheels and then quickly removing all collective
pitch to firmly set the full weight of the helicopter straight
by the selected flight plan. If the CADU
down on the landing gear.
indicates that insufficient memory exists,
download data from the CADU to a PC,
delete data from the CADU, and compress NOTE
the CADU memory. (Refer to Software/
Data Management Instructions (WP 010 The CADU and DAU power must be on for
00). a minimum of 20 seconds before proceed-
ing any further with this procedure. If a
(13) From the main menu (Figure 8), press F1 measurement is tried before the 20 second
(MEASURE) to enter the measurement mode (Figure 9). wait period, an error will be noted. Clear
the error by pressing QUIT, wait 20 sec-
onds and retry the measurement.
(14) From the Measurement Selection Window
(Figure 9), press F4 until LMT ON is seen above the F4
key. If an error message is displayed on the
CADU screen, annotate the error and the
recommended troubleshooting steps, press
NOTE
QUIT to clear the error, perform the first
recommended troubleshooting step, and
28 VDC power must be available at the repeat the measurement. Repeat this pro-
DAU and the CADU must be connected to cess until all recommended troubleshooting
the DAU to proceed any further with this steps have been taken. If problems persist,
procedure. refer to the Operation and Maintenance
Manual, 29480100, for troubleshooting.
You may view a brief setup description by
pressing F3 (SETUP). Procedure references, If an error is seen on the CADU screen that
cable connections, and general procedure does not provide troubleshooting steps,
is provided in the SETUP screens. press QUIT to clear the error, and retry the
measurement. If the same error persists,
d. On the DAU, set the DAU power switch to the ON reboot the CADU, (refer to Software/Data
position. Management Instructions (WP 010 00),
toggle the DAU power switch off and on
e. On the CADU, press LAMP to turn the CADU again (this reboots the DAU), wait 20 sec-
screen back-light on. onds, and retry the measurement. If prob-
lems persist, replace the CADU-to-DAU
f. With a qualified pilot at the controls, run helicopter cable, the DAU, and the CADU
at flat pitch, 100% Nr rotor speed with the pedals cen- respectively. Retry the measurement after
tered. each component is replaced.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 11

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:03:45

Aircraft Type S−70i

Tail Number 53
Flight Plan GRND BAL
Flight I.D. ?

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1075
SA

Figure 8. Completed Main Menu

If a Communications Failure (Error 8199) You may exit the measurement selection
or a CADU-DAU Comms Failure (Error window (Figure 9) at any time by pressing
32756) is noted and all of the on-screen QUIT. If you wish to save the data that
troubleshooting has failed, disconnect the was measured then, from the Action menu,
tracker cable and retry the measurement. highlight Save and Exit and press DO. If
(Shorted tracker cables have resulted in no data was measured or the data is not to
communication errors). If the measurement be stored then, from the Action menu,
prompt was seen after the tracker cable highlight Abandon Flight, press DO, press
was disconnected, replace the tracker g key until Yes is seen next to Continue?,
cable. If the problem remained, suspect the and press DO. If you did exit the measure-
DAU-to-CADU cable, the DAU, and the ment mode, go to step n. to continue this
CADU, in that order. procedure.

Under the 9S-70i 9 aircraft type (used for h. From the Measurement Selection Window (Figure
helicopters WITHOUT external tanks 9), highlight the MR BAL test state and press DO. This
installed) the MR BAL test state measures prepares the DAU for the measurement. When the DAU
main rotor 1/rev cockpit ROLL vibration is ready an asterisk mark will be seen at the start of the
using the pilot and co-pilot accelerometers measurement prompt (Figure 10).
for main rotor ground balance.
NOTE
Under the 970iCEF 9 aircraft type (used for
helicopters WITH external tanks installed) Hold the condition steady for the entire
the MR BAL test state measures main rotor measurement. If the pilot moves the con-
1/rev cockpit lateral vibration for main trols, re-measure the data after the flat pitch
rotor ground balance. condition is re-established.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 12

MEASURING
S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12−NOV−10
Tachometer Freq (RPM) : 257.93
MR BAL
Flight Plan : GRND BAL

Test State : MR BAL

Acquisition No. : 01 of 01

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit Measuring

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT OFF

FB2342A
SA

Figure 11. Measurement Screen

F1 F2 F3 F4

Measure all data at 100% Nr (258 RPM).

Monitor the CADU screen during measure-
ment and make sure that the RPM is
IM1076
between 257.5 to 258.5 RPM (Figure 11).
SA

Figure 9. Measurement Selection Window A measurement can be retaken by simply

repeating the measurement procedure for
that test state. When data is re-measured
the old data is overwritten by the new data.

i. Once ready, press DO to start the measurement.

S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12−NOV−10
NOTE
MR BAL
If a tachometer error was noted during the
measurement, make sure that the main
rotor magnetic pickup cable is connected
*MR Balance−Flat Pitch 100% Nr to the TACHO 1 receptacle on the DAU.
and retry the measurement several times. If
[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit
the errors persist, perform the trouble
DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON shooting on the CADU screen. If no defects
were noted, replace the magnetic pickup
cable. Cable can be resistance checked
using the wiring diagram in the Operators
F1 F2 F3 F4 Manual, 29480100. If tachometer cable is
installed without enough slack to permit full
swashplate travel, it is possible that the
internal wires were stretched and broken
without any visible external damage.

IM1077
SA
If an accelerometer error was noted, make
sure that the accelerometer cable is con-
Figure 10. Measurement Initiation nected to the accelerometer and is con-
nected to the proper receptacle on the DAU

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 13

LIMITS
Processing Data . . .
S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

* * * Please Wait * * * Measurements are within specified limits

Standby . . . While data is loading

Press QUIT to return to MEASUREMENT menu
Press UP to view all limits

FB2343 IM1078
SA SA

Figure 12. Data Processing Screen Figure 13. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within
Limits)
or CDU. The SETUP feature (F3 key in the
measurement selection window) provides play similar to the one shown in Figure 13 will be seen. If
cable connection instructions. Confirm that any measurement exceeded the acceptance limit, LIMITS
the accelerometers are properly specified display similar to the one shown in Figure 14 will be
(refer to Software Setup Instructions (WP seen. If the measurement is within the limit, press the d
009 00). If errors persist, replace acceler- arrow key to see the ALL LIMITS screen (Figure 15).
ometer and the cable respectively. Re-try
the measurement after each action. The (2) Enter the MR Ground Balance ips in the Amp
accelerometer cable can be resistance block of the Main Rotor Ground Balance section of the
checked using the wiring diagram in the Data Sheet.
Operators Manual, 29480100.
(3) Exit the ALL LIMITS display by pressing QUIT
j. When the measurement is complete and the test set until the Finish menu (Figure 16) or measurement selec-
is processing the data, the screen shown in Figure 12 will tion window (Figure 9) is seen. Continue with step l.
be seen. Do not press any keys at this time, wait until the
CADU screen prompts for a user input. NOTE

k. If limit checking was turned on prior to the mea- If a measurement error was experienced
surement, continue on, otherwise go to step l. 9failed9 will be seen next to the test state on
the measurement selection window. If
NOTE 9failed9 is seen, no data was measured.
Perform the troubleshooting steps provided
If an error was seen during measurement, on the CADU with a measurement attempt
9?9 will be seen under MEASURED on the between each troubleshooting action.
LIMITS display (Figure 14).
If Ground Balance vibration was success-
The ALL LIMITS display allows you to view fully measured but you wish to re-measure
the measured vibration amplitude if the vibration , from the Finish menu, highlight
vibration is within the limit. The vibration Continue, press DO, and re-measure
amplitude is not displayed on the LIMITS vibration. The new data will overwrite the
screen if the measurement is within the previously measured vibration data.
limit.
l. From the Finish menu (Figure 16), highlight Finish
(1) If limit checking was turned on prior to the and press DO.
measurement, one of two LIMITS displays will be seen. If
all measurements are within acceptable limits, LIMITS dis- m. With a qualified pilot, shutdown engines.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 14

rotor 1/rev ROLL vibration is 0.20 ips or

less (MR BAL ROLL must be 0.20 ips or
LIMITS less).
S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
For helicopters WITH external tanks the
PAGE 1 OF 1 ground balance limit for ground main rotor
LIMIT MEASURED 1/rev OVERHEAD LATERAL vibration is
MR BAL MR Grd Balance 0.20 0.45 ips 0.30 ips or less (MR BAL OH_LAT must be
0.30 ips or less).

q. For aircraft WITHOUT external tanks installed: If

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down the main rotor ground balance is within the limit the
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All ground balancing task is complete, do whichever of the
following applies:
IM1079
SA

(1) If ground balancing was completed prior to

Figure 14. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Exceeds
the start of flights, perform the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight
Limits)
Tuning Task next (WP 008 00).

(2) If ground balancing was completed after main

rotor 1/rev flight tuning was completed, and only main
ALL LIMITS rotor hub weight adjustment was required to complete
S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10 ground balancing no further main rotor 1/rev flight tun-
ing checks are necessary. Remove vibration test equip-
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
ment (WP 008 00).
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
MR BAL MR Grd Balance 0.20 0.18 ips (3) If ground balancing was completed after main
rotor 1/rev flight tuning was completed, but main rotor
maintenance other than hub weight adjustment was
required for ground balancing (for example a main rotor
[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down blade was changed), re-check in-flight vibration in accor-
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle Exc’d dance with Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning (WP 008 00).
IM1080
SA r. For aircraft with external tanks installed: If the main
rotor ground balance is within the limit, the ground bal-
Figure 15. 9ALL LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within
ancing task is complete, do whichever of the following
Limits)
applies:
n. If the ground balance is known to exceed the
acceptance limit, from the End of Flight menu (Figure 17), (1) If ground balancing was completed prior to
highlight Diagnostics and press DO . Continue with (step the start of flights, perform the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight
f. of Determining Ground Balance Weight Adjustment Tuning Task next (WP 008 00).
PARA 9).
(2) If ground balancing was completed after main
o. If the ground balance is acceptable or not known, rotor 1/rev flight tuning was completed Main Rotor 1/Rev
then from the End of Flight menu (Figure 17), highlight Flight Tuning is required after post-flight ground balanc-
Main Menu and press DO. ing since main rotor hub weight adjustment is an integral
part of main rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning on helicopters
p. Fill out the Data Sheet. Refer to Recalling Ground
WITH external tanks installed. Re-check in-flight vibration
Balance Data (PARA 8).
in accordance with Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning (WP
NOTE 008 00).

For helicopters WITHOUT external tanks s. If main rotor ground balance is not within the limit
the ground balance limit for ground main determine main rotor hub weight adjustments to reduce

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 15

Finish

Finish
Continue

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0563
SA

Figure 16. 9Finish9 Menu

End of Flight

Diagnostics
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0470
SA

Figure 17. End of Flight Menu

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 16

ground balance. Refer to Determining Ground Balance

Weight Adjustments (PARA 9).
Select Flight ID PAGE 1 OF 1

S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12 NOV 10 14:11

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12 NOV 10 13:05
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20 S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12 NOV 10 11:00
12−NOV−10 14:29:41

Aircraft Type S−70i

Tail Number 53
Flight Plan GRND BAL
Flight I.D. 12−NOV−10 at 14:11 [UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line
[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item [DO] Select Flight [QUIT] Exit
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item
IM1082
SA

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER Figure 19. 9Select Flight I.D.9 Menu

CAUTION
F1 F2 F3 F4

Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type,

Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. are
specified prior to recalling data. If the
IM1081
wrong parameter is specified before recall-
SA
ing data, incorrect data will be recalled
Figure 18. Main Menu with Selected Flight I.D. and incorrect decisions may be drawn.

8. RECALLING GROUND BALANCE DATA. b. From the main menu (Figure 18), make sure that
the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D.
NOTE are correctly specified. If all of the parameters are correct
go to step c, otherwise continue on:
If the CADU is being operated on internal
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
NOTE
or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
indicates low power (internal batteries
require charging), perform one of the fol- You should change only the parameters
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU that are improperly specified.
into the DAU using the CADU-to DAU
cable and turn DAU power on. A second To view all data stored in memory, high-
method is to plug the CADU battery light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to
charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC change all main menu items to 9?9,then
receptacle and plug the probe end of the highlight Flight I.D. and press DO, a com-
battery charger into the CADU. The CADU plete list of all data (Flight I.D.’s) in memory
receptacle is located under the credit card will be displayed.
access panel on top of the CADU. The
CADU batteries automatically recharge (1) From the main menu (Figure 18), press the d
when the CADU is plugged into a power or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.
source.
(2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 4), press
a. Get the copy of the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and ver-
(Figure 2) that is being used for the aircraft currently sions 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable, and press
being balanced. DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 17

Display Mode

One Test State

Complete Flight
Trend Flights
View Limits
Summary Displays

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FG0473
SA

Figure 20. 9Display Mode9 Menu

(3) From the main menu (Figure 18), press the d d. From the Display Mode menu (Figure 20), high-
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO. light Summary Displays and press DO.

(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 5), NOTE
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
ber and press DO. All vibration units should be in 9ips9 and
9deg9. To change units, refer to Software
(5) From the main menu (Figure 18), press the d Setup Instructions (WP 009 00).
or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.
e. Recall the main rotor ground balance data as fol-
(6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 7), press lows:
the d or f keys to highlight GRND BAL and press DO.
(1) From the Select Summary Display menu (Fig-
(7) From the main menu (Figure 18), press the d ure 21), highlight Main Rotor Ground Bal Data and press
or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO. DO.

NOTE (2) From the Main Rotor Ground Balance Sum-

mary Display (Figure 22) write the ground balance ips
Data is stored in memory with the most and deg in the appropriate blocks on the Main Rotor
recent data (Flight I.D.) at the top of the list. Ground Balance section of the data sheet.
Therefore, if the most recent data is being
recalled, select the first flight id. (3) Press QUIT once to get back to the Select
Summary Display menu (Figure 21), and continue with
(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 19), step f.
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired Flight I.D.
and press DO. f. Press QUIT until the main menu (Figure 18) is
seen.
c. With the correct Flight I.D. specified on the main
menu (Figure 18), press F2 (DISPLAY). g. Press OFF to turn the CADU off.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 18

S−70i 53 GRND BAL

Select Summary Display PAGE 1 OF 1 FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
SYNCHRONOUS VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
Main Rotor Ground Bal Data MR 1 / Rev Data (ips / deg)
STATE ROLL deg
PRINT ALL DISPLAYS
MR BAL 0.45 298

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Display [QUIT] Exit [LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

FG0581 IM1083
SA SA

Figure 21. 9Select Summary Display9 Menu Figure 22. Main Rotor Ground Balance Summary
Display Data Page
h. Continue with step (p. in Main Rotor Ground Bal-
ance Vibration Measurement PARA 7). NOTE

9. DETERMINING GROUND BALANCE WEIGHT Make sure that the weight currently
installed on the main rotor is known and
ADJUSTMENTS.
entered in the Previously Installed block on
the Main Rotor Balance portion of the data
NOTE
sheet. Use the Hardware-To-Weight Con-
version information on the data sheet to
Perform this procedure only if ground bal- figure out the actual weight in ounces.
ance vibration is not within the limit.
If the CADU is being operated on internal
For helicopters WITHOUT external tanks, batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
the ground balance limit for ground main or the DAU power is off) and the CADU
rotor 1/rev ROLL vibration is 0.20 ips (MR indicates low power (internal batteries
BAL ROLL must be 0.20 ips or less). require charging), perform one of the fol-
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
For helicopters WITH external tanks, the into the DAU using the CADU-to DAU
ground balance limit for ground main rotor cable and turn DAU power on. A second
1/rev OVERHEAD LATERAL vibration is method is to plug the CADU battery
0.30 ips (MR BAL OH_LAT must be 0.30 charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
ips or less). receptacle and plug the probe end of the
battery charger into the CADU. The CADU
a. If the ground balance vibration level is not within receptacle is located under the credit card
the limit, perform this procedure. If the ground balance is access panel on top of the CADU. The
within the limit, ground balancing is complete, go to step CADU batteries automatically recharge
(p. in the Main Rotor Ground Balance Vibration Mea- when the CADU is plugged into a power
surement PARA 7). source.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 19

(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 5),

press the d or f keys to highlight the desired tail num-
LIMITS ber and press DO.
S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10
Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits (5) From the main menu (Figure 18), press the d
PAGE 1 OF 1 or f keys to highlight Flight Plan and press DO.
LIMIT MEASURED
MR BAL MR Grd Balance 0.20 0.45 ips
(6) From the Flight Plans menu (Figure 7) press the
d or f keys to highlight GRND BAL and press DO.

(7) From the main menu (Figure 18) press the d

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down
[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All or f keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.

IM1084 NOTE
SA

Figure 23. 9LIMITS9 Screen in Diagnostics, Main Rotor Data is stored in memory with the most
Balance Exceeds Limits recent data at the top of the list. Therefore
if the most recent data is being recalled,
b. Get the copy of the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet
select the first flight id.
(Figure 2) that is being used for the aircraft currently
being balanced.
(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 19)
c. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
on. press DO.

NOTE e. With the correct Flight I.D. selected (Figure 18),

press the F3 key to enter the diagnostic mode in the test
Make sure that the proper Aircraft Type, set.
Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. are
specified prior to running diagnostics. If the NOTE
wrong Flight I.D. is specified, incorrect
adjustments will be called out. If the LIMITS display indicates that
Measurements are within specified limits or
d. From the main menu (Figure 18), make sure that the MEASURED ips level is less than the
the Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. LIMIT value, the vibration is acceptable and
are correctly specified. If all of the main menu parameters no corrective action is necessary. Complete
are correct, go to step e., otherwise continue on: this procedure to exit the diagnostic mode,
however no adjustments are required.
NOTE
In the LIMITS display, a 9?9 indicates that
You should change only the parameters data was not measured at that test state.
that are improperly specified.
The LIMITS display will show you what
(1) From the main menu (Figure 18), press the d measurements exceeded limits and what
or f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO. measurements were not taken. Any mea-
surement that is within limits will not be
(2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 4), press shown. To see the measured amplitude
the d or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, and ver- compared to the limit, press the d key and
sions 1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable, and press the ALL LIMITS display will be shown.
DO.
f. The limits display should be seen on the CADU
(3) From the main menu (Figure 18), press the d (Figure 23). From the LIMITS screen press DO to con-
or f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO. tinue.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 20

Balance section of the data sheet and make sure that the
values match the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen. If
the values match, go to step h. and continue the proce-
dure. If the values do not match, continue to change CUR-
Page 1 of 1
S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12 NOV 10 14:11 RENT CONFIGURATION screen.
ENTER CURRENT CONFIGURATION
BLADE MR HUB WEIGHT (1) To change a value in the current configuration
( OUNCE ) screen, press the s or g arrow keys until the desired blade
YEL 0.000 is highlighted.
BLU 0.000
RED 20.000
BLK 0.000 (2) Once the correct blade is highlighted, use the
keypad to enter the correct weight for the selected blade
and press DO to enter the value.
[DO] to Confirm [QUIT] to Abort
CLEAR CLR BLD CLR ADJ RESET (3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) above until all the
values from the previously installed main rotor blade
weight block on the data sheet are properly specified on
the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen. Once all values
F1 F2 F3 F4 are correct, continue with step h.

h. Once the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen is

properly specified (Figure 24), press DO to start diagnos-
tics.
IM1085
SA

Figure 24. 9CURRENT CONFIGURATION9 Screen In NOTE

Diagnostics
The Main Rotor Ground Balance Trouble-
shooting Flowchart is used only after the
CAUTION primary adjustment (main rotor hub
weight) fails to reduce main rotor ground
balance vibration to within the acceptance
The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen limit. Corrections made as a result of this
(Figure 24) identifies the weight that was flowchart are not immediately intended to
previously installed on the main rotor. Do reduce vibrations to the acceptance limit,
not mistake these values for the adjustments but are intended to correct any defect in
that need to be made. The adjustments that the main rotor that is preventing the main
need to be made will be displayed on the rotor from being balanced properly. There-
CORRECTIONS FOR screen, Figure 26. fore, after a corrective action is made from
this flowchart, you must repeat the Main
NOTE Rotor Ground Balance Vibration Measure-
ment procedure (PARA 7) and make
The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen required main rotor weight corrections until
acts as an inventory tool where you must the task is complete, or until instructed by
enter how much weight was installed on this procedure to re-enter the troubleshoot-
the main rotor when the vibration was ing flowchart.
measured. This allows the test set to make
sure that the maximum allowable weight is Any maintenance involving the replace-
not exceeded on any blade. ment / swapping of components or the
removal of main rotor hub weights may
g. Review the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen cause the vibration to increase when com-
(Figure 24), to make sure that the values entered match pared to the previous run. This may trigger
what was installed on the main rotor when the data was a diagnostic warning screen. If the diag-
measured. Refer to the Previously Installed weight block nostic warning screen indicates Vibration
or the last New Total block on the Main Rotor Ground Levels Increasing (Figure 25), and prior

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 21

maintenance was performed that explains j. The CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 26) tells
the increase, continue with step r. of this you what main rotor hub weight adjustments are required
procedure. to reduce main rotor ground balance vibration. Enter the
recommended weight changes in the appropriate Change
i. If either of the Diagnostic Warning screens (Figure Required block on the Main Rotor Balance section of the
25) is seen, go to the Main Rotor Balance Troubleshoot- data sheet.
ing Flowchart, Figure 31. If no diagnostic warning
screens are seen, continue with step j. k. From the CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 26),
press QUIT to exit.
NOTE
l. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 27), highlight
Main Rotor Balance weight corrections are View Predictions and press DO.
called out in units of ounces. A plus sign (+)
preceding the weight correction means add m. The RESPONSES FOR screen, (Figure 28), will
weight to that blade. A minus sign (-) pre- show you what the measured vibration level was and
ceding the weight correction means sub- what the vibration is predicted to be after the recom-
tract weight from that blade. mended adjustments are made. Write the measured
ground balance ips and deg in the appropriate blocks on
Weight is always added to and subtracted the Main Rotor Ground Balance section of the data sheet
from the weight that was installed on the if not already complete. This feature informs you if the
main rotor at the time the vibration was vibration is correctable. If the predicted vibration is within
measured. the limit, press DO and continue with step n. If the pre-
dicted vibration is not within the limit, it is not expected
If the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen that the vibration can be corrected with the maximum
is properly specified, the diagnostics will amount of weight. Press DO and continue on:
always try to remove weight from the main
rotor prior to adding weight. It is possible (1) From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 27), press
that the diagnostics may require adjustment QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode.
on all four blades, (adding weight to two
blades and removing weight from two (2) From the DIAGS display (Figure 29), press
blades), however, when all of the adjust- QUIT to exit diagnostics without updating the current
ments are made weight should never be configuration list.
installed on any more than two adjacent
blades. If weight ends up on more than two (3) From the main menu (Figure 18), press OFF to
adjacent blades, the CURRENT CONFIGU- turn the CADU off.
RATION screen was not properly specified
or an error was made during the adjust- (4) Refer to the Main Rotor Balance Troubleshoot-
ment. ing Flowchart and start at PT 3 (Figure 31).

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 22

Diagnostic Warning Diagnostic Warning

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11 12 NOV 10 S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11 12 NOV 10
PAGE 1 OF 1 PAGE 1 OF 1
Small Improvement Vibration Levels Increasing
Change in vibration levels less than
20% Potential Action:
Main Rotor balance adjustments are not Main Rotor balance adjustments are not
having desired results − Go to Main having desired results − Go to Main
Rotor Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart, Rotor Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart,
Fig 31, in WP 007 00 of the Fig 31, in WP 007 00 of the
TM 1−70−VIB TM 1−70−VIB

[LEFT] Page Up [RIGHT] Page Down [LEFT] Page Up [RIGHT] Page Down
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu [DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu

IM1086
SA

Figure 25. 9Diagnostic Warning9 Screens

NOTE

If you highlight Main Menu from the diag- CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 1 OF 1
S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12−NOV−10 14:11
nostic menu and press DO, the test set will
exit the diagnostic mode, automatically MR HUB WEIGHT (OUNCES)
modify the current configuration list, and + means Add weight
− means Remove weight
return to the main menu. If this occurs go to
Blades
step p.
YEL BLU RED BLK
+31.00 0.00 −20.00 0.00
n. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 27), press
QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode.
[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
o. From the DIAGS display (Figure 29), press DO if [DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu
you plan to make the last set of adjustments recommended
by the diagnostics. This will update the current configura- IM1087
SA

tion list by adding the recommended adjustments to the

Figure 26. Corrections Display Screen
old list. You will press QUIT if the test set recommended
adjustments are not going to be made. In this case the
current configuration list is not changed. (2) From the Diagnostic Menu (Figure 27), high-
light View Corrections and press DO.
p. From the main menu (Figure 18), press OFF to
turn the CADU off. (3) The CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 26),
will be seen. Return to step j. and continue the procedure.
q. Make the main rotor hub weight adjustments
specified on the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet. Refer to s. To exit diagnostics from a Diagnostic Warning
Main Rotor Hub Weight Adjustment (PARA 10). screen (Figure 25), perform the following:

r. If a Diagnostic Warning is seen (Figure 25) and

(1) From the Diagnostic Warning screen (Figure
hub weight adjustments are not required, go to step s. If a
25), press QUIT.
Diagnostic Warning is seen (Figure 25) and hub weight
adjustments are required as determined from the Main
Rotor Ground Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (2) From the Diagnostic Menu (Figure 27), press
perform the following: QUIT.

(1) From the Diagnostic Warning screen (Figure (3) From the DIAGS menu (Figure 29), press
25), press QUIT. QUIT.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 23

Diagnostics Menu

View Predictions
Edit Adjustables
View Corrections
View Limits
Edit Defaults
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0481
SA

Figure 27. Diagnostics Menu

(4) Press OFF to turn the CADU off. weight that exists on each main rotor blade in the Previ-
ously Installed weight block or appropriate New Total
(5) Continue with required troubleshooting. block and return to the Determining Ground Balance
Weight Adjustments procedure (PARA 9). Make sure that
10. MAIN ROTOR HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT. the CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 24) is
properly specified.
NOTE
c. On the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet (Figure 2),
Only make weight adjustments per the add or subtract the values entered in the Change Required
diagnostics. If at any time there is confu- block to or from the values entered in the Previously
sion that cannot be resolved regarding Installed block (or the last New Total block) and enter the
what weight was previously installed, the result in the next New Total block. The value entered in
weight adjustment that needs to be made, the New Total block is the total weight that should be
or the total weight expected to be installed installed on the main rotor after the adjustments are com-
after the weight adjustment is completed, pleted.
remove all the installed weight from the
main rotor and begin the task over again. d. Refer to the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet and
determine the blade that is going to be adjusted.
a. Review the Main Rotor Balance section of the data
sheet (Figure 2) that has the Previously Installed weight,
the vibration data, and the Change Required information CAUTION
written on it.

NOTE
Make sure that the proper blade is being
adjusted using the correct amount of
To determine the amount of weight installed
weight. If the wrong blade is adjusted or
on the main rotor , use the Hardware-To-
the incorrect amount of weight is changed,
Weight Conversion information provided
the ground balance vibration may
on the Main Rotor Ground Data Sheet.
increase.
b. Before removing any weight, determine the
amount of weight installed on the blade and compare that NOTE
weight to the value entered in the Previously Installed
weight block or the last New Total block on the Data 80 ounces (5.0 pounds) is the maximum
Sheet. If the weights match, continue with this procedure. weight that can be installed on any blade
If the weights do not match, enter the correct amount of spindle.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 24

Weight of 70106-08105-102 balance

RESPONSES FOR: PAGE 1 OF 1
washer is 1 ounce. S−70i 53 GRND BAL 12 NOV 10 14:11
Vibration Results: Measured Predicted
Weight of attaching hardware is about 2 Test Channel IPS DEG IPS DEG
ounces (one NAS566C65 bolt, one MR BAL ROLL 0.45 298 0.03 347
MS21044N6 nut, and one or two
NAS1149F0663P washers). Weight of
attaching hardware is included in the total
weight.
[UP] Prev Line [RIGHT] Next Line
A minimum of 1-1/2 threads must be [LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
exposed beyond nut after weight is [DO] / [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu
installed and nut is torqued. IM1088
SA

Maximum number of 70106-08105-102 Figure 28. View Predictions Display Within Diagnostics
balance washers that can be used per bolt
is 18, with the NAS1149F0663P washer
under the bolt head removed to obtain a CAUTION
5.0 pounds maximum. If the
NAS1149F0663P washer is installed Do not install any more than 80 ounces
under the bolt head, maximum balance (5.0 pounds) of weight on any one blade.
washers used per bolt is 17.
f. Install balance bolts, washers, balance washers
There are four locations per spindle to and nuts on the assigned spindle (Figure 30).
install required balance weight : two loca- g. Torque all nuts to 261- 289 inch-pounds.
tions on upper bracket, and two locations
on lower bracket. Weight may be added to h. Repeat procedure until all required weight
any location on a spindle in any order, as changes are complete.
long as maximum weight per bolt and
spindle are not exceeded. i. Make sure that all of the weight changes were
properly made on the main rotor. Compare the actual
weight installed against New Total shown on data sheet.
e. Determine weight change and add or subtract bal-
ance washers as required to make the necessary weight j. Repeat data measurement, refer to Main Rotor
correction. Ground Balance Vibration Measurement (PARA 7).

DIAGS

Do you wish to store the new

adjustment values?

PRESS DO for YES

PRESS QUIT for NO

FG0483
SA

Figure 29. 9DIAGS9 Display Exiting Diagnostics

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 25

WASHER
BOLT
WASHER
BALANCE
NUT (TORQUE BRACKET
261−289 IN. LBS)

BALANCE WASHERS
A 70106−08105−102
(AS REQUIRED)
SPINDLE
BALANCE
BRACKET

FB2354
SA

Figure 30. Main Rotor Hub Weight Installation

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 26

NOTES
WAS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN
1. MAKE SURE THAT ALL MAIN ROTOR HUB WEIGHT CORRECTIONS ARE
"VIBRATION LEVELS INCREASING" MADE PROPERLY. IF THIS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN IS SEEN
SEEN ON CADU? REPEATEDLY WITHOUT EXPLANATION THEN REPLACE BOTH
(SEE NOTE 1) ACCELEROMETERS AND ACCELEROMETER CABLES AND REPEAT
THE PROCEDURE. IF THE DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN STILL
PERSISTS, THEN GO TO "PT A" ON SHEET 2 OF THIS FLOWCHART.
YES NO
2. MAINTENANCE INVOLVING THE REPLACEMENT OR SWAPPING OF
COMPONENTS, OR REMOVAL OF MAIN ROTOR BALANCE WEIGHTS
MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASE OF MR GROUND BALANCE VIBRA−
TION WHEN COMPARED TO THE VIBRATION MEASURED ON THE
PREVIOUS BALANCE RUN.

WAS MAINTENANCE PERFORMED ON THE MAIN ROTOR WAS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN
PRIOR TO THIS LAST RUN THAT WOULD EXPLAIN AN "SMALL IMPROVEMENT"
INCREASE IN MR GROUND BALANCE VIBRATION? SEEN ON CADU?
(SEE NOTE 2)
YES NO
YES NO

PT 3

CHECK ALL VIBRATION EQUIPMENT FOR PROPER HAVE THE RADS−AT DIAGNOSTICS BEEN RUN
INSTALLATION, MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE, TEST A SECOND TIME AFTER MAKING SURE
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, THIS WP. THAT THE CURRENTLY INSTALLED HUB
PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO: WEIGHTS EXACTLY MATCH THE HUB WEIGHTS
ACCELEROMETER INSTALLATION AND ORIENTATION CALLED OUT ON THE RADS−AT CURRENT
MAGNETIC PICKUP INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SCREEN?
MAIN ROTOR BLADE SEQUENCING

WAS ALL EQUIPMENT PROPERLY INSTALLED? YES NO

YES NO

REFER TO DETERMINING GROUND BALANCE WEIGHT 1. VERIFY THAT THE WEIGHT CURRENTLY INSTALLED
ADJUSTMENTS, THIS WP, AND CONTINUE PROCEDURE. ON THE MAIN ROTOR IS PROPERLY ENTERED ON THE
STARTING AT STEP R. TO GET REQUIRED MAIN "PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED" OR LAST "NEW TOTAL"
ROTOR HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENTS. BLOCK OF THE DATA SHEET.

2. REPEAT DETERMINING GROUND BALANCE WEIGHT

ADJUSTMENTS, THIS WP. MAKE SURE THE CURRENT
CONFIGURATION SCREEN IN DIAGNOSTICS EXACTLY
MATCHES THE WEIGHT THAT IS ACTUALLY INSTALLED
1. REFER TO DETERMINING GROUND BALANCE ON THE MAIN ROTOR.
WEIGHT ADJUSTMENTS, THIS WP, STEP S.
TO EXIT DIAGNOSTICS.

2. CORRECT INSTRUMENTATION PROBLEMS IN

ACCORDANCE WITH MAIN ROTOR BALANCE
TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION THIS WP. MAX ALLOWABLE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED
OR IS BEING INSTALLED ON THE MAIN ROTOR
3. REMOVE ALL HUB WEIGHT INSTALLED ON THE WITH INADEQUATE REDUCTION IN VIBRATION
MAIN ROTOR. BEING PREDICTED. THERE IS A
PROBLEM WITH A MAIN ROTOR COMPONENT
4. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO SHOW THAT OR COMPONENTS THAT MUST BE CORRECTED.
NO BALANCE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED ON THE MAIN
ROTOR.

5. RE−MEASURE MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE A

DATA, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.
FB2355_1
SA

Figure 31. Main Rotor Ground Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 5)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 27

HAS MAIN ROTOR BLADE SURFACE FINISH BEEN INSPECTED?

YES NO

GO TO SHEET 5

PT 1 PT 2

HAS THE MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE PROBLEM BEEN HAS THE MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE PROBLEM BEEN
ISOLATED TO A MAIN ROTOR BLADE STATIC UN−BALANCE. ISOLATED TO AN UN−BALANCE IN THE MAIN ROTOR HEAD.

YES NO NO YES

GO TO SHEET 3 GO TO SHEET 4

HAS THE MAIN ROTOR HEAD BEEN INSPECTED? INSPECT THE MAIN ROTOR HEAD FOR THE FOLLOWING:
MISSING BIFILAR HARDWARE
YES NO MISSING DE−ICE HARNESS ON ONE, TWO, OR THREE
BLADES
IMPROPERLY ROUTED DE−ICE HARNESSES
MISSING SPINDLE RETAINING RODS

WERE ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND?

HAS ALL LANDING GEAR BEEN PURGED AND RE−SERVICED?
NO YES
YES NO

1. PURGE HYDRAULIC FLUID IN ALL THREE LANDING GEAR 1. CORRECT ALL DISCREPANCIES.
UNTIL ALL AIR IS REMOVED FROM SYSTEM.
2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN ROTOR
2. RE−SERVICE ALL LANDING GEAR. BALANCE WEIGHTS, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR HUB
3. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN BALANCE WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.
WEIGHT. 3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT NO
4. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT NO BALANCE BALANCE WEIGHTS ARE INSTALLED ON THE MAIN
WEIGHTS ARE INSTALLED ON THE MAIN ROTOR. ROTOR.
5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT, REFER 4. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT,
TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE
THIS WP. MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

HAVE ALL FOUR MAIN ROTOR BLADES BEEN RE−INDEXED

ONE BLADE POSITION? 1. USING GREASE PENCIL MARK THE LIGHT BLADE (BLADE
WITH MAX. BALANCE WEIGHTS INSTALLED) WITH AN "L".
YES NO 2. USING GREASE PENCIL MARK THE HEAVY BLADE (BLADE
OPPOSITE BLADE WITH MAXIMUM BALANCE WEIGHT)
WITH AN "H".
3. RE−INDEX ALL FOUR BLADES AS FOLLOWS: MOVE RED
IS MAX. BALANCE WEIGHT STILL BEING ADDED TO THE BLADE TO BLACK ARM, BLACK BLADE TO YELLOW ARM,
LIGHT BLADE (BLADE MARKED WITH THE "L")? YELLOW BLADE TO BLUE ARM, BLUE BLADE TO RED ARM.
4. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN ROTOR
YES NO BALANCE WEIGHT, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR HUB
WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.
5. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT NO BALANCE
A MAIN ROTOR BLADE HAS THE MAIN ROTOR HEAD IS WEIGHTS ARE INSTALLED ON THE MAIN ROTOR.
A STATIC UN−BALANCE MISINSTALLED OR HAS A 6. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING (WP 006 00).
WHICH IS CAUSING THE MASS UN−BALANCE WHICH
GROUND BALANCE IS CAUSING THE GROUND 7. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT, REFER
PROBLEM. BALANCE PROBLEM. TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT,
THIS WP.
GO TO "PT 1" IN THIS GO TO "PT 2" IN THIS
FLOWCHART. FLOWCHART. FB2355_2B
SA

Figure 31. Main Rotor Ground Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 5)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 28

FROM SHEET 2

MAIN ROTOR BLADES HAVE BEEN IDENTIFIED AS THE

CAUSE OF THE GROUND BALANCE PROBLEM.

HAS THE HEAVY BLADE (BLADE PREVIOUSLY MARKED WITH

AN "H") BEEN SWAPPED WITH AN ADJACENT BLADE?

YES NO

IS MAXIMUM BALANCE WEIGHT STILL BEING INSTALLED 1. SWAP HEAVY BLADE (BLADE PREVIOUSLY MARKED
OPPOSITE OF THE HEAVY BLADE (BLADE PREVIOUSLY WITH "H") WITH AN ADJACENT BLADE. SELECT THE
MARKED WITH AN "H")? ADJACENT BLADE THAT HAS BALANCE WEIGHT
INSTALLED. IF NO WEIGHT IS INSTALLED ON
YES NO EITHER ADJACENT BLADE, THEN SELECT EITHER BLADE.
THIS WILL PLACE THE LIGHT BLADES OPPOSITE EACH
OTHER AND THE HEAVY BLADES OPPOSITE EACH OTHER.

2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN ROTOR

BALANCE WEIGHTS, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR HUB
WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.

3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT NO

BALANCE WEIGHTS ARE INSTALLED ON THE MAIN
ROTOR.

4. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING,

(WP 006).

5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT,

REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

1. REPLACE HEAVY MAIN ROTOR BLADE (BLADE PRE− 1. REPLACE LIGHT MAIN ROTOR BLADE (BLADE PRE−
VIOUSLY MARKED WITH "H"). VIOUSLY MARKED WITH "L").

2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN ROTOR 2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN ROTOR
BLANCE WEIGHT, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR HUB BALANCE WEIGHT, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR HUB
WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP. WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.

3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT NO 3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT NO
BALANCE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED ON THE MAIN BALANCE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED ON THE MAIN
ROTOR. ROTOR.

4. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING, 4. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING,
(WP OO6). (WP 006).

5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT, 5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT,
REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP. MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

FB2355_3A
SA

Figure 31. Main Rotor Ground Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 5)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 29

FROM SHEET 2

MAIN ROTOR HEAD HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED AS THE CAUSE

OF THE GROUND BALANCE PROBLEM.

WAS THE MAIN ROTOR HEAD RECENTLY REMOVED FROM

THE AIRCRAFT?

YES NO

HAS THE MAIN ROTOR HEAD BEEN RE−SEATED?

NO YES

1. REMOVE AND REINSTALL THE MAIN ROTOR HEAD. HAS SPINDLE NUT INSTALLATION BEEN CHECKED?
PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THE SPLIT CONE
INSTALLATION AND THE LOWER PRESSURE NO YES
PLATE GAP WHEN INSTALLING THE MAIN ROTOR
HEAD.

2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN

ROTOR BALANCE WEIGHTS, REFER TO MAIN
ROTOR HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP. CHECK SPINDLE NUT INSTALLATION ON ALL FOUR
SPINDLES. PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THE
3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT DIMENSION CHECK REQUIRED BETWEEN INBOARD
NO BALANCE WEIGHTS ARE INSTALLED ON THE END OF SPINDLE NUT TO THE INBOARD
MAIN ROTOR. END OF RETAINING ROD FACE.
REFER TO THE APPLICABLE
4. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING, MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THIS CHECK.
THIS MANUAL.
WERE ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND?
5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT,
REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE YES NO
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

1. CORRECT SPINDLE NUT INSTALLATION AS 1. REPLACE SPINDLE ELASTOMERIC BEARING ON

REQUIRED. THE SPINDLE OPPOSITE FROM WHERE MAX. HUB
WEIGHT IS INSTALLED. IF STILL UNACCEPTABLE
2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN ROTOR CHANGE ELASTOMERIC BEARING ON SPINDLE
BALANCE WEIGHT, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR HUB THAT HAS MAX. WEIGHT INSTALLED.
WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.
2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN
3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT ROTOR BALANCE WEIGHTS, REFER TO MAIN
NO BALANCE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED ON THE MAIN ROTOR HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.
ROTOR.
3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT THAT
4. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING, NO BALANCE WEIGHTS ARE INSTALLED ON THE
(WP 006). MAIN ROTOR.

5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT, 4. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING,
REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE THIS MANUAL.
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.
5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASUREMENT,
REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCE
MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

FB2355_4
SA

Figure 31. Main Rotor Ground Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 5)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 007 00
Page 30

FROM SHEET 2

INSPECT SURFACE FINISH ON ALL

FOUR MAIN ROTOR BLADES FOR EXCESSIVE
ROUGHNESS AND IMPROPER CONTOUR:

NOTES
SURFACE FINISH PROBLEMS WITH MAIN ROTOR
BLADES CAN GREATLY AFFECT GROUND BALANCE
VIBRATION.
FINISH PROBLEMS NEAR THE BLADE TIP WILL
HAVE THE GREATEST EFFECT.
WHEN INSPECTING BLADE FOR SURFACE FINISH,
INSPECT BOTH TOP AND BOTTOM SURFACES OF
BLADE, INCLUDING TIP CAP.
SURFACE FINISH PROBLEMS ARE USUALLY DUE
TO IMPROPERLY SANDED BLADE PAINT WHICH
WILL HAVE THE CONSISTENCY OF SANDPAPER,
OR IMPROPER SURFACE CONTOUR DUE TO
EXTENSIVE BLADE REPAIR.
PROPER SURFACE FINISH WILL FEEL QUITE
SMOOTH TO THE TOUCH. INSPECT TOP AND
BOTTOM OF EACH BLADE FOR IMPROPER
SURFACE FINISH.
WERE ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND?

YES NO

1. CORRECT PROBLEMS FOUND WITH BLADE RE−ENTER THIS FLOWCHART AT "PT 1"
SURFACE FINISH. ON SHEET 2 AND CONTINUE TO
TROUBLESHOOT THE
2. REMOVE ALL PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED MAIN GROUND BALANCE PROBLEM.
ROTOR BALANCE WEIGHT, REFER TO MAIN
ROTOR HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, THIS WP.
3. MODIFY THE DATA SHEET TO REFLECT
THAT NO BALANCE WEIGHT IS INSTALLED
ON THE MAIN ROTOR.
4. PERFORM MAIN ROTOR GROUND TRACKING
(WP 006 00).
5. REPEAT THE GROUND BALANCE MEASURE−
MENT, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND
BALANCE MEASUREMENT, THIS WP.

FB2355_5A
SA

Figure 31. Main Rotor Ground Balance Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 5 of 5)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

MAIN ROTOR 1/REV FLIGHT TUNING

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

Customer Service Notice ......................................................................................... CSN No. 70-64

RADS-AT Operation and Maintenance Manual ........................................................ 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page No.

Aircraft Configuration .............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Test Conditions ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Test Procedure, Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning ........................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Adjusting Main Rotor Pitch Control Rod ............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Adjusting Main Rotor Trim Tab ...................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Autorotation Adjustments .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Determining Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Adjustments .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing Adjustables In Diagnostics ................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Identifying Suspect Main Rotor Blades ................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Identifying Suspect Main Rotor Dampers ............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Main Rotor Hub Weight Adjustments .................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning, Recalling Data ......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning, Test Equipment Installation .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning, Test Equipment Removal .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning, Vibration Measurement ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Main Rotor System Inspections ...................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Vibration Task Sequencing .......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

Model 991 Accelerometer (54mV/g) (Wilcoxon

Research)
29103900 Cable Distribution Unit (GE Aviation
Systems)
29104700 28 VDC Power Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 2

Support Equipment Required (Cont)

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

29105403 Magnetic RPM Sensor Cable (GE Aviation

Systems)
29105605 Accelerometer Cable (54 mV/g) 25 ft
length (GE Aviation Systems)
29283200 Cable Distribution Unit Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29310700 UTD-Tracker (GE Aviation Systems)
29313000 L Shaped Accelerometer Mount Bracket (GE
Aviation Systems)
29315000 CADU Battery Charger
29325601 DAU-to-CADU Cable (GE Aviation
Systems)
29325701 UTD Cable - 25 ft (GE Aviation Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE
Aviation Systems)
29481400 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) (GE Aviation
Systems)
29743200 UTD Bracket S-70i / H-60 (GE Aviation
Systems)
3M-7610 Reflective Tape (3M)
70700-20308-041 Trim Tab Adjustment Tool (Sikorsky)
- Torque Wrench (0 - 30 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (30 - 200 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (100 - 600 in. lbs.)
- Torque Wrench (150 - 750 in. lbs.)

Materials Required

Specification No./Part No. Nomenclature

MS20995NC32 Safety Wire

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 3

1. VIBRATION TASK SEQUENCING (Figure 1).

If flight tuning is done with external tanks
installed it is important that the external fuel
CAUTION tanks be full or nearly full during data mea-
surement for the most consistent results. The
aircraft setup file with version 1.0EPP must
You must be familiar with CSN No. 70-64 be used for aircraft configured with EPP.
Figure 9, which contains unique Main The aircraft setup file with version 1.0 must
Rotor component troubleshooting not pres- be used for aircraft configured without EPP.
ently included in this manual (TM 1-70-VIB) Helicopters WITH wide chord blades (EPP)
before performing Main Rotor 1/rev flight exhibit a different response than helicop-
tuning checks. ters WITHOUT EPP due to significant differ-
ences between the two Main Rotor blade
a. Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning is required after designs. The aircraft setup file versions 1.0
Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006 00) and Main and 1.0EPP corresponds to aircraft config-
Rotor Ground Balancing (WP 007 00) are completed. ured without EPP and with EPP respectively.
It is imperative that the correct version is
NOTE used.

The aircraft setup file with the 70iCEF air- b. Once the initial ground balance is completed,
craft type must be used for aircraft configu- ground balance does not have to be performed again
rations with external tanks installed unless the ground balance is above the limit after Main
Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning is complete.
The aircraft setup file with the S-70i aircraft
type must be used for aircraft configura-
c. For aircraft WITHOUT external tanks installed:
tions without external tanks installed.
Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning is not required after post-
flight ground balancing unless a Main Rotor corrective
Helicopters WITHOUT external tanks action other than Main Rotor hub weight adjustment (for
installed exhibit a combination of vertical example changing a Main Rotor blade) was required to
and roll Main Rotor 1/rev vibration satisfy the ground balance limit.
response in-flight. The FLT CHK flight plan
for the S-70i aircraft type uses cockpit ver-
tical and roll measurements for Main Rotor d. For aircraft WITH external tanks installed: Main
1/rev flight tuning. The FLT CHK flight plan Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning is required after post-flight
for the S-70i aircraft type uses pitch control ground balancing since Main Rotor hub weight adjust-
rod and trim tab adjustment to correct ment is an integral part of Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tun-
in-flight Main Rotor 1/rev vibration. ing on helicopters WITH external tanks installed. How-
ever, post-flight ground balancing should not normally be
Helicopters WITH external tanks installed required for helicopters WITH external tanks installed
exhibit a combination of vertical and lat- because Main Rotor hub weight is used to correct both
eral Main Rotor 1/rev vibration response ground and in-flight Main Rotor 1/rev vibration with this
in-flight. The FLT CHK flight plan for the helicopter configuration.
70iCEF aircraft type uses a cockpit over-
head lateral measurement for Main Rotor e. Perform Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006
1/rev flight tuning. The FLT CHK flight plan 00) and then Main Rotor Ground Balancing (WP 007 00)
for the 70iCEF aircraft type uses pitch con- prior to the first flight if any of the following have
trol rod, trim tab, and hub weight adjust- occurred:
ment to correct in-flight Main Rotor 1/rev
vibration. (1) A Main Rotor blade was replaced.

The FLT CHK flight plans for the S-70i and

70iCEF aircraft types employ different (2) A pitch control rod was replaced
measurements and different diagnostic set-
ups, one cannot be substituted for the other. (3) A pitch control rod end was replaced.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 4

ALL TASKS WITHIN DOTTED BOX CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED SIMULTANEOUSLY

WP 003 00 WP 005 00 WP 006 00

TAIL ROTOR BALANCE OIL COOLER VIBRATION MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING
CHECK
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. 1. MAIN ROTOR BLADE REPLACED.
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF TAIL
ROTOR RETENTION PLATE BOLTS. 2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVING OF 2. PCR OR PC ROD END REPLACED.
ANY OIL COOLER SHAFT ATTACHMENT
3. THE ADJUSTMENT OF ANY TAIL
BOLTS (INPUT OR OUTPUT). 3. PCR’S ADJUSTED DURING MR RIG.
ROTOR PITCH LINKS.
3. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY 4. MAIN ROTOR HEAD REMOVED.
BOLTS THAT SECURE OIL COOLER
TO AIRFRAME. 5. MAIN ROTOR QCU REMOVED.

6. MR SPINDLE REMOVED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS: REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. 100% NR 100%NR, NOSE INTO WIND

WP 004 00 WP 007 00
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING
BALANCE TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING: 1. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION. FLAT PITCH TRACKING, THIS MANUAL.
2. GROUND VIBRATION DISCREPANCY
2. THE LOOSENING OR REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTS.
BOLTS THAT ATTACH THE ENGINE
SHAFT TO THE INPUT MODULE 3. COMPLETION OF MAIN ROTOR
FLANGE. 1 / REV TUNING, THIS MANUAL.
4. BLADE RETENTION PIN REPLACED.
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:
GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND. GROUND RUN, FLAT PITCH
100% NR, NOSE INTO WIND.

WP 008 00
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
TASK REQUIRED FOLLOWING:
1. COMPLETION OF PHASE INSPECTION.
2. FOLLOWING MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING.
3. INFLIGHT VIBRATION DISCREPANCY EXISTS.
4. MAIN ROTOR DAMPER OR DAMPER BEARING REPLACED.
5. MAIN ROTOR PCR BEARING REPLACED.
6. MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAP REPLACED.

REQUIRED FLIGHT CONDITIONS:

WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS WITH EXTERNAL TANKS
FP GROUND, 100% NR FP GROUND, 100% NR
OGE HOVER, 100% NR OGE HOVER, 100% NR
80 KTS, 100% NR 80 KTS, 100% NR
120 KTS, 100% NR 120 KTS, 100% NR
140KTS, 100% NR VH, 100% NR
VH, 100% NR

IM1025
SA

Figure 1. Vibration Task Sequencing

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 5

(4) Pitch control rods were adjusted during a Main larity between Main Rotor blades. Although dissimilarity
Rotor rig procedure. between Main Rotor blades is typically the cause of
in-flight Main Rotor 1/rev vibration it is possible that a
(5) A Main Rotor head was removed. problem in the Main Rotor head or Main Rotor system
could result in a Main Rotor 1/rev vibration that is not
(6) A Main Rotor QCU was removed correctable using the above adjustments. To try to make
sure that these types of problems do not impede the Main
(7) A Main Rotor spindle was removed. Rotor 1/rev flight tuning effort two methods are used to
check for Main Rotor system faults in this procedure:
f. Perform Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning if any of
the following have occurred: (1) A brief Main Rotor system inspection is recom-
mended prior to the start of Main Rotor 1/rev flight tun-
(1) Any of the aircraft Phase Inspections have ing. This inspection is included in this procedure and will
been completed. identify primary Main Rotor system faults that could
impede the Main Rotor 1/rev flight tuning effort.
(2) Following completion of Main Rotor Flat Pitch
Tracking (WP 006 00) and Main Rotor Ground Balanc-
ing (WP 007 00). Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking and (2) This procedure uses a number of flights con-
Main Rotor Ground Balancing are required following sidered reasonable in which to complete this task and
Main Rotor maintenance that is expected to change Main employs two diagnostic checks programmed into the test
Rotor 1/rev vibration. set to determine if the tuning process is proceeding in an
acceptable fashion. If too many flights are made before
(3) In-flight vibration discrepancy was written up vibration is adequately reduced troubleshooting will be
by the aircrew. recommended.

(4) A Main Rotor blade tip cap was replaced. d. If problems are encountered with the Main Rotor
1/rev tuning process troubleshooting will be recom-
(5) A Main Rotor damper was replaced. mended by this procedure to identify Main Rotor system
faults that could be impeding the Main Rotor 1/rev tuning
(6) A Main Rotor damper bearing was replaced. process. It is important to realize that any corrective
action made during troubleshooting (such as the replace-
(7) A Main Rotor pitch control rod bearing was ment of a Main Rotor component) is not immediately
replaced. intended to reduce vibration to within limits but is
intended to correct the fault that may be impeding the
2. PURPOSE. tuning process. Therefore it is necessary to repeat the tun-
ing process after corrective maintenance is performed
a. This procedure will measure all required in-flight during troubleshooting.
vibration (both Main Rotor 1/rev and 4/rev) and blade
track data, compare that data with acceptance limits, and 3. TEST CONDITIONS.
provide corrective actions to correct Main Rotor 1/rev
vibration if vibration exceeds limits. If Main Rotor 4/rev NOTE
vibration exceeds limits AVC troubleshooting is required.

b. A combination of pitch control rod, trim tab, and This task may become difficult in turbulent
hub weight adjustment is used to reduce in-flight Main conditions. If turbulence is encountered, fly
Rotor 1/rev vibration in this procedure. In-flight Main to an altitude with smooth air before mea-
Rotor 1/rev vibration is reduced with pitch control rod suring forward airspeed data points.
and trim tab adjustment on helicopters WITHOUT exter-
nal tanks. In-flight Main Rotor 1/rev vibration is reduced a. It is preferable that all flights be conducted during
with pitch control rod, trim tab, and hub weight adjust- daylight hours; however, this task can be accomplished
ment on helicopters WITH external tanks. under any light conditions. For dusk, dawn, or night fly-
ing, make sure that reflective tape is installed on all four
c. The adjustments used to reduce in-flight Main blades. Refer to Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006
Rotor 1/rev vibration primarily compensate for dissimi- 00) for reflective tape installation instructions.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 6

4. AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION. 6. MAIN ROTOR 1/REV FLIGHT TUNING, TEST

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.
NOTE
NOTE
It is highly recommended that the following
inspections be performed prior to the initial Be sure that all accelerometers are oriented
flight (refer to applicable maintenance properly and all accelerometer cables are
manual). If these inspections were com- connected to the proper receptacle on the
pleted prior to Main Rotor Flat Pitch Track- DAU and CDU.
ing (WP 006 00), they do not need to be
repeated. Be sure that the BLACK (BLK) Main Rotor
blade is over the nose of the helicopter
• Main rotor PCR bearings for wear. when the magnetic pickup and interrupter
are aligned.
• Main rotor damper bearings for wear.
Be sure that the Main Rotor blades are
• Swashplate, scissors, and spherical bear- color coded correctly.
ings for wear.
Any problems with the above installations
• Main rotor blade tip caps for cracks. may result in incorrect PCR and trim tab
adjustments.
a. The helicopter must be complete and ready for
flight up to the Vh airspeed. The same equipment that was installed for
the Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking task is
5. TEST PROCEDURE, MAIN ROTOR 1/REV required for this procedure. Make sure that
FLIGHT TUNING. all equipment is secured and ready for
flight.

CAUTION a. Install vibration test equipment. Refer to Main

Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006 00).

You must be familiar with CSN No. 70-64 b. Return to PT 2 in the Flight Tuning Flowchart (Fig-
Figure 9, which contains unique Main ure 2).
Rotor component troubleshooting not pres-
ently included in this manual (TM 1-70-VIB) 7. MAIN ROTOR 1/REV FLIGHT TUNING,
before performing Main Rotor 1/rev flight VIBRATION MEASUREMENT.
tuning checks.

NOTE CAUTION

This procedure is flowchart based. Much of

the linking of steps in the procedure is done You must be familiar with CSN No. 70-64
via the flowchart. An in-depth understand- Figure 9, which contains unique Main
ing of the flowchart will greatly simplify this Rotor component troubleshooting not pres-
procedure. ently included in this manual (TM 1-70-VIB)
before performing Main Rotor 1/rev flight
a. If the helicopter is preparing for the initial flight, tuning checks.
then enter the Flight Tuning Flowchart (Figure 2) at PT 1.
NOTE
b. If the helicopter has already flown once and is
ready to fly on successive flights, then enter the Flight Keystrokes on the CADU are identified by
Tuning Flow chart (Figure 2) at PT 2. the use of bold print.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 7

INFLIGHT VIBRATION CHECK IS REQUIRED

PT 1

NOTE
THE FOLLOWING INSPECTIONS ARE HIGHLY RECOMMENDED BEFORE BEGINNING THIS TASK. IF THESE INSPECTIONS
WERE COMPLETED PRIOR TO FLAT PITCH TRACKING (THIS MANUAL) DO NOT REPEAT INSPECTIONS.

MAIN ROTOR PCR BEARINGS FOR WEAR.

MAIN ROTOR DAMPER BEARINGS FOR WEAR.
SWASHPLATE, SCISSORS, AND SPHERICAL BEARINGS FOR WEAR.
MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAPS FOR CRACKS.

INSTALL VIBRATION TEST EQUIPMENT, REFER TO TEST EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (THIS WP).

MAKE SURE THAT:

ACCELEROMETERS ARE PROPERLY ORIENTED.

ACCELEROMETER CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO CORRECT RECEPTACLE.
BLACK MAIN ROTOR BLADE IS OVER THE NOSE OF AIRCRAFT WHEN MAGNETIC RPM SENSOR AND INTERRUPTER ARE ALIGNED.
ALL MAIN ROTOR BLADES ARE COLOR CODED PROPERLY.

PT 2

WERE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS REPLACED PRIOR TO THIS FLIGHT?

ONE OR MORE MAIN ROTOR BLADES REPLACED.

ONE OR MORE PCRS OR PC ROD ENDS REPLACED.
MAIN ROTOR HEAD REMOVED.
MAIN ROTOR QCU REMOVED.
ONE OR MORE MAIN ROTOR SPINDLES REMOVED.

YES NO

WAS MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING COMPLETED IS THIS THE FIRST FLIGHT OF THE MAIN ROTOR
AFTER THE COMPONENTS WERE REPLACED? 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING EVOLUTION?

YES NO YES NO

COMPLETE MAIN ROTOR FLAT PITCH TRACKING,

THIS MANUAL.

WAS MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING COMPLETED AFTER WAS MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING COMPLETED PRIOR
THE COMPONENTS WERE REPLACED? TO THIS?

YES NO YES NO

COMPLETE MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING, THIS MANUAL. COMPLETE MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING, THIS MANUAL.

FB4038_1A
TO SHEET 2 SA

Figure 2. Flight Tuning Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 8

FROM SHEET 1
PT 3

MEASURE INFLIGHT VIBRATION AND TRACK DATA. REFER TO VIBRATION MEASUREMENT (THIS WP).

MAKE SURE THAT ALL TEST CONDITIONS ARE MEASURED.

MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN ROTOR SPEED IS AT 100% FOR ALL THE TEST
CONDITIONS.
HOLD EACH FLIGHT CONDITION STEADY DURING THE ENTIRE MEASUREMENT,
AND MEASURE ALL DATA IN SMOOTH AIR.
IF TURBULENCE IS ENCOUNTERED TRY TO FIND SMOOTHER CONDITIONS
AT A DIFFERENT ALTITUDE.

PT 4

COMPLETE THE DATA SHEET, REFER TO RECALLING DATA (THIS WP).

HAS THE MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV VIBRATION PREVIOUSLY BEEN

CHECKED AND ACCEPTED WITHIN LIMITS?

YES NO

ARE THE FOLLOWING MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV VIBRATION LIMITS SATISFIED?

IF HELICOPTER DOES NOT HAVE EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED:
120 KTS AND 140 KTS (WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS) "P_HEEL" 4 / REV VIBRATION LEVEL 0.60 IPS OR LESS.
AND
120 KTS AND 140 KTS (WITHOUT EXTERNAL TANKS) "VERT" 4 / REV VIBRATION LEVEL 0.40 IPS OR LESS.
IF HELICOPTER HAS EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED:
80 KTS AND 120 KTS (WITH EXTERNAL TANKS) "P_HEEL" 4 / REV VIBRATION LEVEL 0.60 IPS OR LESS.
AND
80 KTS AND 120 KTS (WITH EXTERNAL TANKS) "VERT" 4 / REV VIBRATION LEVEL 0.40 IPS OR LESS.

YES NO

MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV VIBRATION IS MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV VIBRATION IS UNACCEPTABLE.

ACCEPTABLE.

CONTINUE WITH THIS FLOWCHART

IF REQUIRED, PERFORM BOTH THE

MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING PROCEDURES
(THIS WP) AND AVC TROUBLESHOOTING
AT THE SAME TIME.

CONTINUE THIS FLOWCHART

IM1333_2
TO SHEET 3 SA

Figure 2. Flight Tuning Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 9

FROM SHEET 2

ARE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV VIBRATION LIMITS SATISFIED? (SEE ALSO TABLE 1 AND TABLE 2)
IF HELICOPTER DOES NOT HAVE EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED:
VERT 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.25 IPS OR LESS AT: HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, 140KTS
VERT 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.30 IPS OR LESS AT: VH
ROLL 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.20 IPS OR LESS AT: HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, 140KTS
ROLL 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.25 IPS OR LESS AT: VH
IF HELICOPTER HAS EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED:
VERT 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.25 IPS OR LESS AT: HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, VH
LATERAL 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.25 IPS OR LESS AT: HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, VH

YES NO
PT 5

CHECK MAIN ROTOR AUTOROTATION HAVE FOUR (4) FLIGHTS BEEN MADE ON THE AIRCRAFT
(REFER TO APPLICABLE FLIGHT MANUAL). SINCE THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART WAS LAST USED?
IS AUTOROTATION RPM ACCEPTABLE?

NO YES YES NO

ADJUST ALL FOUR PCRS AS REQUIRED TO GO TO THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
CORRECT AUTOROTATION RPM, REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART (FIGURE 45) AND
AUTOROTATION ADJUSTMENT (THIS WP). ENTER FLOWCHART AT "PT A".

ONCE THE AUTOROTATION ADJUSTMENTS ARE

COMPLETE, THEN RE−ENTER THIS FLOWCHART
AT "PT 3". RUN RADS−AT DIAGNOSTICS TO GET MAIN
ROTOR ADJUSTMENTS TO REDUCE MAIN ROTOR
1 / REV VIBRATION, REFER TO DETERMINING
MAIN ROTOR INFLIGHT 1 / REV ADJUSTMENTS (THIS WP).
IS GROUND BALANCE VIBRATION WITHIN THE LIMIT?
IF HELICOPTER DOES NOT HAVE EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED: IS A DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN SEEN?
ROLL 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.20 IPS OR LESS AT:
GROUND NO YES
IF HELICOPTER HAS EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED:
LATERAL 1 / REV VIBRATION SHALL BE 0.30 IPS OR LESS AT:
GROUND

YES NO

POST FLIGHT GROUND BALANCING IS REQUIRED.

REFER TO MAIN ROTOR GROUND BALANCING,
VIBRATION MEASUREMENT, THIS MANUAL.
IF HELICOPTER DOES NOT HAVE EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED:
GO TO THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING CHECK DOES NOT
TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART
HAVE TO BE REPEATED AFTER POSTFLIGHT GROUND BALANCE
IS CORRECTED USING ONLY HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT. (FIGURE 45).
IF THE HELICOPTER HAS EXTERNAL TANKS INSTALLED:
THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING CHECK MUST BE
REPEATED AFTER POST−FLIGHT GROUND BALANCE IS
CORRECTED USING ONLY HUB WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT.
AFTER COMPLETING POST−FLIGHT GROUND BALANCE WAS
MAIN ROTOR MAINTENANCE OTHER THAN HUB WEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE ACCEPTABLE
GROUND BALANCE?
NO YES

FB4038_3C
TO SHEET 4 TO SHEET 4 SA

Figure 2. Flight Tuning Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 10

FROM SHEET 3 FROM SHEET 3

RE−ENTER THIS FLOWCHART AT "PT 2".

MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV VIBRATION IS ACCEPTABLE.
IF MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV VIBRATION
IS OUT OF LIMITS, AVC TROUBLESHOOTING IS REQUIRED
IF BOTH 1 / REV AND 4 / REV VIBRATION IS
ACCEPTABLE REMOVE TEST EQUIPMENT, REFER TO FLIGHT
CHECK, TEST EQUIPMENT REMOVAL.

WRITE THE ADJUSTMENT SET PROVIDED BY THE RADS−AT IN THE RECOMMENDED RADS−AT
1 / REV CORRECTIONS BLOCK ON THE FLIGHT CHECK DATA SHEET.
REFER TO DETERMINING MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING CORRECTIONS
(THIS WP).

GET PREDICTED VIBRATION LEVELS FOR THE ADJUSTMENTS DETERMINED ABOVE.

REFER TO DETERMINING MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING CORRECTIONS
(THIS WP).

IS PREDICTED VIBRATION FOR ALL MEASUREMENTS WITHIN ACCEPTANCE LIMITS STATED IN TABLE 1 OR TABLE 2
(WHICHEVER IS APPLICABLE)?

YES NO

IS THIS THE FIRST COMPLETE DATA SET DURING THIS

EVOLUTION THAT VIBRATION PREDICTIONS EXCEEDED
ACCEPTANCE LIMITS?

YES NO

CAN THE OPERATOR MAKE ALL OF THE ADJUSTMENTS MULTIPLE FLIGHTS HAVE BEEN MADE WHERE
RECOMMENDED BY THE RADS−AT DIAGNOSTICS? THE RADS−AT DIAGNOSTICS HAVE NOT
PREDICTED ACCEPTABLE RESULTS USING PCR
YES NO AND TRIM TAB ADJUSTMENTS.

GO TO THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING

TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART (FIGURE 45) AND ENTER
FLOWCHART AT "PT A".

MAKE ALL REQUIRED ADJUSTMENTS. FIND ALTERNATE SOLUTION.

REFER TO EDITING ADJUSTABLES IN DIAGNOSTICS
(THIS WP).

IM1089
SA

Figure 2. Flight Tuning Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 4)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 11

Make sure that the Flight Tuning Flowchart, If problems are encountered with the test
(Figure 2), is followed throughout this task. equipment that are not addressed in this
If this is the very first flight of the evolution document, refer to the Operation And
enter the flowchart at PT 1 , otherwise enter Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for
at PT 2. instruction.

This procedure will check both Main Rotor If you are instructed to reboot the CADU,
1/Rev and 4/Rev vibration. or the CADU appears to be stuck in a par-
ticular operation, reboot the CADU. Refer
If Main Rotor 4/rev vibration is unaccept- to Software/Data Management Instructions
able, AVC troubleshooting is required. (WP 010 00).

a. Make sure the test equipment is properly installed.

If Main Rotor 1/rev vibration is unaccept-
Refer to Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006 00).
able, continue with this procedure for Main
Rotor 1/rev adjustments and 1/rev
troubleshooting. b. Make a copy of the Flight Check Data Sheet (Fig-
ure 3 or Figure 4, whichever is applicable).
Data must be collected at all flight condi-
c. Make sure CADU is on the helicopter and plugged
tions to perform a complete Main Rotor
into the DAU via the CADU-to-DAU cable.
1/rev flight tuning check.
NOTE
For helicopters WITHOUT external tanks
installed data must be collected at
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You
GROUND, HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS,
must use the arrow keys, (s, d, g, and f )
140KTS, and VH flight conditions to per-
to highlight, (area with dark background
form a complete Main Rotor 1/rev flight
and light letters) the desired option then
tuning check. The 120KTS and 140KTS
press DO to select the option. If you mis-
flight conditions are required to complete
takenly highlight and select the wrong
the Main Rotor 4/rev vibration check for
option, you simply press QUIT to go back
helicopters WITHOUT external tanks.
to the previous menu.

For helicopters WITH external tanks If nothing appears on the CADU screen
installed data must be collected at when the CADU is turned on, suspect that
GROUND, HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, and screen contrast is set improperly or CADU
VH flight conditions to perform a complete batteries are low on charge. Adjust screen
Main Rotor 1/rev flight tuning check. The contrast by pressing and holding CTRST
80KTS and 120KTS flight conditions are key on CADU and monitoring CADU
required to complete the Main Rotor 4/rev screen. Release CTRST key when screen
vibration check for helicopters WITH exter- becomes clear. The screen contrast key
nal tanks. uses a rolling adjustment approach, there-
fore if CTRST key is released too late, con-
Data quality is extremely important. To tinue with press and hold CTRST key until
obtain data of the proper quality, make desired contrast is seen again. If nothing is
sure that all measurements are taken at seen on the CADU screen after holding
100% Nr, the aircraft condition is held CTRST key for 30 seconds, suspect that
steady for the entire measurement, and the CADU batteries are low on charge. Plug
aircraft is flown in smooth air. CADU into battery charger, 29315000, or
plug CADU into powered up DAU and
It is highly recommended that the autorota- repeat procedure.
tion RPM be checked on the initial flight
and adjusted immediately if out of toler- The following section can be completed on
ance. the CADU at anytime prior to ground run

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 12

FLIGHT CHECK DATA SHEET

(For Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks)
AIRCRAFT DATE
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV DATA BLACK
FLT #
BLADE 4 YELLOW
BLADE 3

NOTE:
BLACK BLADE OVER
NOSE WHEN MAG P / U
AND INTERRUPTER
ARE ALIGNED.
BLUE
BLADE 2
ROLL 0.20 ips or less at "GROUND"
0.20 ips or less at "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS",
0.25 ips or less at "VH"
Criteria:
VERT 0.25 ips or less at "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS",
0.30 ips or less at "VH" RED
BLADE 1

"VERT" "ROLL" BLADE TRACK (mm)

AMP Phase AMP Phase YEL BLU RED BLK
(ips) (deg) (ips) (deg)

GROUND

HOVER

80 KTS

120 KTS

140 KTS

VH

RECOMMENDED RADS−AT 1 / REV CORRECTIONS: MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV CORRECTIONS MADE:

PREDICTIONS ACCEPTABLE? YES NO

MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV DATA

Criteria: "VERT" 0.40 ips or less at "120 KTS" and "140 KTS"

"P_Heel" 0.60 ips or less at "120 KTS" and "140 KTS"

If main rotor 4 / rev vibration is unacceptable then AVC troubleshooting is required.

Cockpit Vertical Pilot Heel Vertical

"VERT" "P_Heel"
(ips) (ips)

120 KTS

140 KTS IM1090

SA

Figure 3. Flight Check Data Sheet for helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 13

FLIGHT CHECK DATA SHEET

(For Helicopters WITH External Tanks)
AIRCRAFT DATE
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV DATA BLACK
FLT #
BLADE 4 YELLOW
BLADE 3

NOTE:
BLACK BLADE OVER
NOSE WHEN MAG P / U
AND INTERRUPTER
ARE ALIGNED.
BLUE
BLADE 2

LATERAL 0.30 ips or less at GROUND

Criteria: LATERAL 0.25 ips or less at HOVER, 80 KTS, 120KTS, VH
VERT 0.25 ips or less at "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", VH
RED
BLADE 1

"VERT" "LATERAL" BLADE TRACK (mm)

AMP Phase AMP Phase YEL BLU RED BLK
(ips) (deg) (ips) (deg)

GROUND

HOVER

80 KTS

120 KTS

VH

RECOMMENDED RADS−AT 1 / REV CORRECTIONS: MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV CORRECTIONS MADE:

PREDICTIONS ACCEPTABLE? YES NO

MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV DATA

Criteria: "VERT" 0.40 ips or less at "80 KTS" and "120 KTS"

"P_Heel" 0.60 ips or less at "80 KTS" and "120 KTS"

If main rotor 4 / rev vibration is unacceptable then AVC troubleshooting is required.

Cockpit Vertical Pilot Heel Vertical

"VERT" "P_Heel"
(ips) (ips)

80 KTS

120 KTS IM1091

SA

Figure 4. Flight Check Data Sheet for helicopters WITH External Tanks

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 14

without the CADU being connected to or

powered by the DAU.
SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL
d. Prepare CADU to measure data by performing the RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
following: 12−NOV−10 14:02:36

Aircraft Type ?
NOTE
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ?
If the CADU is being operated on internal Flight I.D. ?
batteries, (it is disconnected from the DAU
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
or the DAU power is off), and the CADU [QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item
indicates low power, (internal batteries
require charging), perform one of the fol- MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER
lowing. One method is to plug the CADU
into the DAU using the CADU-to DAU IM1462
SA

cable and turn DAU power on. A second

method is to plug the CADU Battery Figure 5. Main Menu
Charger, 29315000, into a 120 VAC
(3) Check main menu on CADU (Figure 5) to make
receptacle and plug the probe end of bat-
sure that date and time are correct. If necessary, reset
tery charger into CADU. The CADU recep-
time and date. Refer to Software Setup Instructions (WP
tacle is located under the credit card access
009 00).
panel on top edge of CADU. The CADU
batteries automatically recharge when
CADU is plugged into a power source. (4) From main menu (Figure 5), press d or f
keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.
(1) Turn CADU on by pressing ON key.
NOTE
NOTE
This procedure may not provide the correct
If the test set was left in measurement mode results if the incorrect Aircraft software ver-
(Figure 11), press QUIT to exit measure- sion is used. The Aircraft version number is
ment mode, until the Action menu is seen part of the aircraft type title. Refer to Intro-
(Figure 20). If vibration was measured or duction (WP 002 00) of this manual to
you are not sure if vibration was measured, verify aircraft software version. If the
highlight Save and Exit, and press DO. If proper Aircraft software is not on the
no vibration was measured, highlight CADU, upload aircraft setup file to the
Abandon Flight and press g until Yes is CADU. Refer to Software/Data Manage-
seen next to Continue. Then press DO. The ment Instructions (WP 010 00). If the
main menu now should be seen. proper aircraft software can not be
located, contact Sikorsky Aircraft or GE
This procedure may not provide the correct Aviation Systems representative.
results if the incorrect software version is
used. The software version is found on the The aircraft setup file with the 9S-70i9 air-
main menu. Verify that the software ver- craft type must be used for aircraft configu-
sion corresponds with the version covered rations without external tanks installed.
by this manual. Refer to the Introduction
(WP 002 00) section of this manual. If the The aircraft setup file with the 970iCEF9 air-
proper software is not on the CADU, con- craft type must be used for aircraft configu-
tact Sikorsky Aircraft or GE Aviation Sys- rations with external tanks installed.
tems representative.
Helicopters WITHOUT external tanks
(2) Press QUIT at each new menu until Main installed exhibit a combination of vertical
Menu is showing (Figure 5). Check main menu for proper and roll Main Rotor 1/rev vibration
software version. response in-flight. The FLT CHK flight plan

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 15

for the S-70i aircraft type uses cockpit ver-

tical and roll measurements for Main Rotor
1/rev flight tuning. The FLT CHK flight plan Aircraft Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit
for the S-70i aircraft type uses pitch control 70iCEF
rod and trim tab adjustment to correct
FFT
in-flight Main Rotor 1/rev vibration.
S−70B
S−70i
Helicopters WITH external tanks installed
exhibit a combination of vertical and lat- S−80M
eral Main Rotor 1/rev vibration response
in-flight. The FLT CHK flight plan for the
70iCEF aircraft type uses a cockpit over-
head lateral measurement for Main Rotor
1/rev flight tuning. The FLT CHK flight plan IM1092
for the 70iCEF aircraft type uses pitch con- SA

trol rod, trim tab, and hub weight adjust-

Figure 6. Aircraft Types Menu
ment to correct in-flight Main Rotor 1/rev
vibration. (5) From Aircraft Types menu (Figure 6), press d
or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, whichever is
applicable, and press DO.
The FLT CHK flight plans for the S-70i and
70iCEF aircraft types employ different
measurements and different diagnostic set- (6) From main menu (Figure 10), press d or f
ups, one cannot be substituted for the other. keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.

(7) From Select Tail Number menu (Figure 7),

If flight tuning is done with external tanks
press d or f keys to highlight desired tail number, press
installed it is important that the external fuel
DO, and continue with step (10). If desired tail number is
tanks be full or nearly full during data mea-
not listed, continue with step (8).
surement for the most consistent results.

(8) From Select Tail Number menu (Figure 7),

If external tanks are installed it is also press d or f keys to highlight NEW and press DO.
important that fuel not be transferred out of
the external fuel tanks until vibration data
NOTE
has been acquired for all flight conditions
for the most consistent results.
Numbers can be entered using the numeric
keypad on the CADU. Alphanumeric char-
The aircraft setup file with version 1.0EPP acters can be entered by using the F1 and
must be used for aircraft configured with F2 keys. The F1 and F2 keys allow you to
EPP. scroll through the available characters.
When the desired character is seen, press
The aircraft setup file with version 1.0 must the g arrow key to move to the next block.
be used for aircraft configured without EPP.
(9) From the Tail Number Entry Form display (Fig-
ure 8), enter complete tail number of the aircraft. Up to
Helicopters WITH wide chord blades (EPP)
seven digits can be entered. Press DO when tail number
exhibit a different response than helicop-
entry is complete.
ters WITHOUT EPP due to significant differ-
ences between the two Main Rotor blade
designs. The aircraft setup file versions 1.0 (10) From main menu (Figure 10), press d or f
and 1.0EPP corresponds to aircraft config- keys to highlight Flight Plans and press DO.
ured without EPP and with EPP respectively.
It is imperative that the correct version is (11) From Flight Plans menu (Figure 9), press d
used. or f keys to highlight FLT CHK and press DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 16

Flight Plans DO−Select QUIT−Exit

Select Tail Number PAGE 1 OF 1
BAL TAIL
DCENG BAL
FLT CHK
51
52 GRND BAL
GRND TRK
NEW OIL COOL

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Tail No [QUIT] Exit

FG0457 IM1094
SA SA

Figure 7. Select Tail Number Menu Figure 9. Flight Plans Menu

that insufficient memory exists, download
data from the CADU to a PC, delete data
from the CADU, and compress the CADU
Entry Form memory. Refer to Software/Data Manage-
ment Instructions (WP 010 00).
Please enter a new tail number
for the aircraft type S−70i :
(13) From main menu (Figure 10), press F1
(MEASURE) to enter measurement mode.
Tail No? 53

(14) From Measurement Selection Window (Fig-

ure 11), press F4 until LMT ON is seen above F4 key.
[F1] & [F2] Scrolls thru character set
[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Arrows : Move Cursor
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit NOTE

IM1093
SA
28 VDC power must be available to the
DAU, and the CADU must be connected to
Figure 8. Tail Number Entry the DAU to continue with this procedure.
(12) Make sure Aircraft Type , Tail Number, and
Flight Plan are properly specified (Figure 10). Repeat You may view a brief setup description by
steps (4) through (11) until all required menu items are pressing F3 (SETUP). Procedure references,
properly specified. cable connections, and general procedure
is provided in the SETUP screens.
NOTE
e. On DAU, set DAU ON/OFF/POWER switch to
The Flight I.D., which does not exist prior to ON position.
measuring vibration, identifies previously
measured vibration data stored in memory. f. On DAU, turn TRACKER MODE / DAY / NIGHT /
A new flight ID is automatically created by TEST switch to DAY position if performing this task during
the test set each time F1(MEASURE) is daylight hours, or turn switch to the NIGHT position for
pressed and data is stored. night tracking. Reflective tape must be installed for night
tracking. Refer to Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking (WP 006
The test set automatically checks memory to 00).
make sure that there is enough room to
store all data that can be measured by the g. On CADU, press LAMP switch to turn CADU
selected flight plan. If the CADU indicates screen back-light on.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 17

are measured, the operator may exit the

measurement selection window (Figure 11)
at any time by pressing QUIT. The 9Action9
menu will be seen next (Figure 20). If some
SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL vibration data was measured, select 9Save
RADS−AT VERSION 6.20 and Exit9 from the action menu, press DO,
12−NOV−10 14:03:45 select Main Menu (Figure 21), and press
DO. If no data was collected, select 9Aban-
Aircraft Type S−70i don Flight9 from the Action menu, press g
Tail Number 53
Flight Plan FLT CHK key until YES is seen next to CONTINUE?,
Flight I.D. ?
press DO, select Main Menu (Figure 21)
and press DO.
[DO] = Select Highlighted Item
[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item
When measuring blade track on the
ground, avoid placing the helicopter on
MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER
bright, reflective surfaces (concrete,
painted surfaces, etc.) if possible, and
avoid positioning the helicopter so that the
UTD line of sight is in direct view of the sun.
F1 F2 F3 F4 If blade track measurement is unsuccessful,
make sure the helicopter is on a dark sur-
face such as black asphalt and make sure
the UTD line of sight is not in direct view of
IM1095
SA
the sun.
Figure 10. Completed Main Menu
Try to avoid flying the helicopter in a direc-
tion such that the UTD line of sight is in
h. With a qualified pilot at the controls, run helicop- direct view of the sun. Ability to measure
ter at flat pitch, 100% Nr rotor speed, with pedals cen- in-flight blade track may be compromised
tered and helicopter nose into the wind. if the helicopter is flown such that the UTD
line of sight is in direct view of the sun. If
NOTE in-flight blade track measurement is unsuc-
cessful, fly with UTD line of sight pointed
The Main Rotor ground roll vibration is very away from the sun.
sensitive to wind and main landing gear
preload. Make sure helicopter is pointing The ability of the diagnostics to determine
into the wind, and reset the main landing Main Rotor 1/rev flight tuning corrections
gear struts to relieve any pre-load before will not be affected if unable to measure
measuring data. Reset main landing gear blade track at some of the test conditions.
struts by pulling enough collective pitch to The Main Rotor 1/rev flight tuning diag-
go light on the wheels and removing all nostics determine Main Rotor blade adjust-
collective pitch at such a rate to firmly set ments from vibration, and no blade track
the helicopter weight straight down on limits are used for Main Rotor 1/ Rev Flight
landing gear. Tuning.

The GROUND test state is measured to col- i. Have the pilot relieve any pre-load that may be in
lect Main Rotor 1/rev ROLL vibration. the main landing gear by pulling enough collective to go
light on wheels, and then quickly removing all collective
If a situation arises where a test flight must pitch to firmly set the full weight of the helicopter straight
be aborted before all required test states down on the landing gear.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 18

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12−NOV−10

GROUND VH
HOVER
80 KTS
120 KTS
140 KTS

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1096
SA

Figure 11. Measurement Selection Window

j. From Measurement Selection Window (Figure 11),
highlight GROUND test state. If an error is seen on the CADU screen that
does not provide troubleshooting steps,
then press QUIT to clear the error, and
NOTE
retry the measurement. If the same error
persists, reboot the CADU. Refer to
Software/Data Management Instructions
The CADU and DAU power must be on for (WP 010 00). Toggle the DAU power
a minimum of 20 seconds before proceed- switch off and then on again (this reboots
ing any further with this procedure. If a the DAU), wait 20 seconds, and retry the
measurement is tried before the 20 second measurement. If problems persist, replace
wait period, an error will be noted. The the CADU-to-DAU cable, the DAU, and
error can be cleared by pressing QUITand CADU respectively. Retry the measurement
waiting 20 seconds to retry the measure- after each component is replaced.
ment.
If a Communications Failure (Error 8199)
If an error message is displayed on the or a CADU-DAU Comms Failure (Error
CADU screen, write down the error and 32756) is noted, and all of the on-screen
the recommended troubleshooting steps, troubleshooting has failed, disconnect the
press QUIT to clear the error, perform the tracker cable and retry the measurement.
first recommended troubleshooting step, (Shorted tracker cables have resulted in
and repeat the measurement. Repeat this communication errors). If the measurement
process until all recommended prompt was seen after the tracker cable
troubleshooting steps have been taken. If was disconnected, replace the tracker
problems persist, then go to the Operation cable. If the problem remained, suspect the
And Maintenance Manual, 29480100, for DAU-to-CADU cable, the DAU, and CADU
troubleshooting. in that order.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 19

k. Once the correct test state is highlighted, press

DO. This prepares the DAU for the measurement. When A measurement can be retaken by simply
DAU is ready, an asterisk mark will be seen at the start of repeating the measurement procedure for
the measurement prompt (screen will look similar to Fig- that test state. When data is re-measured,
ure 12). the old data is overwritten by the new data.

NOTE
l. Make sure the aircraft condition is properly set,
Measure all data at 100% Nr (258 RPM). and the Main Rotor is at 100% Nr. Once ready, press
Monitor CADU screen during measurement DO to start the measurement. As measurement is being
and make sure RPM is between 257.5 to taken, a measurement screen will be displayed (screen
258.5 RPM will look similar to Figure 13). When the measurement is
being taken monitor the RPM display on the CADU screen
Hold the flight condition steady for entire and make sure the RPM is within 257.5 to 258.5 RPM. If
measurement. If any turn is required, the RPM is outside the 257.5 to 258.5 RPM window, have
re-measure data after the proper condition pilot beep Nr trim to set Main Rotor RPM, and repeat the
is re-established. measurement.

If turbulence is encountered during the

measurement, fly to another altitude that is
not turbulent and re-measure data.

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12−NOV−10

GROUND VH
HOVER
80 KTS
120 KTS
140 KTS
*FLAT PITCH 100% Nr (258 RPM)

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1097
SA

Figure 12. Measurement Initiation Window

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 20

NOTE o. If limit checking was turned on prior to measure-

ment, continue on; otherwise go to step p..
If a tachometer error is noted during the
measurement, make sure Main Rotor mag- NOTE
netic pickup cable is connected to the
TACHO 1 receptacle on the DAU and retry If an error was encountered during mea-
the measurement several times. If errors surement, 9?9 will be seen under
persist, perform troubleshooting on CADU MEASURED on the LIMITS display (this sig-
screen. If no defects were noted, replace nifies that no data was acquired for the
magnetic pickup cable. Cable can be resis- parameter with 9?9 under MEASURED on
tance checked using the wiring diagram in the limits display).
Operators Manual, 29480100. If magnetic
RPM sensor cable is installed without
enough slack to permit full swashplate The limit screens provided in Figures 16
travel, it is possible that internal wires of and 17 are provided as a sample limit
cable were stretched and broken without screen. The actual displays seen will
any visible external damage. change dependent on test state and data
measured.
If an accelerometer error is noted, make
sure accelerometer cable is connected to The ALL LIMITS display allows you to view
accelerometer and is connected to the the measured vibration amplitudes if the
proper receptacle on DAU or CDU. The vibration is within the limit. The vibration
SETUP feature (F3 key in the measurement amplitude is not displayed on the LIMITS
selection window), provides cable connec- screen if the measurement is within the
tion instructions. Confirm that accelerom- limit.
eters are properly specified. Refer to Soft-
ware Setup Instructions (WP 009 00). If (1) One of two LIMITS displays will be seen. If all
errors persist, replace accelerometer and measurements are within acceptance limits, a LIMITS dis-
cable, respectively. Re-try measurement play similar to the one shown in Figure 15 will be seen. If
after each action. The accelerometer cable any measurement exceeded acceptance limits, a LIMITS
can be resistance checked using the wiring display similar to the one shown in Figure 16 will be
diagram in Operators Manual, seen. Press the d arrow key to view the ALL LIMITS screen
29480100. (Figure 17).

If a tracker error is noted, and the tracker is (2) Exit the ALL LIMITS display by pressing QUIT
looking directly into the sun, turn helicopter until the measurement selection window (Figure 18) or
out of the sun and re-try the measurement. Finish menu (Figure 19) is seen. Continue with step p.
If tracker errors persist, check UTD installa-
tion angle and UTD cable. Replace UTD
cable and UTD tracker, respectively. NOTE

If a tracker error is noted and the lighting If a measurement error was experienced,
conditions are dark or dusk, perform test either 9partial9 or 9failed9 will be seen next
equipment installation for low light track- to the test state. If 9failed9 is seen then no
ing. Refer to Main Rotor Flat Pitch Tracking data was measured. If 9partial9 is seen,
(WP 006 00). only a portion of required measurements
were successful. Perform troubleshooting
m. When measurement is complete and the test set is steps provided on CADU with a measure-
processing the data, a screen similar to the one shown in ment attempt between each troubleshoot-
Figure 14 will be seen. Do not press any keys at this time, ing action.
wait until CADU screen prompts for a user input.
If all vibration was successfully measured
n. Once the data processing screen disappears, pilot but you wish to re-measure data, from the
may transition to next test state. Finish menu, highlight Continue, press DO,

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 21

MEASURING

Tachometer Freq (RPM) : 257.93

Flight Plan : FLT CHK

Test State : GROUND

Acquisition No. : 01 of 01

Measuring

FB4042
SA

Figure 13. Measurement Screen

Processing Data . . .

* * * Pilot Transition * * *

Next Test State: HOVER

Standby . . . While data is loading

FB4043
SA

Figure 14. Data Processing Screen

and go re-measure data. The new data will (2) If problem was a tracker error, continue mea-
overwrite previously measured vibration suring the other test states and troubleshoot UTD tracker
data. and cable on the ground. After the current test state is
measured, continue with step r.
p. If data has been successfully collected at all
required test states, the Finish menu (Figure 19) will be (3) If the error is anything other than a tracker
seen. Continue with step t., otherwise continue on. error, and all recommended troubleshooting on the
CADU screen has failed, abort the flight, troubleshoot
q. If data was successfully measured and 9done9 is equipment on the ground, and continue on.
seen next to test state (Figure 18), continue with step r.. If
an error was experienced and vibration was not mea- (a) From the measurement selection window
sured, continue on: (Figure 18), press QUIT to exit the measurement mode.

(1) Highlight 9failed9 or 9partial9 test state and (b) From the Action Menu (Figure 20), high-
repeat measurement starting at step k. If problem persists, light Save & Exit and press DO, if some useful data was
continue on. measured and is to be saved. If no data was measured

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 22

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Measurements are within specified limits

Press QUIT to return to MEASUREMENT menu

Press UP to view all limits

IM1098
SA

Figure 15. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within Limits).

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
GROUND MR BALANCE 0.20 0.38 ips

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All

IM1099
SA

Figure 16. 9LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Exceeds Limits)

then highlight Abandon Flight, press DO, press g key VH. Additionally Main Rotor 4/rev vibra-
until Yes is seen next to Continue ? prompt, and press tion is measured at 120KTS and 140KTS.
DO. Go to step u. to continue this procedure.
For the 70iCEF aircraft type (helicopters
r. From the measurement selection window (Figure WITH external tanks installed) this proce-
18), highlight next test state to be measured. dure measures Main Rotor 1/rev vibration
and blade track at GROUND, HOVER,
NOTE 80KTS, 120KTS and VH. Additionally
Main Rotor 4/rev vibration is measured at
Make sure the HOVER flight condition is 80KTS and 120KTS.
measured with the helicopter in an OGE
hover with nose heading into the wind. s. Fly the helicopter at the next required flight condi-
tion, highlight the next test state to be measured (if it is not
For the S-70i aircraft type (helicopters highlighted already), and repeat steps k through step r. If
WITHOUT external tanks installed) this data has been successfully measured at all required test
procedure measures Main Rotor 1/rev conditions, proceed with step t. If data cannot be success-
vibration and blade track at GROUND, fully measured at all required test conditions, do the fol-
HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, 140KTS, and lowing:

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 23

ALL LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
GROUND MR BALANCE 0.20 0.09 ips

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle Exc’d

IM1100
SA

Figure 17. 9ALL LIMITS9 Display (Measured Data Within Limits)

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12−NOV−10

GROUND done VH
HOVER
80 KTS
120 KTS
140 KTS

[DO] Setup / Start Measurement [QUIT] Exit

DISPLAY STROBE SETUP LMT ON

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1101
SA

Figure 18. Measurement Selection Window After Successful Data Measurement

(1) Press QUIT from measurement selection menu; t. From Finish menu (Figure 19), highlight Finish and
Action menu will be seen (Figure 20). press DO.

(2) Highlight Save and Exit from Action menu and u. From the End of Flight menu (Figure 21), highlight
press DO. Main Menu and press DO.

(3) Press g or s key until YES is seen next to CON- v. Fill out a copy of the Flight Check Data Sheet (Fig-
TINUE? and press DO. ure 3 or Figure 4, whichever is applicable). Refer to
Recalling Data PARA 8 (PT 4 in Flight Tuning Flowchart,
(4) Continue with step u. Figure 2).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 24

Finish

Finish
Continue

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0563
SA

Figure 19. Finish Menu

Action

Continue These Test States

Save and Exit have not yet been
Abandon Flight measured:−
(No Data Collected)

120 KTS
140 KTS
VH

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FB4048
SA

Figure 20. Action Menu

8. MAIN ROTOR 1/REV FLIGHT TUNING, credit card access panel on top edge of
RECALLING DATA. CADU. The CADU batteries automatically
recharge when CADU is plugged into a
NOTE power source.

a. Get a copy of the Flight Check Data Sheet (Figure

If the CADU is being operated on internal 3 or Figure 4, whichever is applicable).
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU,
or DAU power is off), and CADU indicates
low power (internal batteries require CAUTION
charging), perform one of the following.
One method is to plug the CADU into the
DAU using the CADU-to- DAU cable and Make sure proper Aircraft Type , Tail num-
turn DAU power on. A second method is to ber , Flight Plan , and Flight I.D. are speci-
plug CADU Battery Charger, 29315000, fied prior to recalling data. If the wrong
into a 120 VAC receptacle and plug probe parameter is specified before recalling
end of the battery charger into the CADU. data, incorrect data will be recalled and
The CADU receptacle is located under the incorrect decisions may be drawn

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 25

End of Flight

Diagnostics
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0470
SA

Figure 21. End of Flight Menu

b. From the main menu (Figure 22), make sure Air- (7) From main menu (Figure 22), press d or f
craft Type , Tail Number , Flight Plan , and Flight I.D. are keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.
correctly specified. If all parameters are correct, go to
step c, otherwise continue on: NOTE

NOTE Data is stored in memory with most recent

data at top of the list. Therefore, if the most
You should change only parameters that recent data is being recalled, simply select
are improperly specified. first flight id.

To view all data stored in memory, high- (8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 23),
light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to press d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
change all main menu items to 9?9, then press DO.
highlight Flight I.D. and press DO. A com-
plete list of all data in memory will be dis- c. With the correct Flight I.D. specified on the main
played. menu (Figure 22), press F2 (DISPLAY) to view data.

(1) From the main menu (Figure 22), press d or d. From the Display Mode menu (Figure 24), high-
f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO. light Summary Displays and press DO.

(2) From the Aircraft Types menu (Figure 6), press NOTE
d or f keys to highlight S-70i or S70iCEF, and versions
1.0 or 1.0EPP, whichever is applicable, and press DO. All vibration units should be in 9ips9 and
9deg9. All track units should be in 9mm9. All
(3) From main menu (Figure 22), press d or f vibration frequency units should be in RPM.
keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO. To change units, refer to Software Setup
Instructions (WP 009 00).
(4) From the Select Tail Number menu (Figure 7),
press d or f keys to highlight desired tail number and e. Recall the Main Rotor 1/rev vibration data as fol-
press DO. lows:

(5) From main menu (Figure 22), press d or f (1) From the Select Summary Display menu (Fig-
keys to highlight Flight Plans and press DO. ure 25), highlight Main Rotor 1/Rev Data and press DO.

(6) From Flight Plans menu (Figure 9), press d or (2) From the Main Rotor 1/Rev summary display
f keys to highlight FLT CHK and press DO. data page (Figure 26), write the VERT and ROLL ips and

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 26

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:29:41

Aircraft Type S−70i

Tail Number 53
Flight Plan FLT CHK
Flight I.D. 12−NOV−10 at 14:11

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1102
SA

Figure 22. Main Menu with Selected Flight I.D.

Select Flight ID PAGE 1 OF 1

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 14:11

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 13:05

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 11:00

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Flight [QUIT] Exit
IM1103
SA

Figure 23. Select Flight I.D. Menu

deg (helicopters WITHOUT external tanks), or the VERT (3) Press QUIT once to get back to Display Mode
and LATERAL ips and deg (helicopters WITH external menu (Figure 24), and continue with step f.
tanks) in the appropriate blocks on the data sheet (see
Figure 38 for an example data sheet).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 27

Display Mode

One Test State

Complete Flight
Trend Flights
View Limits
Summary Displays

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Exit Menu

FG0603
SA

Figure 24. Display Mode Menu

f. Recall Main Rotor blade track data as follows: Rotor 1/rev Data section of data sheet (see Figure 38 for
an example of data sheet).
(1) From Select Summary Display menu (Figure
25), highlight Main Rotor Blade Track and press DO.
(3) Press QUIT once to get back to the Select
(2) From Track summary display data page (Fig- Summary Display menu (Figure 25), and continue with
ure 27), enter blade track in appropriate blocks on Main step g.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 28

Table 1. Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Vibration Limits WITHOUT External Tanks
FLIGHT CONDITION VERT Amp (ips) ROLL Amp (ips)
HOVER 0.25 0.20
80KTS 0.25 0.20

120KTS 0.25 0.20

140KTS 0.25 0.20

VH 0.30 0.25

Table 2. Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Vibration Limits WITH External Tanks
FLIGHT CONDITION VERT Amp (ips) LATERAL Amp (ips)
HOVER 0.25 0.25
80KTS 0.25 0.25

120KTS 0.25 0.25

VH 0.25 0.25

Select Summary Display PAGE 1 OF 1

MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV DATA

MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV DATA
MAIN ROTOR BLADE TRACK
MAIN ROTOR BLADE LEAD / LAG
PRINT ALL DISPLAYS

[UP] Prev Line [DOWN] Next Line

[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] Select Display [QUIT] Exit

FB4051
SA

Figure 25. Select Summary Display Menu

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 29

S−70i 53 FLT CHK

FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
SYNCHRONOUS VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
MR 1 / REV DATA (ips / deg)
STATE VERT deg ROLL deg
GROUND 0.05 128 0.09 62
HOVER 0.05 94 0.16 14
80 KTS 0.07 314 0.06 357
120 KTS 0.12 232 0.05 64
140 KTS 0.25 230 0.04 128
VH 0.32 235 0.06 170

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

IM1104
SA

Figure 26. Main Rotor In-flight 1/Rev Summary Display Data Page
g. Recall Main Rotor 4/rev vibration data as follows: (2) From the Lead/Lag summary display data
page, (Figure 29), enter blade lead/lag in the appropri-
(1) From Select Summary Display menu (Figure ate blocks on the In-flight 1/Rev Troubleshooting Table
25), highlight Main Rotor 4/Rev Data and press DO. (Figure 52 or Figure 53, whichever applies).

(3) From the Lead/Lag summary display data

(2) From Main Rotor 4/Rev Data Summary Dis-
page, (Figure 29), press d key to view lead/lag stan-
play Data page (Figure 28), enter VERT and P_HEEL ips
dard deviation data (Figure 30). Enter blade lead/lag
levels in appropriate blocks on the Main Rotor 4/rev Data
standard deviation data in the appropriate blocks on the
section of data sheet (see Figure 38 for an example of
In-flight 1/Rev Troubleshooting Table (Figure 52 or Fig-
data sheet).
ure 53, whichever applies).

(3) Press QUIT once to get back to Select Sum- (4) Press QUIT at each new menu to get back to
mary Display (Figure 25) and continue with step h. the Display Mode menu (Figure 25).

h. If required, recall Main Rotor blade lead/lag data i. Press QUIT until main menu (Figure 22) is seen.
as follows: j. Press OFF to turn CADU off.

(1) From Select Summary Display menu, (Figure k. Return to the point in the Flight Tuning Flowchart
25), highlight Main Rotor Blade Lead/Lag and press DO. (Figure 2) that referred you to complete this procedure.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 30

S−70i 53 FLT CHK

FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
MAIN ROTOR Page 1 of 1
TRACK RELATIVE TO MEAN (mm)
STATE YEL BLU RED BLK
GROUND 1.3 3.2 2.9 −6.4
HOVER −2.3 −1.0 7.4 −5.1
80 KTS −1.1 −2.9 6.9 −4.4
120 KTS 5.6 −7.7 6.5 −4.8
140 KTS 2.1 −12.4 2.9 6.4
VH 6.1 −9.4 −4.6 7.6

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

IM1105
SA

Figure 27. Main Rotor In-flight Blade Track Summary Display Data Page
9. DETERMINING MAIN ROTOR 1/REV FLIGHT diagnostics. There are no manual methods
TUNING ADJUSTMENTS. of determining corrections in this
procedure.
NOTE

Perform this corrective action procedure if The ability of the diagnostics to determine
any Main Rotor 1/rev vibration levels Main Rotor 1/rev flight tuning corrections
exceed any of the limits stated on the data will not be affected if blade track was not
sheet (Figure 3 or Figure 4, whichever is measured successfully at some of the test
applicable). The Main Rotor 1/rev vibra- conditions. The Main Rotor 1/rev flight tun-
tion limits are also stated in Table 1 or ing diagnostics determine Main Rotor
Table 2, whichever is applicable, and in blade adjustments from vibration, and no
Figure 2. blade track limits are used for Main Rotor
1/Rev Flight Tuning.
It is highly recommended that corrective
actions for both 1/rev and 4/rev vibra- For the S-70i aircraft type (helicopters
tions, if required, be made on the helicop- WITHOUT external tanks installed) this
ter at the same time . The Main Rotor 1/rev procedure uses VERT and ROLL 1/rev
corrective actions have no effect on 4/rev vibration and blade track at HOVER,
vibration, and Main Rotor 4/rev corrective 80KTS, 120KTS, 140KTS, and VH to deter-
actions have no effect on 1/rev vibration. mine Main Rotor 1/rev flight tuning correc-
tions. For helicopters WITHOUT external
Main Rotor 1/rev flight tuning corrections tanks installed the FLT CHK flight plan for
are determined by the test set based on the the S-70i aircraft type uses pitch control
Main Rotor 1/rev vibration and blade track rod and trim tab adjustment to correct
data measured at the flight conditions in-flight Main Rotor 1/rev vibration.
required by this procedure. Acceptance
limits only exist for vibration, no limits are
applied to track split. The PCR and trim tab For the 70iCEF aircraft type (helicopters
adjustments will minimize blade track split WITH external tanks installed) this proce-
as much as possible, however, on the S-70 dure uses VERT and LATERAL 1/rev vibra-
aircraft it is fairly common to see blade tion and blade track at HOVER, 80KTS,
track split increase slightly as lower 1/rev 120KTS, and VH to determine Main Rotor
vibration is pursued. 1/rev flight tuning corrections. For helicop-
ters WITH external tanks installed the FLT
All Main Rotor adjustments for 1/rev flight CHK flight plan for the 70iCEF aircraft type
tuning are determined through the uses pitch control rod, trim tab, and hub

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 31

weight adjustment to correct in-flight Main NOTE

Rotor 1/rev vibration.
Make sure that proper Aircraft Type, Tail
All Main Rotor adjustments for 1/rev flight Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D. is
tuning are determined through the specified prior to running diagnostics. If the
diagnostics. There are no manual methods wrong Flight I.D. is specified, incorrect
of determining corrections in this adjustments will be called out.
procedure.
d. From main menu (Figure 22), make sure that the
Aircraft Type, Tail Number, Flight Plan, and Flight I.D.
Other Main Rotor maintenance, will be
are correctly specified. If all main menu parameters are
recommended by this procedure, if it is
correct, go to step e., otherwise continue on:
determined that the standard Main Rotor
adjustments can not reduce Main Rotor
NOTE
1/rev vibration to within limits.
You should change only the parameters
a. If any of the in-flight 1/rev vibration exceeds limits that are improperly specified.
stated on the top of the data sheet, continue with this
procedure. If all in-flight 1/rev vibration is acceptable, To view all data stored in memory, high-
enter the Flight Check Flowchart (Figure 2) at PT 5. light Aircraft Type and press QUIT to
change all main menu items to 9?9. Then
NOTE highlight Flight I.D. and press DO. A com-
plete list of all data in memory will be dis-
If the CADU is being operated on internal played.
batteries (it is disconnected from the DAU
or DAU power is off), and the CADU indi- (1) From the main menu (Figure 22), press d or
cates low power (internal batteries require f keys to highlight Aircraft Type and press DO.
charging), perform one of the following.
One method is to plug the CADU into the (2) From Aircraft Types menu (Figure 6), press d
DAU using the CADU-to- DAU cable and or f keys to highlight S-70i or 70iCEF, whichever is
turn DAU power on. A second method is to applicable, and press DO.
plug the CADU Battery Charger
(29315000) into a 120 VAC receptacle (3) From the main menu (Figure 22), press d or
and plug probe end of the battery charger f keys to highlight Tail Number and press DO.
into the CADU. The CADU receptacle is
located under the credit card access panel (4) From Select Tail Number menu (Figure 7),
on top edge of CADU. The CADU batteries press d or f keys to highlight the desired tail number
automatically recharge when the CADU is and press DO.
plugged into a power source.
(5) From the main menu (Figure 22), press d or
f keys to highlight Flight Plans and press DO.
b. Obtain the copy of the Flight Check Data Sheet
being used for the aircraft currently being checked for (6) From Flight Plans menu (Figure 9), press d or
Main Rotor 1/rev vibration (Figure 3 or Figure 4 , which- f keys to highlight FLT CHK and press DO.
ever is applicable).
(7) From main menu (Figure 22), press d or f
c. On the CADU, press ON to turn CADU power on. keys to highlight Flight I.D. and press DO.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 32

S−70i 53 FLT CHK

FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
SYNCHRONOUS VIBRATION Page 1 of 1
MR 4 / REV DATA (ips / deg)
STATE VERT deg P_HEEL deg
GROUND ? ? ? ?
HOVER 0.19 194 ? ?
80 KTS 0.05 214 ? ?
120 KTS 0.09 132 0.25 321
140 KTS 0.11 130 0.29 310
VH 0.14 135 0.35 335

Enter these values on the Main Rotor 4 / Rev

Check portion of the data sheet.

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

IM1106
SA

Figure 28. Main Rotor 4/Rev Absorber Summary Display Data Page
NOTE surements compared to the programmed
limits, press d key and ALL LIMITS display
Data is stored in memory with the most will be shown.
recent data at the top of the list. Therefore,
if the most recent data is being recalled, f. The limits display should be seen on the CADU
simply select the first flight id. (Figure 31). From the LIMITS screen, press DO to con-
tinue.
(8) From the Select Flight I.D. menu (Figure 23),
NOTE
press the d or f keys to highlight the desired data and
press DO.
The Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning
Troubleshooting Flowchart is used only
e. With the correct Flight I.D. selected (Figure 22), after primary adjustments fail to reduce
press the F3 key to enter the diagnostic mode in the test vibration to within acceptance limits. Cor-
set. rections made as a result of this flowchart
may not immediately reduce vibration to
NOTE within acceptance limits, but are intended
to correct any defect in the Main Rotor that
If the LIMITS display indicates that 9Mea- is preventing the Main Rotor 1/rev vibra-
surements are within specified limits9 or tion from being properly reduced. There-
MEASURED ips level is less than the LIMIT fore, after a corrective action is made from
value, vibration is acceptable and no cor- this flowchart, you must repeat the Vibra-
rective action is necessary. Complete this tion Measurement (PARA 7) procedure,
procedure to exit the diagnostic mode; and make required Main Rotor corrections
however, no adjustments are required. until the task is complete, or until instructed
by this procedure to re-enter the trouble-
shooting flowchart.
In the LIMITS display, a 9?9 indicates that
vibration was not measured at that test Any maintenance involving the replace-
state. ment or swapping of Main Rotor compo-
nents may cause vibration to increase when
The LIMITS display will show you what compared to the previous run. This may
measurements exceeded limits, and what trigger a diagnostic warning screen. If the
measurements were not taken. Any mea- diagnostic warning screen indicates Vibra-
surement that was taken and is within limits tion Levels Increasing (Figure 33), and
will not be shown. To see all of the mea- prior maintenance was performed, then the

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 33

vibration increase is attributed to the main- lowing steps are not applicable, proceed with step h. If
tenance. Go to step w. and continue with the helicopter is being flown WITH external tanks installed
this procedure. (70iCEF aircraft type is being used) perform the following
steps.
g. If the helicopter is being flown WITHOUT external
tanks installed (S-70i aircraft type is being used) the fol-

S−70i 53 FLT CHK

FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
MAIN ROTOR Page 1 of 1
LAG RELATIVE TO MEAN (mm)
STATE YEL BLU RED BLK
GROUND −5.89 5.02 −6.99 6.86
HOVER −8.67 4.36 −7.15 10.45
80 KTS −12.84 3.94 −18.54 26.44
120 KTS −3.65 1.24 −1.69 4.10
140 KTS −6.15 3.92 −11.14 13.36
VH −11.62 11.35 −9.57 9.84

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

IM1107
SA

Figure 29. In-flight Main Rotor Blade Lead/Lag Summary Display Data Page
NOTE remove previously installed weight from a
blade before adding weight to an opposite
The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen blade
(Figure 32) identifies the weight that was
If Main Rotor hub weight corrections are
installed on each Main Rotor blade spindle required on subsequent flights the CADU
when the Main Rotor 1/rev flight data was will automatically update the Current Con-
measured. Do not mistake these values for figuration with the adjustments that were
the adjustments that need to be made. The recommended on the previous run if the
adjustments need to be made will be dis- user responds with YES to the Confirm Cur-
played on the CORRECTIONS FOR screen rent Configuration screen (see Figure 37).
(Figure 34). The user then does not have to modify the
Current Configuration screen the next time
The CURRENT CONFIGURATION screen the diagnostics are run.
keeps track of how much weight was
installed on the Main Rotor when the data (1) The next screen displayed will be the Current
was measured. This allows the test set to Configuration screen (see Figure 32). Review the CUR-
offer weight removal adjustments and to RENT CONFIGURATION screen to make sure that the
make sure that the maximum allowable values displayed match what was installed on the Main
weight is not exceeded on any blade. Rotor when the flight was done. If the values match con-
tinue with step (4). If the values do not match continue
with step (2).
If the initial weight configuration of the
Main Rotor is not known the Current Con- (2) To change a value on the current configuration
figuration screen may be configured as if screen, press the arrow keys until the desired blade is
no previously installed weight exists on the highlighted. Once the correct blade is highlighted use the
Main Rotor. However, once the test set keypad to enter the correct weight in ounces for the
determines a balance weight correction the selected blade and press DO to confirm the value.
operator must make sure that the maximum
allowable weight per blade is not (3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) until values for all
exceeded. The operator may also have to blades are correct.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 34

S−70i 53 FLT CHK

FLOWN 14:11:00 12 NOV 10
MAIN ROTOR Page 1 of 1
STANDARD DEVIATION OF LAG (mm)
STATE YEL BLU RED BLK
GROUND 4.27 4.53 4.64 4.66
HOVER 1.60 1.74 1.89 2.78
80 KTS 9.84 12.34 11.70 17.03
120 KTS 2.11 1.69 1.92 1.77
140 KTS 4.49 4.56 3.93 4.45
VH 6.02 7.43 8.05 7.01

[LEFT] / [RIGHT] Prev / Next Page [QUIT] Exit

IM1108
SA

Figure 30. In-flight Main Rotor Blade Lead/Lag Standard Deviation Data Page
(4) Once all values are correctly specified press position. Therefore, 0.016 inch trim tab
DO to obtain the corrections. change is equal to 16 mils.

Main rotor hub weight corrections are

CAUTION called out in units of ounces. A plus sign
preceding a blade correction means to add
weight to that Main Rotor blade spindle. A
Make sure all CORRECTIONS FOR screens minus sign preceding a blade correction
are reviewed and all recommended adjust- means to subtract weight from that Main
ments are properly entered on the data Rotor blade spindle.
sheet. If partial or incorrect adjustments are
made on the helicopter, vibration may If adjustments are given that you cannot
increase. perform due to logistical reasons, you may
edit adjustments to find an alternate solu-
NOTE tion. Refer to Editing Adjustables In Diag-
nostics (PARA 15).
Main rotor blade PCR corrections are h. The CADU will display the corrections after a few
called out in units of notches. A plus sign moments or so (some corrections may take a few minutes
(+) preceding correction means to increase to calculate). Once the corrections have been calculated a
length of PC rod for the identified blade. A screen similar to that shown in Figure 34 will be dis-
minus sign (-) preceding correction means played. Be sure to view all of the corrections screens.
to shorten length of PC rod for the identi- Press the d or f keys to toggle between screens. Write
fied blade. the recommended flight tuning corrections on the Data
Sheet (Figure 3 or Figure 4, whichever is applicable) in
The PCR adjustment uses adjustment units the RECOMMENDED 1/REV CORRECTIONS block. If
of notches. One notch moves the safety either of the Diagnostic Warning Screens are displayed
tang one castellation on the PCR rod. (Figure 33) go to the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning
Troubleshooting Flowchart (Figure 47).
The Trim Tab adjustments use the units of
mils. One mil is 0.001 inch (one i. From the CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 34),
thousandth of an inch) change in trim tab press QUIT to exit.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 35

LIMITS

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11:00 12−NOV−10

Manufacturer’s Acceptable Limits
PAGE 1 OF 1
LIMIT MEASURED
120 KTS MR 4 / Rev P_HEEL 0.60 0.25 ips
140 KTS MR 1 / Rev VERT 0.25 0.25 ips
140 KTS MR 4 / Rev P_HEEL 0.60 0.29 ips
140 KTS MR 4 / Rev VERT 0.40 0.11 ips
VH MR 1 / Rev VERT 0.30 0.32 ips

[LEFT] Page Up [Right] Page Down

[DO] / [QUIT] CORRECTIONS [UP] Toggle All
IM1109
SA

Figure 31. 9LIMITS9 Screen in Diagnostics, Main Rotor Vibration Exceeds Limits
j. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 35), highlight o. If the test set was unable to find a solution that
View Predictions and press DO. resulted in acceptable predictions, and if this is the first
time during this evolution that unacceptable vibrations
NOTE were predicted by the test set, go to step p. and make the
recommended adjustments, otherwise continue on:

The prediction screen will show you what

(1) From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 35), press
vibration and track were measured and
QUIT to exit diagnostic mode.
what vibration and track are expected to
result if the adjustments currently recom-
mended are made on the aircraft. You (2) If the helicopter is being flown WITHOUT
need only be concerned with vibration external tanks installed (S-70i aircraft type is being used)
amplitude predictions. this step does not apply, proceed with step (3), otherwise
do the following: From the DIAGS display (Figure 37)
press QUIT. Pressing QUIT does not update the CUR-
k. The RESPONSES FOR screen (Figure 36), will RENT CONFIGURATION with the currently recom-
show you what the measured vibration level was, and mended adjustments.
what the vibration is predicted to be after recommended
adjustments are made. This feature informs you if the
(3) From the main menu (Figure 22), press OFF to
vibration is correctable.
turn the CADU off.

l. If the predicted vibration is all within the accep- (4) In the MAIN ROTOR 1/REV CORRECTIONS
tance limits stated on the top of the data sheet, put a MADE block on the Flight Check Data Sheet, indicate that
check mark by YES next to PREDICTIONS ACCEPTABLE ? No adjustment was made.
in the Main Rotor 1/Rev Blade Corrections block on the
data sheet (see Figure 38 for an example). If any of the
(5) Enter the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning
predicted vibration exceeds the limit stated, then put a
Troubleshooting Flowchart at PT A (Figure 47).
check mark by NO on the data sheet.
p. If you can not make the recommended corrections
m. Press DO to return to the Diagnostic Menu. (for example if a trim tab adjustment tool is not available),
you may find an alternate solution by editing adjustables.
n. If all predictions are acceptable, Yes is checked on Refer to Editing Adjustables in Diagnostics (PARA15).
the data sheet, continue with step p. to make the required Otherwise continue on.
adjustments. If any measurements are predicted to exceed
limits, No is checked on the data sheet, continue with step q. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 35), press
o. QUIT to exit the diagnostic mode.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 36

Page 1 of 1
S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 14:11
ENTER CURRENT CONFIGURATION
BLADE MR HUB WEIGHT
( OUNCE )
YEL 0.000
BLU 29.00
RED 14.00
BLK 0.000

[DO] to Confirm [QUIT] to Abort

CLEAR CLR BLD CLR ADJ RESET

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1110
SA

Figure 32. Current Configuration Screen (70iCEF Aircraft Type Only)

r. If the helicopter is being flown WITHOUT external (2) Make all required trim tab adjustments. Refer
tanks installed (S-70i aircraft type is being used) this step to Adjusting Main Rotor Trim Tab (PARA 11).
does not apply proceed with step s., otherwise do the
following: The DIAGS display screen will now be (3) If the helicopter is being flown WITH external
displayed (Figure 37). If the recommended flight tuning tanks installed (70iCEF aircraft type is being used) make
corrections are going to be implemented press DO to all required Main Rotor hub weight adjustments (PARA
update the Current Configuration. This updates the Cur- 12).
rent configuration list with the Main Rotor ground bal-
ance weight corrections that will be made on the helicop- v. Once all adjustments specified in the MAIN
ter. If the recommended flight tuning corrections will not ROTOR 1/REV CORRECTIONS MADE block of the Flight
be done press QUIT . Check Data Sheet are completed, repeat in-flight data
measurement. Refer to Vibration Measurement, PARA 7 (
PT 3 in the Flowchart, Figure 2).
s. From the main menu (Figure 22), press OFF to
turn the CADU off.
w. If a Diagnostic Warning Screen is seen (Figure
33) and it has been determined from the Flight Tuning
t. On the Flight Check Data Sheet (see Figure 38 for Troubleshooting Flowchart (Figure 47) that Main Rotor
an example), enter adjustments that are going to be made 1/rev adjustments are not required, continue with step x.
on the helicopter in the MAIN ROTOR 1/REV CORREC- If a Diagnostic Warning Screen is seen and it has been
TIONS MADE block. determined from the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning
Troubleshooting Flowchart that the Main Rotor 1/rev
u. Make all adjustments as specified in the MAIN adjustments are required, perform the following:
ROTOR 1/REV CORRECTIONS MADE block on the data
(1) From the Diagnostic Warning screen (Figure
sheet as follows:
33), press QUIT.

(1) Make all required PCR adjustments. Refer to (2) From the Diagnostic Menu (Figure 35), high-
Adjusting Main Rotor Pitch Control Rod (PARA 10). light View Corrections and press DO.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 37

Diagnostic Warning Diagnostic Warning

S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11 12 NOV 10 S−70i 53 FLOWN 14:11 12 NOV 10
PAGE 1 OF 1 PAGE 1 OF 1
Excessive Flights (2) Vibration Levels Increasing

Potential Action: Potential Action:

Main rotor adjustments are not having Main rotor adjustments are not having
desired results − Go to the Main Rotor desired results − Go to the Main Rotor
Inflight 1/Rev Troubleshooting Flow− Inflight 1/Rev Troubleshooting Flow−
chart, Figure 45 in WP 008 00 of the chart, Figure 45 in WP 008 00 of the
TM 1−70−VIB TM 1−70−VIB

[LEFT] Page Up [RIGHT] Page Down [LEFT] Page Up [RIGHT] Page Down
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu [DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu

IM1111
SA

Figure 33. Diagnostic Warning Screens

(3) The CORRECTIONS FOR screen(s) will be seen a. Identify one of the PCRs that require adjustment as
(Figure 34). Return to, and continue with step h. of this specified in the MAIN ROTOR 1/REV CORRECTIONS
procedure. MADE block on the Flight Check Data Sheet.

x. To exit diagnostics from a Diagnostic Warning b. Prior to loosening the PCR, verify the following:
screen (Figure 33), perform the following:
(1) The Main Rotor blade color code is correct.
(1) From the Diagnostic Warning screen (Figure
33), press QUIT. (2) The correct PCR is being adjusted.

(2) From the Diagnostic Menu (Figure 35), press (3) The PCR is being adjusted in the correct direc-
QUIT. tion.

(4) The PCR is being adjusted the correct number

(3) If the helicopter is being flown WITHOUT
of notches.
external tanks installed (S-70i aircraft type is being used)
this step does not apply proceed with step (4), otherwise
do the following: From the DIAGS display (Figure 37) c. Remove safety wire from both the upper and lower
press QUIT (pressing QUIT here does not update the jam nuts.
CURRENT CONFIGURATION with the currently recom-
mended adjustments). d. While holding the pitch control rod link at the
lower flats, loosen lower jam nut.
(4) Press OFF to turn the CADU off.
NOTE

(5) After troubleshooting is complete, re-measure

Upper jamnut has left-hand threads.
data. Refer to Vibration Measurement (PARA 7).
e. Continue holding link and loosen upper jamnut
10. ADJUSTING MAIN ROTOR PITCH until safety tang is clear of notches in link.
CONTROL ROD (Figure 39).
NOTE
NOTE
To go up (+), increase PCR length by turn-
A Pitch Control Rod (PCR) adjustment is ing link counterclockwise. To go down (-),
specified in notches. One notch is moving shorten PCR length by turning the link
the safety tang one castellation on the PCR. clockwise.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 38

CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 1 OF 2 CORRECTIONS FOR: PAGE 2 0F 2

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12−NOV−10 14:11 S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12−NOV−10 14:11

MR PCR (Notch) MR TRIM TAB (Mil )

+ means INCREASE PCR LENGTH + means BEND TAB UP
− means DECREASE PCR LENGTH − means BEND TAB DOWN
Blades Blades
YEL BLU RED BLK YEL BLU RED BLK
+3.00 0.00 0.00 +3.00 0.00 +7.00 +8.00 0.00

[LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page [LEFT] Prev Page [Right] Next Page
[DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu [DO] or [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu

IM1112
SA

Figure 34. Corrections For Display Screen

f. Rotate link in proper direction and correct number n. Return to Determining Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight
of notches as specified for that blade in the Flight Check Tuning Adjustments (PARA 9) step u.
Data Sheet.
11. ADJUSTING MAIN ROTOR TRIM TAB.
g. Once proper adjustment has been made, rotate
upper jam nut to re-engage safety tang in link, and a. Verify the following:
tighten both the upper and lower jamnuts.
(1) The Main Rotor blade color code is correct.
h. While holding pitch control rod at lower flats, do
the following:
(2) The correct blade color is being adjusted.
(1) TORQUE LOWER JAMNUT TO 700 -
750 INCH-POUNDS. (2) For aircraft with EPP, the correct trim tab is
being adjusted (inboard or outboard).
(2) Set 10-degree angular position of pitch control
rod. Refer to applicable maintenance manual. (3) The trim tab is being adjusted in the correct
direction.
(3) TORQUE UPPER JAMNUT TO 700 - 750
INCH-POUNDS. (4) The trim tab is being adjusted the correct
amount.
i. Check PCR for no more than 0.75 inch of threads
visible on lower end of pitch control rod. NOTE

j. Safety wire, MS20995NC32, lower jamnut in both A trim tab adjustment is specified in mils.
directions (double safety). One mil is 0.001 inches; therefore, a 16
mil tab adjustment is 0.016 inches of
k. Safety wire, MS20995NC32, upper jamnut to lock change in the tab position from the initial
key and then back to opposite side of jamnut. measurement. All adjustments are made
relative to the initial measurement.
l. Inspect component security and be sure area is
clean and free of foreign objects. To go up (+), bend the trailing edge of the
tab up. Calculate the target setting by add-
m. Repeat procedure starting at step a. until all ing the required tab change to the initial
required PCR adjustments have been made as specified in tab measurement for all stations. To go
the MAIN ROTOR 1/REV CORRECTIONS MADE block down (-), bend the trailing edge of the trim
on the Flight Check Data Sheet. tab down. Calculate the target setting by

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 39

Diagnostics Menu

View Predictions
Edit Adjustables
View Corrections
View Limits
Edit Defaults
Main Menu

[DO] Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

FG0612
SA

Figure 35. Diagnostics Menu Screen

subtracting the required change from the (a) Loosen the Allen screw that holds the dial
initial tab measurement for all stations. indicator just enough that the dial indicator is held but
can be moved without excessive force.
Do not bend any trim tabs that have not
been instructed by the diagnostics. (b) With the dial indicator loose, move the dial
indicator up and down until the small inner dial reads 0.3
b. Make a copy of the Trim Tab Adjustment Sheet for and the large outer needle is pointing straight up.
aircraft without EPP (Figure 40) and for aircraft with EPP
Figure 41. If a trim tab adjustment had been made earlier
during this evolution, use the same sheet. Enter the air-
CAUTION
craft tail number, the date, the blade information (color
and serial number), and the direction/amount of trim tab
adjustment required (see sample Trim Tab adjustment
Dial indicator could be damaged if the
sheet, Figure 45).
screw securing it to the measuring plate is
c. Get the trim tab adjustment tool set and perform over-tightened.
the following before bringing the tool up to the blade.
(c) Tighten the Allen screw just enough to
(1) Set the trim tab measuring plate onto the ref- secure the dial indicator. Do not over-tighten the Allen
erence plate as shown in Figure 42. Be sure that the three screw - the dial indicator post could be damaged and
feet on the measuring plate are resting on the reference cause the dial indicator to stick during measurements.
plate. Push the measuring plate aft on the reference plate
until the three vertical alignment pins on the measuring (d) Loosen the thumb screw on the dial indica-
plate are flush with and in contact with the forward edge tor face.
of the reference plate.
(e) Turn the dial indicator face until the needle
(2) With the measurement plate firmly held in con-
on the large outer dial is at 909, and tighten the thumb
tact with the reference plate, set the dial indicator to read
screw.
0.30 inches as follows:

NOTE (3) Recheck the dial indicator setting by removing

and then replacing the measurement plate on the refer-
On the dial indicator the small inner dial ence plate and confirming that the 0.300 inch setting has
reads to a 0.1 inch resolution while the been properly set to +/- 0.001 inches. If the dial indica-
large outer dial reads to a 0.001 resolu- tor setting is correct continue with step d. otherwise repeat
tion. steps (1) and (2).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 40

RESPONSES FOR: PAGE 1 OF 1

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 14:11
Vibration Results: Measured Predicted
Test Channel IPS DEG IPS DEG
HOVER ROLL 0.16 14 0.14 353
80 KTS ROLL 0.06 14 0.06 12
80 KTS VERT 0.07 357 0.12 32
120 KTS ROLL 0.05 314 0.02 234
120 KTS VERT 0.12 64 0.12 28
140 KTS ROLL 0.04 232 0.02 191
140 KTS VERT 0.25 128 0.08 355
VH ROLL 0.06 250 0.07 257
VH VERT 0.32 170 0.08 221
[UP] Prev Line [RIGHT] Next Line
[LEFT] Prev Page [RIGHT] Next Page
[DO] / [QUIT] Diagnostic Menu
IM1113
SA

Figure 36. Responses For Screen

d. Identify one of the blades that requires a trim tab tab. Make sure that at least two of the pins
adjustment according to the MAIN ROTOR 1/REV COR- are always in contact with the trim tab trail-
RECTIONS MADE block on the Flight Check Data Sheet. ing edge.
Turn the rotor head until that blade is over the nose of the
aircraft. h. Measure the initial trim tab settings as follows:

e. Set up a stand by the trim tab section on the trail-

ing edge of the Main Rotor blade that is to be adjusted. CAUTION

f. Bring a copy of the Trim Tab Adjustments Sheet for

aircraft without EPP (Figure 40) and for aircraft with EPP The Main Rotor blade can be damaged if
Figure 41, a 12 inch ruler, a non-corrosive marker (or the measuring plate hits or is dropped on
light colored paint), the trim tab measuring plate, and the the blade. Make sure that the measuring
trim tab bender up on the stand. These items will be plate is carefully placed on and removed
required to adjust the trim tab. from the rotor blade surfaces.

g. The trim tab measurement stations, for aircraft (1) Gently place the measurement plate on the top
without EPP, are shown in Figure 43 and trim tab mea- of the blade so that at least two of the three vertical align-
surement stations for aircraft with EPP, are shown in Fig- ment pins are against the trailing edge of the tab and all
ure 44. Use the 12 inch ruler to measure and use the three measuring plate feet are in contact with the top sur-
non-corrosive marker or light colored paint to mark all of face of the blade.
the trim tab measurement stations.
(2) Place the measurement plate so that the dial
NOTE indicator plunger is directly on a trim tab measurement
station.
If the dial indicator is accidentally moved
at any time during this procedure then (3) While making sure that all three measurement
repeat step c. to reset the dial indicator and plate feet are in contact with the top surface of the blade,
return to the point in this procedure where note the dial indicator reading and enter the reading in
the dial indicator was disturbed. the appropriate measurement station number block in the
INITIAL SETTING row on the Trim Tab Adjustment Sheet
Only two of the three vertical alignment see (sample Trim Tab adjustment sheet - Figure 45).
pins on the measuring plate will be against
the trailing edge of the tab on the two mea- (4) Move the measurement plate to the next mea-
surement stations on the ends of the trim surement station and repeat steps (1) through (3) until

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 41

DIAGS

Do you wish to store the new

adjustment values?

PRESS DO for YES

PRESS QUIT for NO

FG0483
SA

Figure 37. Current Configuration Confirmation screen (70iCEF Aircraft Type Only)
measurements have been taken at all stations. Once all or is dropped on the blade. Make sure that
measurements have been made go to step i. the tab measuring plate and bender are
carefully placed on and removed from the
i. Once all measurements have been made then cal- rotor blade surfaces.
culate the Target Settings on the Trim Tab Adjustment
Sheet as follows: NOTE
(1) Enter the trim tab change identified in the
MAIN ROTOR 1/REV CORRECTIONS MADE block on It is recommended that you bend the tab
the Flight Check Data Sheet for that blade in the COR- small amounts until a 9feel9 is developed
RECTION VALUE row on the Trim Tab Adjustment Sheet for how much force is required on the
(see sample Trim Tab adjustment sheet - Figure 45), bender to achieve a specific change in tab
directly below the INITIAL SETTING values measured setting. It is common for the tab to not move
above. Enter that same correction value for all measure- at all with small force and then move rap-
ment stations. idly with what seems to be just a slight
increase of force.
(2) If the tab is to be adjusted UP then ADD the
correction value to the initial setting and enter the result in It is possible that the adjustment of one sta-
the TARGET VALUE block for the specific measurement tion can affect an adjacent measurement
station (see sample Trim Tab adjustment sheet - Figure station. The intent of this procedure is to
45). Repeat this calculation for all measurement stations. keep repeating the bending procedure until
Once complete go to step j. none of the measurement stations require
further adjustment.
(3) If the tab is to be adjusted down, subtract the
correction value from the initial setting and enter the result The target range is specified as +/- 0.002
in the TARGET VALUE block for the specific measurement inch from the target setting noted on the
station. Repeat this calculation for all measurement sta- Trim Tab Adjustment Sheet. Each station
tions. Once complete go to step j. has a separate target setting.
j. Bend the trim tab until the target settings have been
obtained to within +/- 0.002 inches as follows: There is no limit on the maximum measure-
ment split between measurement stations;
however, if the split exceeds 0.015 inches,
CAUTION it is recommended that you adjust the tab
to an average target setting (calculated by
adding all individual target settings and
The Main Rotor blade can be damaged if dividing the result by the number of sta-
the tab measuring plate or tab bender hits tions).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 42

FLIGHT CHECK DATA SHEET

(For Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks)
AIRCRAFT 53 DATE 12 NOV 10
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV DATA BLACK
FLT # 1 BLADE 4 YELLOW
BLADE 3

NOTE:
BLACK BLADE OVER
NOSE WHEN MAG P / U
AND INTERRUPTER
ARE ALIGNED.
BLUE
BLADE 2
ROLL 0.20 ips or less at "GROUND"
0.20 ips or less at "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS",
0.25 ips or less at "VH"
Criteria:
VERT 0.25 ips or less at "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS",
0.30 ips or less at "VH" RED
BLADE 1

"VERT" "ROLL" BLADE TRACK (mm)

AMP Phase AMP Phase YEL BLU RED BLK
(ips) (deg) (ips) (deg)
GROUND 0.09 62 1.3 3.2 2.9 −6.4

HOVER 0.05 94 0.16 14 −2.3 −1.0 7.4 −5.1

80 KTS 0.07 314 0.06 357 −1.1 −2.9 6.9 −4.4

120 KTS 0.12 232 0.05 64 5.6 −7.7 6.5 −4.8

140 KTS 0.25 230 0.04 128 2.1 −12.4 2.9 6.4

VH 0.32 235 0.06 170 6.1 −9.4 −4.6 7.6

RECOMMENDED RADS−AT 1 / REV CORRECTIONS MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV CORRECTIONS MADE:

YEL PCR UP 3 NOTCHES YEL PCR UP 3 NOTCHES

BLK PCR UP 3 NOTCHES BLK PCR UP 3 NOTCHES

BLU TAB UP 0.007 INCHES BLU TAB UP 0.007 INCHES

RED TAB UP 0.008 INCHES RED TAB UP 0.008 INCHES

PREDICTIONS ACCEPTABLE? YES NO

MAIN ROTOR 4 / REV DATA

Criteria: "VERT" 0.40 ips or less at "120 KTS" and "140 KTS"

"P_Heel" 0.60 ips or less at "120 KTS" and "140 KTS"

If main rotor 4 / rev vibration is unacceptable then AVC troubleshooting is required.

Cockpit Vertical Pilot Heel Vertical

"VERT" "P_Heel"
(ips) (ips)
120 KTS 0.09 0.25

140 KTS 0.11 0.29

IM1116
SA

Figure 38. Example Flight Check Data Sheet

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 43

PITCH CONTROL ROD

UPPER
LOCKNUT
(TORQUE 700−750 +2 MINUTES/NOTCH
IN. LBS)

LOCK KEY ROTATE LINK

TO ADJUST
BLADE TRACK
NOTCH
A
−2 MINUTES/NOTCH
LINK A

3/4 IN. MAXIMUM

THREAD SHOWING LINK DECAL
LOWER LOCKNUT
(TORQUE 700−750
IN. LBS)

FA1574A
SA

Figure 39. Main Rotor Pitch Change Rod Adjustment

Gently place the measurement plate on the top of (5) Move the measuring plate to the next measure-
the blade so that at least two of the three vertical align- ment station and repeat procedure starting at step (1)
ment pins are up against the trailing edge of the tab, all until all measurement stations have been adjusted. Once
three measuring plate feet are in contact with the top sur- all stations have been adjusted continue with step (6).
face of the blade, and the dial indicator plunger is on one
of the measurement stations. (6) After all of the stations have been adjusted,
repeat step (1) through (5) until all measurement stations
(2) Note the dial indicator reading compared to are measured within the target range and none of the
the target setting for that specific measurement station. If measurement stations require further adjustment. Once
the dial indicator reading is different from the target set- all stations are confirmed to be within the target range,
ting by more than 0.002 inch, continue with step (3). If continue with step k.
the target setting range has been achieved for that mea-
surement station, continue with step (5). k. Inspect component security and be sure the area is
clean and free of foreign objects.
(3) Place the trim tab bender on the trim tab with l. Remove the work stand from the rotor arc.
the handle (the center) of the bender placed over a mea-
surement station. m. Repeat Adjusting Main Rotor Trim Tab (PARA 11)
task on any other blades as required until all required
(4) Using previous bending experience to deter- adjustments have been completed.
mine the force required, bend the trim tab by pushing the
tab bender handle up to bend the tab up or down to bend n. Return to Determining Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight
the tab down. Return to step (1). Tuning Adjustments (PARA 9) step u.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 44

TRIM TAB ADJUSTMENT SHEET

AIRCRAFT ,
DATE

Tab Blade Info Trim Tab Measurement Station

Adj # Color S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 INITIAL
SETTING

CORRECTION
VALUE
1 Mil = 0.001 inches
(+) Adjustment = Up Tab TARGET
(−) Adjustment = Down Tab VALUE

DATE

Tab Blade Info Trim Tab Measurement Station

Adj # Color S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6

2 INITIAL
SETTING

CORRECTION
VALUE
1 Mil = 0.001 inches
(+) Adjustment = Up Tab TARGET
(−) Adjustment = Down Tab VALUE

DATE

Tab Blade Info Trim Tab Measurement Station

Adj # Color S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6

3 INITIAL
SETTING

CORRECTION
VALUE
1 Mil = 0.001 inches
(+) Adjustment = Up Tab TARGET
(−) Adjustment = Down Tab VALUE

DATE

Tab Blade Info Trim Tab Measurement Station

Adj # Color S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6

4 INITIAL
SETTING

CORRECTION
VALUE
1 Mil = 0.001 inches
(+) Adjustment = Up Tab TARGET
(−) Adjustment = Down Tab VALUE

FB2364
SA

Figure 40. Trim Tab Adjustment Sheet for Aircraft Without EPP

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 45

12. MAIN ROTOR HUB WEIGHT ADJUST- b. Determine weight change required to make the
MENTS. necessary weight correction. Install balance bolts, wash-
ers, balance washers, and nuts on the appropriate spindle
NOTE (Figure 46) to achieve adjustment.

Only make weight adjustments in c. Torque all nuts to 261 - 289 inch-pounds.
accordance with the diagnostics
d. Repeat this Main Rotor hub weight adjustment
80 ounces (5.0 pounds) is the maximum procedure for all other blades that require hub weight
weight that can be installed on any one adjustment.
blade spindle.
e. Return to Determining Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight
Weight of 70106-08105-102 balance Tuning Adjustments, step u (PARA 9).
washer is 1 ounce.
13. AUTOROTATION ADJUSTMENTS.
Weight of attaching hardware is about 2
ounces (one NAS566C65 bolt, one NOTE
MS21044N6 nut, and one or two
NAS1149F0663P washers). Weight of Four notches on rod link will equal about
attaching hardware shall be included in the 1% Nr (rotor speed) change.
total weight.
Clockwise (negative) rotation of link will
A minimum of 1-1 /2 threads must be increase rotor rpm and counterclockwise
exposed beyond nut after weight is (positive) rotation of link will decrease rotor
installed and nut is torqued. rpm.

Maximum number of 70106-08105-102 a. Obtain required autorotation adjustment from

balance washers that can be used per bolt pilot.
is 18, with the NAS1149F0663P washer
under the bolt head removed to obtain a b. Adjust pitch control rod as follows:
5.0 pounds maximum. If the
NAS1149F0663P washer is installed
(1) Remove safety wire from upper and lower
under bolt head maximum balance wash-
jamnuts.
ers used per bolt is 17.

There are four locations per spindle to CAUTION

install balance weight: two locations on
upper bracket, and two locations on lower
bracket. Weight may be added to any Adjustments must be made on all pitch
location on a spindle in any order, as long control rods.
as maximum weight per bolt and spindle
are not exceeded.
(2) While holding pitch control rod link at lower
flats, loosen lower jamnut (Figure 39).
a. Refer to the Flight Check Data Sheet and identify
blade that hub weight will be adjusted on.
NOTE

CAUTION Upper jamnut has left-hand threads.

(3) Continue holding link and loosen upper jam-

Do not install any more than 80 ounces nut until key is clear of notches in barrel.
(5.0 pounds) of weight on any one blade
spindle. (4) Rotate link to increase or decrease rotor rpm.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 46

S70i MRB TRIM TAB ADJUSTMENTS & SETTINGS

AIRCRAFT=
OUTBOARD Trim Tabs
STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 STA 6
DATE TAB ADJUST
INITIAL SETTINGS

OUTBOARD
MECHANICS NAME CORRECTION
VALUE

BLADE SN # COLOR
TARGET SETTING

STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 STA 6

DATE TAB ADJUST
INITIAL SETTINGS

MECHANICS NAME CORRECTION

VALUE

BLADE SN # COLOR
TARGET SETTING

STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 STA 6

DATE TAB ADJUST
INITIAL SETTINGS

MECHANICS NAME
CORRECTION
VALUE

BLADE SN # COLOR TARGET SETTING

INBOARD Trim Tabs

STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 STA 6 STA 7 STA 8
DATE TAB ADJUST
INITIAL SETTINGS

MECHANICS NAME
CORRECTION
VALUE

INBOARD
BLADE SN # COLOR
TARGET SETTING

STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 STA 6 STA 7 STA 8

DATE TAB ADJUST
INITIAL SETTINGS

MECHANICS NAME CORRECTION

VALUE

BLADE SN # COLOR
TARGET SETTING

STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 STA 6 STA 7 STA 8

DATE TAB ADJUST
INITIAL SETTINGS

MECHANICS NAME
CORRECTION
VALUE

BLADE SN # COLOR TARGET SETTING

OUTBOARD

1 2

1.50 FOR THE 6.00 0.03

INBOARD TRIM TAB 7 EQUAL SPACES FOR TYP
INBOARD TRIM TAB
1.50 FOR THE 6.00
OUTBOARD TRIM TAB 5 EQUAL SPACES FOR
OUTBOARD TRIM TAB

IM1114
SA

Figure 41. Trim Tab Adjustment Sheet for Aircraft With EPP

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 47

MEASURING
PLATE

DIAL
INDICATOR

NOTES MEASURING
PLATE FEET
MAKE SURE THAT THE MEASURING PLATE
FEET ARE IN FIRM CONTACT WITH THE
TOP OF THE REFERENCE PLATE
MAKE SURE THAT THE ALIGNMENT PINS
ARE IN CONTACT WITH THE FORWARD VERTICAL
EDGE OF THE REFERENCE PLATE ALIGNMENT
PIN D REFERENCE
DIAL INDICATOR SHOULD READ 0.300 FW PLATE
INCHES.
FB4062
SA

Figure 42. Main Rotor Blade Trim Tab Dial Indicator Setup

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
4" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8"

MEASUREMENT STATIONS

STATION 1 2 3 4 5 6

INCHES
FROM 0 4 12 20 28 36 44 TOWARDS
BLADE TIP
FG0617
SA

Figure 43. Main Rotor Blade Trim Tab Measurement Stations for Aircraft Without EPP
(5) Engage lock key and tighten upper and lower (b) Set 10-degree angular position of pitch
jamnut. control rod. Refer to applicable maintenance manual.

(6) While holding pitch control rod link at lower (c) TORQUE UPPER JAMNUT TO 700 -
flats, do the following: 750 INCH-POUNDS.

(a) TORQUE LOWER JAMNUT TO 700 - (7) Check PCR for no more than 0.75 inch of
750 INCH-POUNDS. threads visible on lower end of pitch control rod.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 48

OUTBOARD

1 2

1.50 FOR THE 6.00 0.03

INBOARD TRIM TAB 7 EQUAL SPACES FOR TYP
INBOARD TRIM TAB
1.50 FOR THE 6.00
OUTBOARD TRIM TAB 5 EQUAL SPACES FOR
OUTBOARD TRIM TAB
IM1115
SA

Figure 44. Main Rotor Blade Trim Tab Measurement Stations for Aircraft With EPP

TRIM TAB ADJUSTMENT SHEET

53
AIRCRAFT
12 Nov 10
DATE

Tab Blade Info Trim Tab Measurement Station

Adj # Color S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 INITIAL 0.347 0.340 0.338 0.342 0.345 0.340

Yellow 569
SETTING

CORRECTION
+0.020 +0.020 +0.020 +0.020 +0.020 +0.020
VALUE
1 Mil = 0.001 inches
(+) Adjustment = Up Tab TARGET
(−) Adjustment = Down Tab VALUE 0.367 0.360 0.358 0.362 0.365 0.360

FB4063B
SA

Figure 45. Sample Trim Tab Adjustment Sheet

(8) Safety wire, MS20995NC32, lower jamnut in d. Inspect component security and be sure area is
both directions (double safety). clean and free of foreign objects.

(9) Safety wire, MS20995NC32, upper jamnut to

lock key and then back to opposite side of jamnut. e. Recheck autorotation RPM.

c. Repeat step b. until all four PCRs are adjusted the

same number of notches in the same direction.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 49

WASHER
BOLT
WASHER
BALANCE
NUT (TORQUE BRACKET
261−289 IN. LBS)

BALANCE WASHERS
A 70106−08105−102
(AS REQUIRED)
SPINDLE
BALANCE
BRACKET

FB2354
SA

Figure 46. Main Rotor Hub Weight installation

14. MAIN ROTOR 1/REV FLIGHT TUNING TEST data from CADU memory, and compress CADU memory.
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL. Refer to Software/Data Management Instructions (WP
010 00). Return CADU to case.
a. Remove UTD tracker bracket from the nose of air-
craft along with UTD tracker cable. Return equipment to 15. EDITING ADJUSTABLES IN DIAGNOSTICS.
appropriate case.
NOTE
b. Remove all accelerometer brackets,
accelerometers, and cables from the cockpit. Return You may choose to edit adjustables if the
equipment to the appropriate case. recommended adjustments can not be
made due to the lack of equipment or
c. Remove magnetic pickup and magnetic pickup hardware.
cable. Return equipment to the appropriate case.
The most common scenario in which edit-
d. Disconnect the 28 VDC power cable from the DAU ing adjustables is required for Main Rotor
and from aircraft 28 VDC receptacle, remove cable from 1/Rev Flight Tuning is when a trim tab
the aircraft, and return them to the appropriate case. adjustment tool is not available and trim
tab adjustments can not be done. In this
e. Disconnect the CADU-to-DAU cable from the situation it is recommended that a solution
CADU and DAU. Remove both the CADU-to-DAU cable be obtained that does not utilize trim tab
and DAU from aircraft and return them to the appropri- adjustments (instructions are provided in
ate case. this procedure).

f. If all vibration tasks are complete on that tail num- By editing adjustables you can investigate
ber aircraft, download data from the CADU to PC, delete alternative adjustments. It must be under-

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 50

WAS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN

"VIBRATIONS LEVELS INCREASING"
SEEN ON CADU?
(SEE NOTE 1)

YES NO

WAS MAINTENANCE PERFORMED ON THE MAIN ROTOR WAS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN
PRIOR TO THIS LAST FLIGHT THAT WOULD EXPLAIN AN "EXCESSIVE FLIGHTS"
INCREASE IN MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV VIBRATION? SEEN ON CADU?
(SEE NOTE 2)
YES NO
YES NO

CHECK ALL VIBRATION EQUIPMENT FOR PROPER

HAVE FOUR (4) COMPLETE FLIGHTS BEEN MADE ON
INSTALLATION. REFER TO TEST
THE AIRCRAFT SINCE MAINTENANCE WAS
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (THIS WP).
PERFORMED ON THE HELICOPTER BY DIRECTION OF THE
PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO: MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
- ACCELEROMETER INSTALLATION AND ORIENTATION. TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART (FIGURE41)?
- ACCELS CONNECTED TO PROPER RECEPTACLE ON DAU.
- BLACK BLADE OVER NOSE WHEN MAGNETIC PICKUP
YES NO
AND INTERRUPTER ARE ALIGNED.
- BLADE COLOR CODE SEQUENCE IS CORRECT.
WAS ALL EQUIPMENT PROPERLY INSTALLED?

YES NO

REFER TO DETERMINING MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV REFER TO DETERMINING MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV
FLIGHT TUNING ADJUSTMENTS (THIS WP) AND CONTINUE FLIGHT TUNING ADJUSTMENTS (THIS WP)
PROCEDURE STARTING AT STEP V TO GET AND CONTINUE PROCEDURE STARTING STEP V
THE REQUIRED MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV ADJUSTMENTS. TO GET THE REQUIRED MAIN ROTOR ADJUSTMENTS.

1. REFER TO DETERMINING MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV MAINT ROTOR FLIGHT TUNING ADJUSTMENTS ARE NOT
FLIGHT TUNING ADJUSTMENTS (THIS WP) STEP W PRODUCING THE DESIRED RESULTS.
TO EXIT DIAGNOSTICS. THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE ROTOR SYSTEM THAT
2. CORRECT INSTRUMENTATION PROBLEMS IN MUST BE CORRECTED BEFORE THE 1 / REV VIBRATION CAN
BE TUNED, CONTINUE WITH THIS FLOWCHART.
ACCORDANCE WITH FLIGHT CHECK TEST EQUIP-
MENT INSTALLATIONS (THIS WP).
3. RE-MEASURE DATA. REFER TO VIBRATION
MEASUREMENT (THIS WP).
(SEE NOTE 2).

SHEET 2
NOTES
1.
MAKE SURE THAT ALL MAIN ROTOR BLADE ADJUSTMENTS ARE
MADE PROPERLY. IF THIS DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN IS
SEEN REPEATEDLY WITHOUT EXPLANATION, THEN REPLACE
ACCELEROMETERS AND ACCELEROMETER CABLES AND
REPEAT PROCEDURE. IF THE DIAGNOSTIC WARNING SCREEN
STILL PERSISTS, THEN GO TO "PT A" IN THIS FLOWCHART.
2.
MAINTENANCE INVOLVING THE REPLACEMENT OR SWAPPING OF
COMPONENTS MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASE OF MAIN ROTOR
1 / REV VIBRATION WHEN COMPARED TO THE VIBRATION FB4064_1B
MEASURED ON THE PREVIOUS RUN. SA

Figure 47. Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 2)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 51

PT A

HAS A THOROUGH INSPECTION BEEN COMPLETED

ON THE MAIN ROTOR SYSTEMS?

YES NO

(HELICOPTERS WITHOUT EXTERANL TANKS) INSPECT MAIN ROTOR SYSTEM.

IS ROLL VIBRATION WITHIN LIMITS AT HOVER, REFER TO MAIN ROTOR SYSTEM INSPECTION (THIS WP).
80KTS, 120KTS, 140KTS, AND VH?
(HELICOPTERS WITH EXTERNAL TANKS) RE-ENTER THE MAIN ROTOR
IS LATERAL VIBRATION WITHIN LIMITS AT 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING FLOWCHART (FIGURE 2)
HOVER, 80 KTS, 120 KTS, AND VH? AT "PT 2"

YES NO

HAVE ALL FOUR (4) DAMPERS BEEN COMPLETELY

PURGED AND RE-SERVICED?

YES NO

HAVE ALL FOUR (4) DAMPERS BEEN REPLACED? PURGE AND RE-SERVICE
ALL FOUR (4) MAIN ROTOR DAMPERS.
RE-ENTER THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
YES NO FLOWCHART (FIGURE 2)
AT "PT 3"

IDENTIFY SUSPECT MAIN ROTOR BLADE(S). IDENTIFY SUSPECT MAIN ROTOR DAMPERS.
REFER TO IDENTIFYING SUSPECT MAIN ROTOR BLADES REFER TO IDENTIFYING SUSPECT
(THIS WP). MAIN ROTOR DAMPERS
(THIS WP).
REPLACE SUSPECT BLADE(S).
RE-ENTER THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING REPLACE SUSPECT DAMPER(S).
FLOWCHART (FIGURE 2)
PURGE AND RE-SERVICE REPLACEMENT DAMPERS.
AT "PT 2"
RE-ENTER THE MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING
FLOWCHART (FIGURE 2)
AT "PT 3"

FB4064_2A
SA

Figure 47. Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 2)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 52

stood that an alternative adjustment may

not exist that predicts acceptable vibration. If an N (NO) is seen, that adjustment IS
NOT allowed on that blade. If a Y (YES) is
Rotor adjustments can be allowed (turned seen, that adjustment IS allowed on that
on) or disallowed (turned off) by adjust- blade.
ment type or by blade. It is possible to
allow or disallow one adjustment type on d. Press F4 (DEFLTS). This will turn on all available
all blades, all adjustment types on one corrections. Y will be seen for all choices on the Diagnos-
blade, or one adjustment type on one tic Adjustable screen, (Figure 48 or Figure 50), whichever
blade. is applicable.

a. Perform Determining Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight e. Use thed, f, s, and g keys to highlight the
Tuning Adjustments (PARA 9), until the Diagnostic Menu desired adjustment and blade parameter that is to be
(Figure 35) is seen. changed and use the F1, F2 , F3, and F4 keys to change
adjustment table as follows:
b. From the Diagnostic Menu (Figure 35), highlight
Edit Adjustables and press DO. (1) To disallow an entire adjustment type, high-
light any blade in the desired adjustment row and press
c. The diagnostic adjustable selection screen for air- F2 (CLRADJ).
craft without EPP will be seen in (Figure 48), The diagnos-
(2) To disallow all adjustment types on a specific
tic adjustable selection screen for aircraft with EPP will be
blade, highlight any adjustment type in the blade column
seen in (Figure 50). Adjustables are turned on and off
and press F3 (CLRBLD).
from this screen.
(3) To disallow or allow any specific blade and
NOTE adjustment type combination, highlight the desired
parameter and press F1(Toggle).
In the diagnostic adjustable selection
screen the following abbreviations are (4) To return to programmed default values, press
used: F4 (DEFLTS).

TOGGLE (F1 key) will toggle the (5) Specify the adjustable table as desired. Figure
highlighted adjustment between Y and N . 49 shows the Diagnostic Adjustable screen set up for a
PCR only solution for aircraft without EPP. Figure 51
CLRADJ (F2 key) will clear an adjustment shows the Diagnostic Adjustable screen set up for a PCR
type. This will change all blades for the only solution for aircraft with EPP. Figure 48 shows the
highlighted adjustment type to N . Diagnostic Adjustable screen set up for a PCR and trim
tab solution for aircraft without EPP. Figure 50 shows the
CLRBLD (F3 key) will clear a blade. This Diagnostic Adjustable screen set up for a PCR only solu-
will change all adjustment types for the tion for aircraft with EPP.
highlighted area to N .
f. Once all the adjustables are specified as you wish,
DEFLTS (F4 key) will change all adjust- press DO to re-run the diagnostics. The will calculate the
ables to the values specified by the aircraft best possible solution for the new adjustment configura-
setup file. tion.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 53

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 14:24

YEL BLU RED BLK

MR PCR Y Y Y Y

MR Inboard Tab Y Y Y Y

[DO] Save & Execute [QUIT] Exit w/o Save

TOGGLE CLRADJ CLRBLD DEFLTS

IM1117
SA

Figure 48. Diagnostic Adjustable Screen Set Up For PCR And Trim Tab Adjustments (Aircraft without EPP)

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 14:24

YEL BLU RED BLK

MR PCR Y Y Y Y

MR Trim Tab N N N N

[DO] Save & Execute [QUIT] Exit w/o Save

TOGGLE CLRADJ CLRBLD DEFLTS

IM1118
SA

Figure 49. Diagnostic Adjustable Screen Set Up For PCR Adjustments Only (Aircraft without EPP)
g. The CORRECTIONS FOR screen (Figure 34), pro-
CAUTION vides you with a set of adjustments. Use the g and s keys
to go between the required pages. Record the recom-
mended adjustments on a scrap piece of paper.
Make sure that all pages (screens) of the
diagnostic solutions are reviewed and
h. Press QUIT to exit the correction screen.
accurately recorded. If a partial or an
incorrect adjustment is made on the
aircraft, the resulting vibration may be i. From the Diagnostics Menu (Figure 35), highlight
higher than is expected. The number of View Predictions and press DO.
pages of adjustments is shown in the upper
right corner of the CORRECTIONS FOR
j. The prediction screen will be seen (Figure 36).
screen (Figure 34).
Review the predicted ips levels.
NOTE
k. If the HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, 140KTS, and VH
CADU screens can be printed. Refer to vibrations (helicopters WITHOUT external tanks), or
SOFTWARE SETUP INSTRUCTIONS, this GROUND, HOVER, 80KTS, 120KTS, and VH vibrations
manual. (helicopters WITH external tanks) are all predicted to be

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 54

within the limits stated in Table 1, or Table 2, whichever is n. Return to Determining Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight
applicable, an alternate solution has been found. Tuning Adjustments (PARA 9 step q.) and continue the
procedure.
l. Press QUIT to return to the Diagnostic Menu (Fig-
ure 35).

m. To run another set of adjustments, repeat proce-

dure starting at step b., otherwise continue with step n.

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 14:24

YEL BLU RED BLK

MR PCR Y Y Y Y

MR Inboard Tab Y Y Y Y

MR Outboard Tab N N N N

[DO] Save & Execute [QUIT] Exit w/o Save

TOGGLE CLRADJ CLRBLD DEFLTS

IM1120
SA

Figure 50. Diagnostic Adjustable Screen Set Up For PCR And Trim Tab Adjustments (Aircraft with EPP)
16. MAIN ROTOR SYSTEM INSPECTIONS. b. Inspect Main Rotor PCR bearings for excessive
wear. Refer to applicable maintenance manual.

CAUTION c. Inspect damper bearings for excessive wear. Refer

to applicable maintenance manual.
For additional Main Rotor system inspec-
tions, refer to CSN No. 70 64 Figure 9, d. Inspect swashplate bearings, scissors, and spheri-
which contains unique Main Rotor compo- cal bearings for excessive wear. Refer to applicable
nent troubleshooting not presently included maintenance manual.
in this manual (TM 1-70-VIB).
e. Inspect Dampers for excessive leakage.
NOTE

It is recommended that all inspections be NOTE

completed before the helicopter re-starts
the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning proce- It is not possible to accurately check radial
dure. However, the maintenance technician bearing play on any of the three flight con-
may stop the inspections if something sig- trol channels between the primary servo
nificant is discovered. If the inspection is outputs and the swashplate without discon-
stopped before all systems were inspected necting the channel from the primary servo
and problems persist, continue the inspec- output.
tion at the point that it was stopped earlier.

Correct discrepancies as they are discov- f. Inspect the Forward, Aft, and Lateral flight control
ered. channels between the primary servo output and the
swashplate for excessive wear (refer to applicable main-
a. Inspect Main Rotor blades and tip caps for dam- tenance manual). Make sure that the channel is discon-
age, disbonding, cracks, etc. Refer to applicable mainte- nected from the primary servo output before being
nance manual. checked for play. Pay special attention to the Aft channel.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 55

g. Re-enter the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Flow-

chart (Figure 2) at PT 2.

S−70i 53 FLT CHK 12 NOV 10 14:24

YEL BLU RED BLK

MR PCR Y Y Y Y

MR Inboard Tab N N N N

MR Outboard Tab N N N N

[DO] Save & Execute [QUIT] Exit w/o Save

TOGGLE CLRADJ CLRBLD DEFLTS

IM1119
SA

Figure 51. Diagnostic Adjustable Screen Set Up For PCR Adjustments Only (Aircraft with EPP)
17. IDENTIFYING SUSPECT MAIN ROTOR
DAMPERS. LATERAL vibration is plotted on the trouble-
shooting table to identify suspect dampers
NOTE for helicopters WITH external tanks
installed
An example of this procedure is provided
in Figure 54. d. Plot ROLL vibration (helicopters WITHOUT exter-
nal tanks) or LATERAL vibration (helicopters WITH exter-
a. Get the copy of the Flight Check Data Sheet that nal tanks), whichever is applicable, on the Vibration Plot
has the vibration and track data entered (see Figure 54 section of the Troubleshooting Table (Figure 52 and Fig-
for an example). ure 53, whichever is applicable) as follows:

b. Make a copy of the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tun- (1) From the Flight Check Data Sheet, identify the
ing Troubleshooting Table (Figure 52 or Figure 53, HOVER Roll or Lateral vibration ips and deg, whichever is
whichever applies). applicable, and plot as PT 1.

c. Recall the lead/lag and lead/lag standard devia- (2) Identify the 80KTS Roll or Lateral vibration ips
tion data from the test set. Refer to Recalling Data (PARA and deg, whichever is applicable, and plot as PT 2.
8). Enter data in the Lead/Lag Data section of the Main
Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Troubleshooting Table. (3) Identify the 120KTS Roll or Lateral vibration
ips and deg, whichever is applicable, and plot as PT 3.
NOTE
(4) Draw a line between PT 2 and PT 3.
Be sure to use the correct Main Rotor 1/Rev
Flight Tuning Troubleshooting Table. Differ-
ent troubleshooting tables are used (5) Locate the center of the line between PT 2 and
depending on whether the helicopter has PT 3 and label the center point as PT 4.
external tanks installed (see Figure 52 and
Figure 53). e. Draw a line through PT 1 and PT 4.

ROLL vibration is plotted on the f. Draw a line through the center of the vibration plot
troubleshooting table to identify suspect that is parallel to the line that was drawn through PT 1
dampers for helicopters WITHOUT exter- and PT 4; this is called the center line. Make sure the
nal tanks installed. center line extends through both sides of the plot.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 56

MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE

A/C (For Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks)
FLT
DATE
LEAD / LAG DATA SECTION

YEL BLU RED BLK

LEAD / LAG (mm)

HOVER
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

LEAD / LAG (mm)

80 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

LEAD / LAG (mm)

120 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

NOTE:
BLACK BLADE MUST BE CLOCK ANGLES
VIBRATION PLOT 12 [0]
OVER NOSE WHEN MAG
P / U AND INTERRUPTER 11 1 RADS-AT
ARE ALIGNED. [330] [30] PHASE ANGLES
BLK

10 2
RED YEL [300] [60]

BLU
ips
9 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
[90]
[270] 3

[240] [120]
8 4

[210] [150]
7 5

6 [180]
SUSPECT BLADE CHART SUSPECT DAMPER CHART

12 CORRECTIVE ACTION: 12
11 1 11 1

10 2 10 RED / 2
RED / BLU / YEL
YEL BLK BLU /
9 3 9 BLK 3
BLU /
BLU / BLK
BLK RED /
YEL RED /
8 4 8 YEL 4

7 5 7 5
6 6 FB4373
SA

Figure 52. Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Troubleshooting Table for Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 57

MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE

A/C (For Helicopters WITH External Tanks)
FLT
DATE
LEAD / LAG DATA SECTION

YEL BLU RED BLK

LEAD / LAG (mm)

HOVER
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

LEAD / LAG (mm)

80 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

LEAD / LAG (mm)

120 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

NOTE:
BLACK BLADE MUST BE CLOCK ANGLES
VIBRATION PLOT 12 [170]
OVER NOSE WHEN MAG
P / U AND INTERRUPTER 11 1 RADS-AT
ARE ALIGNED. [140] [200] PHASE ANGLES
BLK

10 2
RED YEL [110] [230]

BLU
ips
9 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
[260]
[80] 3

[50] [290]
8 4

[20] [320]
7 5

6 [350]
SUSPECT BLADE CHART SUSPECT DAMPER CHART

12 CORRECTIVE ACTION: 12
11 1 11 1

10 2 10 RED / 2
RED / BLU / YEL
YEL BLK BLU /
9 3 9 BLK 3
BLU /
BLU / BLK
BLK RED /
YEL RED /
8 4 8 YEL 4

7 5 7 5
6 6 FB4067B
SA

Figure 53. 1/Rev Flight Tuning Troubleshooting Table for Helicopters WITH External Tanks

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 58

FLIGHT CHECK DATA SHEET

AIRCRAFT 053 (For Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks) DATE 13 Nov 10

FLT # 4 MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV DATA NOTE:

BLK BLACK BLADE MUST BE
OVER NOSE WHEN MAG
P / U AND INTERRUPTER
ARE ALIGNED.
ROLL 0.20 IPS OR LESS AT "GROUND"
0.20 IPS OR LESS AT "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS", RED
0.25 IPS OR LESS AT "VH" YEL
Criteria:
VERT 0.25 IPS OR LESS AT "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS",
0.30 IPS OR LESS AT "VH"
BLU

"VERT" "ROLL" BLADE TRACK (mm)

AMP Phase AMP Phase YEL BLU RED BLK
(ips) (deg) (ips) (deg)
GROUND 0.18 22 −3 3 −6 5

HOVER 0.08 100 0.08 69 0 4 −5 1

80 KTS 0.11 89 0.46 269 −5 11 −7 1

120 KTS 0.06 89 0.28 245 1 3 −7 3

140 KTS 0.11 66 0.09 103 7 −6 4 −5

VH 0.21 276 0.33 254 −17 14 0 2

FB4068_1B
SA

Figure 54. Example of Suspect Damper Identification (Sheet 1 of 2)

NOTE NOTE

The clock angle is read from the outer edge When reviewing lead/lag data only look
of the plotting circle and is the point the at the suspect dampers that were identified
center line passes through the plotting circle by the vibration data.
circumference. Two clock angles will be
identified by the center line. Both clock A bad damper may lead or lag. When
angles will identify the same damper set. If reviewing lead/lag data, identify the
different damper sets are identified by the damper (blade) that has the largest num-
center line, an error was made when plot- ber. Do not base decisions solely on
ting. whether a blade is leading or lagging.

Identify the flight condition that exhibits the

If the two dampers were already replaced,
highest Roll or Lateral 1/rev vibration,
suspect the other two dampers.
whichever is applicable, among the
HOVER, 80KTS, or 120KTS flight condi-
If the clock angle on the Suspect Damper tions. The lead/lag data at this same flight
Chart is on the line between two different condition will usually identify the problem
damper sets, there may be a problem with damper.
multiple dampers.
If the lead/lag data does not identify one
g. Identify the clock angle of the center line from the damper, replace both dampers.
Vibration Plot and mark the identified clock angle on the
Suspect Damper Chart on the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight h. Review the lead/lag and lead/lag standard
Tuning Troubleshooting Table. Circle the two colors that deviation data at HOVER, 80KTS, and 120KTS for only
are listed in the identified section of the Suspect Damper the two suspect dampers. If one of the two dampers shows
Chart. Those two dampers are suspect. more lead (or lag) AND a higher standard deviation,

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 59

MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE

A/C 53 (For Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks)
FLT 4
DATE 13 NOV 10

YEL BLU RED BLK

LEAD / LAG (mm) −8 4 −7 10

HOVER
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm) 2 2 2 3

LEAD / LAG (mm) −12 4 −19 26

80 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm) 10 12 12 17

LEAD / LAG (mm) −4 1 −2 4

120 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm) 2 2 2 2

NOTE:
BLACK BLADE MUST BE CLOCK ANGLES
12 [0]
OVER NOSE WHEN MAG VIBRATION PLOT
P / U AND INTERRUPTER 11 1 RADS−AT
ARE ALIGNED. [330] [30] PHASE ANGLES
BLK

10 2
RED YEL [300] [60]
LINE DRAWN THROUGH
"PT 1" AND "PT 4"

BLU
"PT 1" ips 2:30 CLOCK
"PT 2" 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 ANGLE IDENTIFIED
9
"PT 4" [90]
[270] 0.10 0.20 3

"PT 3"
CENTER LINE

8:30 CLOCK
ANGLE IDENTIFIED [240] [120]
8 4

[210] [150]
7 5
SUSPECT BLADE CHART 6 [180] SUSPECT DAMPER CHART
12 8:30 CLOCK 12 2:30 CLOCK
11 1 ANGLE 11 1 ANGLE
CORRECTIVE ACTION: IDENTIFIED IDENTIFIED
10 2 LEAD / LAG DATA SHOWS THAT AT 10 RED / 2
RED / BLU / 80 KNOTS THE BLACK IS LEADING YEL
YEL BLK MORE THAN THE BLUE, AND THE BLU /
BLACK STANDARD DEVIATION IS BLK
9 3 LARGER THAN THE BLUE. 9 3
BLU /
BLU / BLK
BLK RED / THEREFORE:
YEL RED /
8 4 8 YEL 4
REPLACE
7 5 BLACK DAMPER 7 5
FB4068_2B
6 6 SA

Figure 54. Example of Suspect Damper Identification (Sheet 2 of 2)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 60

replace that damper. If both dampers have about the Check Data Sheet. If this phase adjustment
same lead (or lag) AND about the same standard devia- is not made an incorrect blade may be
tion, then replace both dampers. Identify the suspect identified. The ROLL vibration for helicop-
damper on the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Trouble- ters WITHOUT external tanks is plotted
shooting Table. without any phase adjustment.

NOTE For helicopters WITH external tanks

installed 120 degrees must be added to the
If it is determined that the removed Main 9VERT deg9 recorded on the Flight Check
Rotor damper was the cause of the 1/Rev Data Sheet. If this phase adjustment is not
vibration problem, submit the bad damper made an incorrect blade may be identified.
for rework. The LATERAL vibration for helicopters
WITH external tanks is plotted without any
Do not reject any Main Rotor dampers until phase adjustment.
it is confirmed that the damper was the
cause of the 1/Rev vibration problem. (1) If helicopter does NOT have external tanks
installed (Figure 52 is being used) identify the highest
i. Replace identified damper(s). VERT vibration ips and deg on the Flight Check Data
Sheet, subtract 50 degrees from the 9VERT deg9 value
j. Re-enter the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning and plot as PT 1. If helicopter has external tanks installed
FLOWCHART (Figure 2) at PT 3. (Figure 53 is being used) identify the highest VERT vibra-
tion ips and deg on the Flight Check Data Sheet, add 120
18. IDENTIFYING SUSPECT MAIN ROTOR degrees to the 9VERT deg9 value and plot as PT A.
BLADES.
(2) Identify the HOVER Roll or Lateral vibration ips
NOTE and deg, whichever is applicable, and plot as PT B.

An example of this procedure is provided (3) Identify the VH Roll or Lateral vibration ips and
in Figure 55. deg, whichever is applicable, and plot as PT C.

a. Get the copy of the Flight Check Data Sheet that (4) Draw a line between PT B and PT C.
has the vibration and track data written on it.
(5) Locate the center of the line between PT B and
NOTE PT C and label the center point as PT D.

Be sure to use the correct Main Rotor 1/Rev d. Draw a line through PT A and PT D.
Flight Tuning Troubleshooting Table. Differ-
ent troubleshooting tables are used e. Draw a line through the center of the vibration plot
depending on whether the helicopter has that is parallel to the line that was drawn through PT A
external tanks installed (see Figure 52 or and PT D; this is called the center line. Make sure the
Figure 53). center line extends through both sides of the plotting
circle.
b. Make a copy of the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tun-
ing Troubleshooting Table (Figure 52 and Figure 53, NOTE
whichever is applicable).
The clock angle is read from the outer edge
c. Plot vibration on the Troubleshooting Table as fol- of the plotting circle and is the point at
lows: which the center line passes through the
plotting circle circumference. Two clock
NOTE angles will be identified by the center line.
Both clock angles will identify the same
For helicopters WITHOUT external tanks blade set. If different blade sets are identi-
installed 50 degrees must be subtracted fied by the center line, an error was made
from the 9VERT deg9 recorded on the Flight when plotting.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 61

If the two blades were already replaced, Blade track standard deviation is not used
suspect the other two blades. because that data is mostly a measure of
blade response to air turbulence.
If the clock angle on the Suspect Blade
Chart is on the line between two different g. Review the track data at GROUND, HOVER,
blade sets, there may be more than one 80KTS, 120KTS, 140KTS and VH for only the two suspect
incompatible blade on the aircraft. blades. If one of the two blades shows more out-of-track
condition, replace that blade. If both blades have about
f. Identify the clock angle of the center line from the the same out of track, then replace both blades. Identify
Vibration Plot and mark the identified clock angle on the the suspect blade(s) on the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tun-
Suspect Blade Chart on the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tun- ing Troubleshooting Table.
ing Troubleshooting Table. Circle the two colors that are
listed in the identified section of the Suspect blade Chart.
NOTE
Those two blades are suspect.

NOTE If a spare Main Rotor blade is not avail-

able, swap the suspect Main Rotor blade
When reviewing track data, only look at with an adjacent Main Rotor blade and
the suspect blades that were identified by continue with this procedure.
vibration data.
If it is determined that the removed Main
An incompatible blade may show a large Rotor blade was the cause of the 1/Rev
track change from flat pitch to hover, may vibration problem, submit the incompatible
show a blade track that climbs or dives with blade for static and dynamic balancing .
increased airspeed, may show a climbing
(or diving) blade track from hover to 120kts Do not reject any Main Rotor blades until it
(or 140kts) then reverses trend and dives is confirmed that the blade was the cause
(or climbs) from 120kts (or 140kts) to Vh, of the 1/Rev vibration problem.
may show a blade track that is always high
(or low) no matter what adjustments are
made. h. Replace identified blade(s).

If the track data does not identify one i. Re-enter the Main Rotor 1/Rev Flight Tuning Flow-
blade, replace both blades. chart (Figure 2) at PT 2.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 62

FLIGHT CHECK DATA SHEET

053
(For Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks) 13 Nov 10
AIRCRAFT DATE
MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV DATA
FLT # 4 NOTE:
BLK BLACK BLADE MUST BE
OVER NOSE WHEN MAG
P / U AND INTERRUPTER
ARE ALIGNED.
ROLL 0.20 IPS OR LESS AT "GROUND"
0.20 IPS OR LESS AT "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS", RED
0.25 IPS OR LESS AT "VH" YEL
Criteria:
VERT 0.25 IPS OR LESS AT "HOVER", "80 KTS", "120 KTS", "140 KTS",
0.30 IPS OR LESS AT "VH"
BLU

"VERT" "ROLL" BLADE TRACK (mm)

AMP Phase AMP Phase YEL BLU RED BLK
(ips) (deg) (ips) (deg)
GROUND 0.11 201 3 −2 0 −1

HOVER 0.14 192 0.08 344 4 0 −3 −2

80 KTS 0.26 138 0.05 119 −10 12 9 −11

120 KTS 0.28 127 0.04 121 −11 17 7 −12

140 KTS 0.30 127 0.11 52 −14 21 5 −12

VH 0.40 107 0.18 16 −12 18 2 −8

FB4069_1B
SA

Figure 55. Example of Suspect Blade Identification (Sheet 1 of 2)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 008 00
Page 63/(64 Blank)

MAIN ROTOR 1 / REV FLIGHT TUNING TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE

A/C 53 (For Helicopters WITHOUT External Tanks)
FLT 4
DATE 13 NOV 10

LEAD / LAG DATA SECTION

YEL BLU RED BLK

LEAD / LAG (mm)

HOVER
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

LEAD / LAG (mm)

80 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

LEAD / LAG (mm)

120 KTS
STANDARD DEVIATION (mm)

NOTE:
BLACK BLADE MUST BE CLOCK ANGLES
VIBRATION PLOT 12 [0]
OVER NOSE WHEN MAG
P / U AND INTERRUPTER 11 1 RADS−AT
ARE ALIGNED. [330] [30] PHASE ANGLES
BLK

10 2
RED LINE DRAWN THROUGH
YEL [300] [60] "PT A" AND "PT D"

"PT C"
BLU "PT D" "PT A"
ips 2:30 CLOCK
9 "PT B" 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 ANGLE IDENTIFIED
[90]
[270] 0.10 0.20 3

CENTER LINE

8:30 CLOCK
ANGLE IDENTIFIED [240] [120]
8 4

[210] [150]
7 5

SUSPECT BLADE CHART 6 [180] SUSPECT DAMPER CHART

8:30 CLOCK 12 2:30 CLOCK 12
ANGLE 11 1 ANGLE 11 1
IDENTIFIED IDENTIFIED CORRECTIVE ACTION:
10 2 TRACK DATA SHOWS THE BLUE 10 RED / 2
RED / BLU / BLADE IS CLIMBING AS AIRSPEED YEL
YEL BLK INCREASES. THEREFORE: BLU /
9 3 9 BLK 3
BLU /
BLU / BLK
BLK RED / REPLACE RED /
YEL
8 4
BLUE BLADE 8 YEL 4

7 5 7 5
6 6 FB4069_2C
SA

Figure 55. Example of Suspect Blade Identification (Sheet 2 of 2)

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

SOFTWARE SET UP INSTRUCTIONS

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

RADS-AT Operation and Maintenance .................................................................... 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page/No.

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Test Procedures ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Printing From The Test Set ......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Setting Accelerometer Types On CADU ............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Setting Data Display Units On CADU ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setting Time And Date On CADU ................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

28130802 RS-232 Cable (GE Aviation Systems)

29315000 Battery Charger (GE Aviation Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE
Aviation Systems)

Materials Required
None

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 2

1. PURPOSE.
Make sure the proper printer port (serial or
a. The purpose of this task is to provide you with an parallel) is selected in the CADU software.
instruction on how to make setup changes to the software
in the Control And Display Unit (CADU). It is possible to Make sure the proper printer driver is
change the printer set up, date & time, accelerometer set selected in the CADU software.
up, and define display units on the CADU without con-
necting to a Personal Computer (PC). Make sure the DIP-switches are set prop-
erly on the printer.
2. TEST PROCEDURES.
To set the printer DIP-switches you must
NOTE have access to the Operation Manual,
29480100, and the printer instruction
When in the MANAGER mode, the DO manual. The printer interface parameters
key selects the highlighted item and moves used by the test set are listed in the Setting
to the next screen, while the QUIT key Up The Printer section of the test set
backs out to the previous screen. While in manual. The printer DIP-switch location
the manager mode you must press DO and specifications are shown in the printer
when exiting a screen after changes have manual. It is your responsibility to make
been made (the test set does not change sure that the printer DIP-switch settings
any software settings until DO is pressed). match the test set parameter list. After the
If you press QUIT to exit a screen after printer DIP-switch settings are set, you must
changes are made no changes are saved. turn the printer off then back on for the new
DIP-switch settings to be recognized.
Once an item has been set up in the CADU
software it will remain set up until the set- If the printer being connected to the test set
ting is changed by this procedure, new air- has a parallel interface connector, then you
craft software has been loaded on the must acquire a parallel interface cable, the
CADU, or the CADU has been test set is only provided with a serial inter-
re-formatted. This procedure should be face cable. Refer to the printer manual for
completed only as required during the tasks connector specifications for the printer end.
in the previous WPs. The test set end uses a standard IBM com-
patible 25-pin RS-232 type connector.
3. PRINTING FROM THE TEST SET.
a. Make sure the printer DIP-switch settings are cor-
NOTE rect on the printer. Use the test set operators manual and
the printer manual to set up the printer DIP-switches.
The test set is intended to interface with Make sure the printer power is cycled off and back on
many commercially available printers via after the printer DIP-switches are changed.
either a parallel or serial printer port. The
test set has different printer drivers avail- b. Determine if the printer has a serial or parallel
able that you may select, however the DIP- interface connection.
switches on the printer must be positioned
properly in order for the printer and CADU c. If the printer has a serial interface then use the
to work together. RS-232 interface cable, 28130802. Connect the 9-socket
end of the cable to the 9-pin receptacle on the CADU
The critical points for proper printer opera- (serial port), and connect the 25-pin end to the printer
tion with the test set are: (use the provided gender changers and adapters if the
printer has a 9-pin receptacle).
Make sure the printer cable is connected to
the proper connector on the CADU (on the d. If the printer has a parallel interface then you must
CADU, the 9-pin receptacle is the serial acquire a parallel interface cable. Refer to the printer
port, and 25-pin receptacle is the parallel manual for connector specifications for the printer end,
port). the test set end uses a standard IBM-compatible 25-pin

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 3

RS-232 type connector. Connect the 25-pin end of the screen contrast key uses a rolling adjust-
parallel interface cable to the 25-socket receptacle on the ment approach, therefore if you release the
CADU (parallel port), and connect the other end of the CTRST key after the clearest screen has
cable to the printer. gone past then continue to hold the key
until the desired contrast setting returns.
NOTE
If the test set was left in the measurement
If the CADU has already been set up to mode then press QUIT until the ACTION
print on the printer then this next procedure menu is seen, highlight Save and Exit, and
is not required. The CADU will remember press DO to get back to the main menu.
the last setup until the setup is changed or
the CADU is reformatted. Simply connect (2) Press QUIT at each menu until the main menu
the printer cable correctly and press the appears (Figure 1).
PRINT key to print whatever is seen on the
CADU screen. (3) From the main menu (Figure 1), press the F4
key to select MANAGER.
e. Set up the CADU as follows:
(4) From the Manager Menu (Figure 2), press the
NOTE d or f keys to highlight Setup and press DO.

If the CADU indicates low power (internal (5) From the Setup Menus (Figure 3), press the d
batteries require charging) then perform or f keys to highlight Printer and press DO.
one of the following:
(6) From the Printer Control screen (Figure 4),
Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU
observe what printer and printer port are selected in the
and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.
lower right corner of the CADU screen. If the settings are
correct go to step 12, otherwise continue with step e. (7).
Plug the CADU Battery Charger,
29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle (7) If the printer type is wrong then continue
and plug the probe end of the battery
below, otherwise go to step (10) to change the printer
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep-
port.
tacle is located under the credit card access
panel on the top edge of the CADU.
(8) From the Printer Control screen (Figure 4),
(1) On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU highlight Change Type and press DO.
power on.
NOTE
NOTE
Typically the HP_PCL will work for most
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You printers. If this is not the case with the
must highlight and select items that are printer being used then use a trial and error
shown on the CADU screen. To highlight approach with the other types available.
an item, press the d or f arrow keys until
the desired item is highlighted. Once the If you choose not to change anything then
desired item is highlighted, select the item exit the screen by pressing QUIT. If you
by pressing DO. If you do not wish to select wish the test set to accept an item that was
an item then press QUIT to back out of the changed then exit the screen by pressing
menu. DO. The test set will not change any soft-
ware settings if a screen is exited with
If nothing appears on the CADU screen QUIT. Changes are only saved if the
when the CADU is turned on, adjust the screen exited with DO.
screen contrast by pressing and holding the
CTRST key on the CADU, release the (9) From the Printer Types screen (Figure 5), high-
CTRST key when the display is clear. The light the printer driver required and press DO. If a differ-

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 4

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:29:41

Aircraft Type ?
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ?
Flight I.D. ?

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1464
SA

Figure 1. Main Menu Display

Manager Menu

Data Maintenance
Data Transfer
Status
Setup
Test

DO−Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

HM2721
SA

Figure 2. 9Manager Menu9 Display

ent printer was selected then the printer definition in Fig- was selected then the port definition in Figure 4 should
ure 4 should show the new printer. show the new port.

(10) From the Printer Control screen (Figure 4),

(12) When the Printer Control screen (Figure 4)
highlight Change Port and press DO.
shows the correct printer and port then the CADU is set
up properly. Press QUIT three times to return to the main
(11) From the Printer Ports screen (Figure 6), high-
menu (Figure 1).
light the required port and press DO. If a different port

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 5

Setup Menu
Printer
Set Time & Date
Accelerometer
Units
Tail Number
Format CCM

DO−Select Option [QUIT] Go to Main Menu

HM2722
SA

Figure 3. 9Setup Menu9 Display

Printer Control DO−Select QUIT−Exit

Change Type
Change Port
Enable
Disable
Flush Queue

Printer is HP_PCL
Printer Port is parallel
Printer
Printing is Enabled
Spooler is running

HM2723A
SA

Figure 4. 9Print Control9 Display

f. After the CADU is set up, the printer DIP-switches (6) Reboot the CADU (WP 011 00), and retry
are set, and the printer cable is connected, print whatever printing.
is seen on the CADU screen by pressing the PRINT key
on the CADU. If the CADU does not print to the printer 4. SETTING TIME AND DATE ON CADU.
perform the following:
NOTE
(1) Make sure the printer is turned on.
All of the data collected by the test set is
(2) Make sure the printer cable is attached to the stored in memory according to the date
correct connector on the CADU. and time the flight plan was started. There-
fore, it is important that the date and time
(3) Make sure the proper printer cable is being be correct so that data stored in memory
used. can be correctly related to measurements
made on the aircraft.
(4) Make sure the CADU is set up properly.
If the CADU indicates low power (internal
(5) Make sure the printer DIP-switches are prop- batteries require charging) perform one of
erly set. the following:

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 6

Printer Types DO−Select QUIT−Exit

CANON
FP40
CANON_LF
FP40_land
CANON_land
INKJET
CANON_land_lf
INKJET_hd
EPSON
INKJET_kodak
EPSON_with_lf INKJET_kodak_hd
EPSON_24
HP_PCL
EPSON_24_lf
HP_PCL_2
EPSON_hd
HP_PCL _land
EPSON_hd_lf

Spooler is running

HM2724A
SA

Figure 5. 9Printer Types9 Display

Printer Ports DO−Select QUIT−Exit

Parallel Port
Serial Port

Printer is HP_PCL
Printer Port is parallel
Printer
Printing is Enabled
Spooler is running

HM2725A
SA

Figure 6. 9Printer Ports9 Display

• Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU shown on the CADU screen. To highlight
and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable. an item, press the d or f arrow keys until
the desired item is highlighted. Once the
• Plug the CADU Battery Charger, desired item is highlighted, select the item
29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle by pressing DO. If you do not wish to select
and plug the probe end of the battery an item, press QUIT to back out of the
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep- menu.
tacle is located under the credit card
access panel on the top edge of the If nothing appears on the CADU screen
CADU. when the CADU is turned on, adjust the
screen contrast by pressing and holding the
a. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power CTRST key on the CADU. Release the
on. CTRST key when the display is clear. The
screen contrast key uses a rolling adjust-
NOTE ment approach, therefore if you release the
CTRST key after the clearest screen has
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You gone past, continue to hold the key until the
must highlight and select items that are desired contrast setting returns.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 7

If the test set was left in the measurement Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU
mode, press QUIT until the ACTION menu and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.
is seen, highlight Save and Exit, and press
DO to get back to the main menu. Plug the CADU Battery Charger,
29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle
b. Press QUIT at each menu, until the main menu and plug the probe end of the battery
appears (Figure 1). charger into the CADU. The CADU recep-
tacle is located under the credit card access
c. From the main menu (Figure 1), press the F4 key panel on the top edge of the CADU.
to select MANAGER.
a. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power
d. From the Manager Menu (Figure 2), press the d on.
or f keys to highlight Setup and press DO.
NOTE
e. From the Setup Menu (Figure 3), press the d or f
keys to highlight Set Time & Date and press DO. The CADU is a menu-driven device. You
must highlight and select items that are
f. From the TIME & DATE CHANGE screen (Figure shown on the CADU screen. To highlight
7), press the d or f keys to highlight the item that an item, press the d or f arrow keys until
requires changing. the desired item is highlighted. Once the
desired item is highlighted, select the item
g. Once the desired item is highlighted, use the s or by pressing DO. If you do not wish to select
g keys and the numeric key pad until the item is properly an item then press QUIT to back out of the
specified. menu.

NOTE If nothing appears on the CADU screen

when the CADU is turned on, adjust the
If QUIT is pressed to exit the TIME & DATE screen contrast by pressing and holding the
CHANGE screen no changes will be saved. CTRST key on the CADU, release the
Press DO to save changes and to exit the CTRST key when the display is clear to
TIME & DATE CHANGE screen. you. The screen contrast key uses a rolling
adjustment approach, therefore if you
h. Once the time and date is properly set, press DO release the CTRST key after the clearest
to save the changes and exit the screen. screen has gone past, continue to hold the
key until the desired contrast setting returns.
i. Press QUIT twice to return to the main menu (Fig-
ure 1). If the test set was left in the measurement
mode, press QUIT until the ACTION menu
5. SETTING ACCELEROMETER TYPES ON CADU. is seen, highlight Save and Exit, and press
DO to get back to the main menu.
NOTE
b. Press QUIT at each menu, until the main menu
Different accelerometer types have differ- appears (Figure 1).
ent set up parameters which will affect the
vibration measurement. If the incorrect c. From the main menu (Figure 1), press the F4 key
accelerometer type is specified in the to select MANAGER.
CADU, invalid measurements will be
made. d. From the Manager Menu (Figure 2), press the d
or f keys to highlight Setup and press DO.
If the CADU indicates low power (internal
batteries require charging), perform one of e. From the Setup Menu (Figure 3), press the d or f
the following: keys to highlight Accelerometer and press DO.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 8

Entry Form
TIME & DATE CHANGE
Hour 15
Minute 7
Second 34

Day 13
Month 11
Year 10
Select with Arrows and Edit Values
[F1] & [F2] Scrolls thru character set
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit

HM2726B
SA

Figure 7. 9TIME & DATE CHANGE9 Display

f. Review the Accelerometer Type Selection screen units as the stated criteria. If you do not
(Figure 8) and make sure that the accelerometers are pay attention to units it is possible to be
specified exactly as shown in Figure 8. If any deviation deceived into thinking that the vibration
from Figure 8 is noted, change the setting as follows: criteria for a task has been satisfied, when
in reality, the vibration criteria may not be
(1) From the Accelerometer Type Selection screen satisfied.
(Figure 8), use the d or f keys to highlight the acceler-
ometer channel that is improperly specified. If the CADU indicates low power (internal
batteries require charging), perform one of
(2) Once the accelerometer channel is the following:
highlighted, press the s or g keys until the proper accel-
erometer type is displayed. Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU
and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.
(3) Repeat this procedure until all accelerometer
types are specified exactly as shown in Figure 8.
Plug the CADU Battery Charger,
29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle
NOTE
and plug the probe end of the battery
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep-
If QUIT is pressed to exit the Accelerom-
tacle is located under the credit card access
eter Type Selection screen, no changes will
panel on the top edge of the CADU.
be saved.

g. Once all of the accelerometer types are properly a. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power
specified, press DO to exit the screen and save any on.
changes that were made to the accelerometer types.
NOTE
h. Press QUIT twice to return to the main menu (Fig-
ure 1). The CADU is a menu-driven device. You
must highlight and select items that are
6. SETTING DATA DISPLAY UNITS ON CADU. shown on the CADU screen. To highlight
an item, press the d or f arrow keys until
NOTE the desired item is highlighted. Once the
desired item is highlighted, select the item
Data measured by the test set can be by pressing DO. If you do not wish to select
viewed in several different units. Make sure an item, press QUIT to back out of the
that the vibration measured is in the same menu.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 9

Entry Form

Accelerometer Type Selection

CH1? Wil M991 CH8? Wil M991

CH2? Wil M991 CH9? Wil M991
CH3? Wil M991 CH10? Wil M991
CH4? Wil M991 CH11? Wil M991
CH5? Wil M991 CH12? Wil M991
CH6? Wil M991 CH13? Wil M991
CH7? Wil M991 CH14? Wil M991

[UP] & [DOWN] Select Acc Channels

[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Select Acc Type
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit
FG0644
SA

Figure 8. 9Accelerometer Type Selection9 Display

f. Review the Units Definition Display (Figure 9) and
make sure that the units are specified exactly as shown in
If nothing appears on the CADU screen Figure 9. If any deviation from Figure 9 is noted, change
when the CADU is turned on, adjust the the setting as follows:
screen contrast by pressing and holding the
CTRST key on the CADU. Release the NOTE
CTRST key when the display is clear. The
All criteria in this manual are stated in the
screen contrast key uses a rolling adjust-
following units: 9rpm9 = revolutions per
ment approach, therefore if you release the
minute, 9deg9 = degrees, 9ips9 = inches per
CTRST key after the clearest screen has
second, 9mm9 = millimeters.
gone past, continue to hold the key until the
desired contrast setting returns. (1) From the units selection screen (Figure 9), use
the d or f keys to highlight the unit that is to be
If the test set was left in the measurement changed.
mode, press QUIT until the ACTION menu
(2) Once the unit is highlighted, press the s or g
is seen, highlight Save and Exit, and press
keys until the proper unit type is displayed.
DO to get back to the main menu.
(3) Repeat this procedure until all units are defined
b. Press QUIT at each menu, until the main menu exactly as shown in Figure 9.
appears (Figure 1). NOTE

If QUIT is pressed to exit the Units Defini-

c. From the main menu (Figure 1), press the F4 key
tion screen, no changes will be saved. Press
to select MANAGER.
DO to exit this screen and save changes.

d. From the Manager Menu (Figure 2), press the d g. Once all of the units are properly specified, press
or f keys to highlight Setup and press DO. DO to exit the screen and save any changes that were
made to the unit definitions.

e. From the Setup Menu (Figure 3), press the d or f h. Press QUIT twice to return to the main menu (Fig-
keys to highlight Units and press DO. ure 1).

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 009 00
Page 10

Entry Form
Please change units if required
Frequency ? rpm

Phase ? deg

Vibration ? ips

Track ? mm

[UP] & [DOWN] Arrows : Select Items

[LEFT] & [RIGHT] Arrows : Toggle Options
[DO] Save & Exit [QUIT] Exit

HM2728
SA

Figure 9. Units Definition Display

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
1 December 2010 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

SOFTWARE / DATA MANAGEMENT INSTRUCTIONS

EFFECTIVITY: S-70i Helicopters

Reference Material

RADS-AT Operation and Maintenance .................................................................... 29480100

Alphabetical Index

Subject Page/No.

Purpose ........................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Test Procedures ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Compressing CADU Memory ........................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Deleting Data From CADU Memory .................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Downloading Data From CADU To PC ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Rebooting The CADU ............................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Uploading Aircraft Setup Files From Credit Card To CADU ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Uploading Data Or Aircraft Files From PC To CADU ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
Support Equipment Required

Part No./Type Designation Nomenclature

28130800 Gender Changer (GE Aviation Systems)

28130801 Adapter (GE Aviation Systems)
28130802 RS-232 Cable (GE Aviation Systems)
28131220 Credit Card Memory (GE Aviation Systems)
29315000 Battery Charger (GE Aviation Systems)
29481301 Control and Display Unit (CADU) (GE
Aviation Systems)

Materials Required
None

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 2

1. PURPOSE. (2) Press and hold the DO and QUIT keys at pre-
cisely the same time. Release both keys after several sec-
a. The purpose of this Work Package is to provide onds.
you with the instruction on how to download data from
CADU, upload aircraft software to CADU, upload data to NOTE
CADU, delete data from CADU, compress CADU
memory, and reboot CADU. Some of these functions are If the menu is not seen one minute after the
required during normal operation of the test set while DO/QUIT keystrokes, go to step b. and
some are only required periodically. Several of these perform the alternate reboot method.
tasks require that the CADU be connected to a Personal
Computer (PC).
(3) From the menu, press 1 to proceed with nor-
mal operation.
2. TEST PROCEDURES.

NOTE
a. When in the MANAGER mode on the CADU, the
DO key selects the highlighted item and moves to the next
screen, while the QUIT key backs out to the previous The screen will go blank for approximately
screen. While in this mode you must press DO when exit- 30 seconds before the main menu is seen.
ing a screen after changes have been made (the test set
does not change any software settings until DO is (4) The test set will return to the main menu (Figure
pressed). If you press QUIT to exit a screen, then any 1). The test set is now ready for normal operation.
changes made to that screen are not saved and nothing
in the software is changed. b. If after 30 seconds the CADU does not respond to
the DO/QUIT keystroke in the preferred reboot method,
3. REBOOTING THE CADU. perform the alternate reboot method below:

NOTE (1) On the CADU, press OFF to turn the CADU

power off.
The preferred method of rebooting the
CADU should always be attempted first. If NOTE
the preferred method does not work then
use the alternate method. If the alternate The CADU should respond immediately to
method of rebooting is done too often it the HELP/ON keystroke. As the CADU
may result in memory fragmentation that reboots the statement: 9CADU System Boot-
may require the CADU ram disk to be strap V3.1 Please Wait .........9 will be
reformatted and may limit the data that can seen, followed shortly by a menu.
be stored in CADU memory.
(2) Press and hold the HELP and ON keys at pre-
a. The preferred method of rebooting the CADU is as cisely the same time. Release both keys after several sec-
follows: onds.

(1) On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU (3) From the menu, press 1 to proceed with nor-
power on. mal operation.

NOTE NOTE

The CADU may take up to 30 seconds to The screen will go blank for approximately
respond to the DO/QUIT keystroke. As the 30 seconds before the main menu is seen.
CADU reboots the statement: 9CADU Sys-
tem Bootstrap V3.1 Please Wait .........9 will (4) The test set will return to the main menu (Figure
be seen, followed shortly by a menu. 1). The test set is now ready for normal operation.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 3

SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS − SHL

RADS−AT VERSION 6.20
12−NOV−10 14:29:41

Aircraft Type ?
Tail Number ?
Flight Plan ?
Flight I.D. ?

[DO] = Select Highlighted Item

[QUIT] = Clear Highlighted Item

MEASURE DISPLAY DIAGS MANAGER

F1 F2 F3 F4

IM1464
SA

Figure 1. Main Menu Display

4. DOWNLOADING DATA FROM CADU TO PC. port receptacle the 25-pin to 9-pin adapter
must be used to connect the CADU to the
NOTE PC.

In general, the serial com port on most

This task involves connecting the CADU to
desktop PCs’ will utilize a male 25-pin
a PC. This procedure requires that you
receptacle. Do not confuse this with the
have a working knowledge of the PC being
parallel port which is usually used with a
used.
PC printer (the parallel port on most desk-
top PCs’ will utilize a female 25-pin recep-
This function requires use of the WinRAD- tacle).
SCOM program. WinRADSCOM is a pro-
gram provided with the test set which auto- In general, the serial com port on most lap-
mates many of the software maintenance top PCs’ will utilize a male 9-pin recep-
tasks. tacle. Do not confuse this with the parallel
port which is usually used with a PC printer
The WinRADSCOM software version is the (the parallel port on most laptop PCs’ will
same as the software version. Make sure utilize a female 25-pin receptacle).
the proper WinRADSCOM version is used.
If it is determined that the serial com port
on the PC being used utilizes a male 25-pin
If the WinRADSCOM program is not
receptacle the 25-pin male-to-female gen-
installed on the PC contact a Sikorsky Air-
der changer must be used to connect the
craft or GE Aviation Systems representa-
25-pin end of the RS-232 cable (P/N
tive.
28130802) to the serial com port on the
PC.
Some PCs have a 25-pin COM port recep-
tacle, while others may have a 9-pin COM If it is determined that the serial com port
port receptacle. If the PC has a 9-pin COM on the PC being used utilizes a male 9-pin

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 4

FB0035
SA

Figure 2. Backup CADU Data to PC Selection Under

WinRADSCOM CADU Toolbar
receptacle the 25-pin male-to-female gen-
der changer and the 25-pin-to-9-pin
adapter must be used to connect the 25-pin
end of the RS-232 cable (P/N 28130802)
to the serial com port on the PC. FB0036
SA

a. Connect the CADU and PC using the RS-232 Figure 3. Backup Aircraft Data from CADU Dialog Box
cable, 28130802, provided with the test set. Connect the
9-pin end of the cable to the 9-pin receptacle on the
CADU. Connect the 25-pin end of the cable to the serial
com port on the PC (use the gender changer and adapter Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU
provided as required. See notes above). and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.

NOTE Plug the CADU Battery Charger,

29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle
and plug the probe end of the battery
WinRADSCOM must be installed on the PC
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep-
hard drive prior to its use.
tacle is located under the credit card access
panel on the top edge of the CADU.
b. Turn the PC on and start the WinRADSCOM pro-
gram from its installed location on the PC hard drive.
e. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power
on.
c. Select Backup CADU Data to PC from the CADU
dropdown on the WinRADSCOM main menu (see Figure
2). NOTE

d. The Backup Aircraft Data from CADU dialog box The CADU is a menu-driven device. You
will be displayed (see Figure 3). must highlight and select items that are
shown on the CADU screen. To highlight
an item, press the d or f arrow keys until
NOTE the desired item is highlighted. Once the
desired item is highlighted, select the item
If the CADU indicates low power (internal by pressing DO. If you do not wish to select
batteries require charging), perform one of an item, press QUIT to back out of the
the following: menu.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 5

If nothing appears on the CADU screen Data will be downloaded in ten separate
when the CADU is turned on, adjust the files. Once all ten files are transferred, the
screen contrast by pressing and holding the data transfer will be complete.
CTRST key on the CADU. Release the
CTRST key when the display is clear. The Tail numbers with large amounts of associ-
screen contrast key uses a rolling adjust- ated data can take a relatively long tome to
ment approach, therefore if you release the download (10 - 20 minutes).
CTRST key after the clearest screen has
gone past, continue to hold the key until the o. Once the data transfer is complete the user will
desired contrast setting returns. have an opportunity to enter any comments, if desired, to
store within the data file in the entry box labeled, Com-
If the test set was left in the measurement ment to store in file.
mode, press QUIT until the ACTION menu
is seen, highlight Save and Exit, and press NOTE
DO to get back to the main menu.
If the user does not click the Unpack a
f. Press QUIT at each menu, until main menu backup temp file command button prior to
appears (Figure 1). closing the Backup Aircraft Data from
CADU dialog box, the transferred data will
g. From the CADU main menu, press the F4 key to not be permanently saved to the PC hard
select MANAGER. drive. If this situation occurs, it will be nec-
essary to attempt the entire data backup to
PC procedure again starting with PARA 4
h. From the Manager Menu, press the d or f keys step d in this WP.
to highlight Data Transfer and press DO.
p. Click Unpack a backup temp file on the PC Backup
i. From the Backup & Restore menu, press the d or Aircraft Data from CADU dialog box to complete storage
f keys to highlight Transfer to PC and press DO. of data on the PC.

j. From the Backup menu, press the d or f keys to q. During the data unpacking process, the data will
highlight Tail Number, and press DO. be automatically stored by the aircraft type, followed by
the tail number, followed by the date, and then the time
k. Highlight the S-70i or S70iCEF aircraft type, the data was backed up. This data will be stored in this
whichever is applicable and press DO. format under the Data directory of WinRADSCOM unless
commanded differently by the Change Directory option in
the CADU Advanced Utils menu.
l. Highlight the tail number of the data that is to be
transferred and press DO.
r. The CADU screen will indicate that the CADU to
PC Transfer is complete. On the CADU, Press DO to exit
m. Press the s or g arrow key until Yes is seen next to the CADU to PC transfer.
the BACKUP ? prompt. Once YES is seen, press DO.
NOTE
n. Verify that the CADU to PC cable is connected and
the PC is ready to receive data. Click the Start a Backup It is recommended that data be deleted
command button on the PC Backup Aircraft Data from from the CADU as soon as the data is
CADU dialog box and then press DO to transfer data. downloaded. This will keep data from get-
ting downloaded to multiple locations, and
NOTE will prevent the CADU’s memory from
becoming full with data.
The PC screen and CADU screen will
inform the operator when the data transfer s. Data can be deleted from the CADU at this time by
is complete. pressing the s or g arrow key until Yes is seen next to the

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 6

Continue ? prompt, and pressing DO. If an error screen

is seen, press QUIT to clear. In general, the serial com port on most lap-
top PCs’ will utilize a male 9-pin recep-
t. Press QUIT until the main menu is seen on the tacle. Do not confuse this with the parallel
CADU. port which is usually used with a PC printer
(the parallel port on most laptop PCs’ will
u. If more data is to be downloaded, repeat this pro- utilize a female 25-pin receptacle).
cedure starting at step b.
If it is determined that the serial com port
v. Turn the CADU off by pressing the OFF key. on the PC being used utilizes a male 25-pin
receptacle the 25-pin male-to-female gen-
w. Disconnect the cable between the PC and CADU. der changer must be used to connect the
Return the CADU and cable to the storage case. 25-pin end of the RS-232 cable (P/N
28130802) to the serial com port on the
5. UPLOADING DATA OR AIRCRAFT FILES PC.
FROM PC TO CADU.
If it is determined that the serial com port
NOTE on the PC being used utilizes a male 9-pin
receptacle the 25-pin male-to-female gen-
This task involves connecting the CADU to der changer and the 25-pin-to-9-pin
a PC. This procedure requires that you adapter must be used to connect the 25-pin
have a working knowledge of the PC being end of the RS-232 cable (P/N 28130802)
used. to the serial com port on the PC.

This function requires use of the WinRAD- a. Connect the CADU and PC using the RS-232
SCOM program. WinRADSCOM is a pro- cable, 28130802, provided with the test set. Connect the
gram provided with the test set which auto- 9-pin end of the cable to the 9-pin receptacle on the
mates many of the software maintenance CADU. Connect the 25-pin end of the cable to the serial
tasks. The WinRADSCOM software version com port on the PC (use the gender changer and adapter
is the same as the software version and is provided as required, see notes above).
identified in the INTRODUCTION section of
the Maintenance Manual. Make sure the NOTE
proper WinRADSCOM version is used.
If the CADU indicates low power (internal
If the WinRADSCOM program is not batteries require charging), perform one of
installed on the PC contact a Sikorsky Air- the following:
craft or GE Aviation Systems representa-
tive.
Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU
and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.
Some PCs’ have a 25-pin COM port recep-
tacle, while others may have a 9-pin COM
Plug the CADU Battery Charger,
port receptacle. If the PC has a 9-pin COM
29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle
port receptacle the 25-pin to 9-pin adapter
and plug the probe end of the battery
must be used to connect the CADU to the
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep-
PC.
tacle is located under the credit card access
panel on the top edge of the CADU.
In general, the serial com port on most
desktop PCs’ will utilize a male 25-pin
receptacle. Do not confuse this with the b. Reboot the CADU (PARA 3).
parallel port which is usually used with a
PC printer (the parallel port on most desk- c. From the menu, press 2 to Set up for host commu-
top PCs’ will utilize a female 25-pin recep- nication. The CADU is now ready to receive data from the
tacle). PC.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 7

FB0037
SA

Figure 4. Load Aircraft Data to CADU Selection Under

WinRADSCOM CADU Toolbar
NOTE

Aircraft setup files or previously measured

data may be loaded on the CADU using
this procedure. FB0038
SA

Figure 5. Load Aircraft Data to CADU Dialog Box

For previously measured data each dataset
that has been downloaded to PC exists in (1) Select either one compressed data file or one
10 separate files. One dataset consists of individual data file from the PC to be loaded to the CADU.
file1, file2, file3, file4, file5, file6, file7,
file8, file16, and file17. If more than one
g. Click the Load command button on the Load Air-
dataset was downloaded into the same
craft Data to CADU dialog box. During the file load do
directory on the PC the file names are
not press any keys on the CADU or on the PC. While data
appended with 001 for the second dataset
is being transferred a screen similar to the one in Figure 6
that was downloaded (resulting in the file-
will be displayed on the PC along with the file transfer
names file1001, file2001, etc.), and the
information.
filenames for the third dataset downloaded
would be appended with 002, and so on.
h. When successful file loading is complete, the fol-
lowing dialog will be displayed (see Figure 7).
WinRADSCOM must be installed on the PC
hard drive prior to its use.
i. Click the OK command button.
d. Turn the PC on and start the WinRADSCOM pro-
gram. j. The Load Aircraft Data to CADU dialog box will
still be displayed on the PC and the CADU will still be
directly linked to the PC under the Host Communication
e. Select Load Aircraft Data to CADU from the CADU
mode.
dropdown on the WinRADSCOM main menu (see Figure
4). The Load Aircraft Data to CADU dialog box will be
displayed (see Figure 5). NOTE

f. Click the Browse command button from the Load Upon completion of the transfer of data the
Aircraft Data to CADU dialog box to find the correct file PC to the CADU, the CADU screen should
to load. become dark and blank.

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 8

FB0039 FB0040
SA SA

Figure 6. WinRADSCOM Load Aircraft Data Transfer Figure 7. Successful Aircraft Data Load Dialog Box
Progress
6. UPLOADING AIRCRAFT SETUP FILES FROM
k. Follow any instructions that may appear on the CREDIT CARD TO CADU.
CADU. If the file loading was successful, a message will
appear on the CADU screen to inform the operator.
CAUTION
l. If loading additional data files then repeat steps f
through step k. Click the Done command button on the PC
Load Aircraft Data to CADU dialog box if no more data The credit card and CADU will be
files are to be loaded. damaged if the credit card is installed
improperly and forced into the credit card
m. The Quit CADU/Host Comm dialog box is dis- slot.
played as follows (see Figure 8). Click the OK command
button and the CADU will exit Host Mode. NOTE

Credit card must be inserted into the credit

n. On the CADU, the screen will return to the menu.
card slot in the CADU with the back of the
Press 1 on the keypad to Proceed with normal operation
credit card facing up.
(see Figure 9).
Credit card must be inserted pin-end first
NOTE
into the credit card slot in the CADU

The screen will go blank for approximately Credit card slot is located at the top, left
30 seconds before the main menu is seen. side of the CADU (with the CADU screen
and keyboard facing up) under a screw-on
o. The test set will return to the main menu (Figure 1). access panel.
The test set is now ready for normal operation.
a. With the CADU keyboard and screen facing up,
p. Turn the CADU off (press OFF). loosen the right hand credit card slot access panel screw

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 9

back of credit card facing up. Using light force press the
credit card all the way into the slot.

NOTE

If the CADU indicates low power (internal

batteries require charging), perform one of
the following:

Turn the CADU on and connect the CADU

and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.

Plug the CADU battery charger,

29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle
and plug the probe end of the battery
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep-
tacle is located under the credit card access
panel on the top of the CADU.

c. Reboot the CADU (PARA 3).

d. From the menu, press 3 to load aircraft setup files

from the credit card.
FB0041
SA
e. Press the number for the file that is to be uploaded.
Figure 8. Quit CADU/Host Communication Confirmation The aircraft setup file will begin to be loaded on the
Dialog Box CADU.

f. Once the aircraft setup file upload is complete,

press QUIT to return to the menu.

g. From the menu, press 1 to proceed with normal

operation.

NOTE

The CADU screen will go blank for

approximately 30 seconds before the main
menu is seen.

h. The CADU will return to the main menu (Figure 1).

The CADU is now ready for normal operation.

FB0042 i. To remove the credit card from the CADU, press

SA
the credit card release button located to the immediate
Figure 9. Menu Proceed with Normal Operation right of the credit card slot (with the CADU keyboard and
Selection (Keypad Option 1) screen facing up). Remove the credit card from the slot.

and rotate access panel up to expose the credit card slot 7. DELETING DATA FROM CADU MEMORY.
(the left hand access panel screw may have to be loos-
ened slightly to let the access panel rotate freely). NOTE

b. With the CADU keyboard and screen facing up, If the CADU indicates low power (internal
partially insert the credit card into the credit card slot on batteries require charging), perform one of
the CADU. Insert the credit card pin-end first with the the following:

The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 10

e. From the Data Maintenance menu, press the d or

Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU f keys to highlight Delete and press DO.
and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.
NOTE
Plug the CADU Battery Charger,
29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle Several selections are available to you
and plug the probe end of the battery when deleting data from memory. To delete
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep- all data for an entire aircraft type, select
tacle is located under the credit card access Aircraft Data from the Delete menu. To
panel on the top edge of the CADU. delete all data for a specific tail number,
select Tail Number. To delete just one set of
a. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power flight data select Flight.
on.
f. From the Delete menu, press the d or f keys to
NOTE highlight the item that is to be deleted.

The CADU is a menu-driven device. You g. Highlight the S-70i or 70iCEF aircraft type, which-
must highlight and select items that are ever is applicable, and press DO.
shown on the CADU screen. To highlight
an item, press the d or f arrow keys until h. Highlight the data to be deleted (Tail number,
the desired item is highlighted. Once the Flight Plan, and Flight ID if required). Press DO after each
desired item is highlighted, select the item selection.
by pressing DO. If you do not wish to select
an item, press QUIT to back out of the i. If more data is to be deleted, repeat this procedure
menu. until all desired data is deleted. Once all desired data has
been deleted, then press QUIT until the main menu (Fig-
ure 1) is seen.
If nothing appears on the CADU screen
when the CADU is turned on, adjust the
j. After Data has been deleted, compress CADU
screen contrast by pressing and holding the
memory. Refer to Compressing CADU Memory (PARA 8).
CTRST key on the CADU. Release the
CTRST key when the display is clear. The
8. COMPRESSING CADU MEMORY.
screen contrast key uses a rolling adjust-
ment approach, therefore if you release the
NOTE
CTRST key after the clearest screen has
gone past, continue to hold the key until the
If the CADU indicates low power (internal
desired contrast setting returns.
batteries require charging), perform one of
the following:
If the test set was left in the measurement
mode then press QUIT until the ACTION Turn the DAU on and connect the CADU
menu is seen, highlight Save and Exit, and and DAU using the CADU to DAU cable.
press DO to get back to the main menu.
Plug the CADU Battery Charger,
b. Press QUIT at each menu until the main menu 29315000, into a 120 VAC receptacle
appears (Figure 1). and plug the probe end of the battery
charger into the CADU. The CADU recep-
c. From the main menu (Figure 1), press the F4 key tacle is located under the credit card access
to select MANAGER. panel on the top edge of the CADU.

d. From the Manager Menu, press the d or f keys a. On the CADU, press ON to turn the CADU power
to highlight Data Maintenance and press DO. on.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
 TM 1-70i-VIB 010 00
Page 11/(12 Blank)

NOTE d. From the Manager Menu, press the d or f keys

to highlight Data Maintenance and press DO.
The CADU is a menu-driven device. You
must highlight and select items that are NOTE
shown on the CADU screen. To highlight
an item, press the d or f arrow keys until Compressing CADU memory can take up
the desired item is highlighted. Once the to several minutes. Do not turn the CADU
desired item is highlighted, select the item off or press any keys while the CADU is
by pressing DO. If you do not wish to select compressing memory.
an item, press QUIT to back out of the
It is recommended that the CADU be pow-
menu.
ered from the DAU or plugged into the Bat-
tery Charger when compressing memory. If
If the test set was left in the measurement
the CADU turns off during the compression
mode, press QUIT until the ACTION menu
process it is possible that memory corrup-
is seen, highlight Save and Exit, and press
tion and data loss could result.
DO to get back to the main menu.
e. From the Data Maintenance menu, press the d or
b. Press QUIT at each menu until the main menu f keys to highlight Compress and press DO.
appears (Figure 1).
f. Once the Data Maintenance menu is seen again,
c. From the main menu (Figure 1), press the F4 key press QUIT at each menu until the main menu is seen
to select MANAGER. (Figure 1). The test set is now ready for normal operation.

Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation Proprietary. Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restrictions of the title page of this document.
This information
The following supersedes allcontains technicalmarkings:
other export data subjectWARNING
to the ITAR -and EAR.
This See applicable
document classifications
contains technicalondata
the first page. to the ITAR.
subject
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)
The following supersedes all other export markings: WARNING - This document contains technical data subject to the ITAR.
Export Classification: ITAR CATEGORY VIII(i)